^f V €: :^_ f V s^ .avaaiH^ ^(?Aavaaii-#' ^TiijoNvsoi^ %a3AiNnmv ^„...._"t:^ *?-,!!: .;^ UNIVERS//) o I30NV-S01^ ;UNIVERJ//j o ^ -^llIBRARYQc. -^^tllBRARYQ^ %a3AiNn-3WV^ %ojnv3jo'^ %ojnv3jo^ o o I30NVSOV"^ '^/ia3AiNn-3Wv ^OFCAllFOi?^ ^OF-CAIIFO% £^5 "^^ommi^ '^^Aavaaii^^ IIBRARY^^^ -^HIBRARYO^ 3JnV3JO'^' '^«i/0JllVJJO'>^ ■■CAIIF0% .^,OFCALIF0% ^MFUNIVER57/v o ^WE-UNIVER5//i vvlOSANCEl£j> Q % '^/Sa3AINn-3WV A>clOSANCElfj> o iHVHaii-i>^ "^(^Aavaan-i^ ^.-.._ -t:.^ "^z:. ,v"^ # ^(^AavaaiH^ V,OFCAIIFO% "^^Aavaaiii^ ^^Aavaaiii^ < ^i CO imo/f^ <^\mm\o/^^ ^V\EUNIVER% ^lOSANCElfjv. IVDJO^" ^.!/ojiivojo>' ■^/jaaAiNdJiw^ IVER% ^lOSANCElfj-^ ^IIIBRARY^/;^ <^ILIBRARYQ<«. ^OJIIVJJO'^ ^OF-CAtlF0% ^0FCAIIF0% 'S©!!'!!® CO K AVA RING. TONGA AND THE FRIENDLY ISLANDS ■WITH WRITTEN FOR YOUNG PEOPLE. BY SARAH S. FARMER. HAMILTON, ADAMS, & Co., PATERNOSTER ROW. MDCCCLT. BEOTHBHS, PBINTERS, WHITEPRIARS STREET, LONDON. DU CONTENTS. Cgapter x. PAGE Discovery of the South Seas 1 ^m n. Islands of the Pacific 8 (KI^Hpto iii. Coral Workers and their Doings 17 Cl^apttr it). The Friendly Islanders 31 dtJ^aptfr (t. Captain Cook's Visits 42 Ci^aptcr bi. First Christian Mission 68 dljaptir bn. Hope Deferred 97 d^apicr bill. Religion, Social State Goternment, and Language of Tonga 125 1014629 VI CONTENTS. PAGE Chapter k. Methodist Mission 152 Christian Fiest-feuii3 178 Success and Trials 200 C^aptfr -vH. The Chtteches Multiplied 240 Cljapler mi. Wae in Tonga 293 C^apltr nb. Peace and Peogeess 329 C^fapkr xb. King Geoege's Eeign 371 Ci^apkr sbi. CONCIiUSION 416 ENGRAVINGS, Kava Eing Frontispiece. PAGB Map of Islands of the Pacific 1 COEALS 20 Pai-Toka * 46 Canoes 64 Map of Tonga and Friendly Islands 151 Mission Premises, Vavau 241 Harbour of Vavau - . . . . 341 Training Institution, Tonga 354 "Eeading House" 386 I.Jhnyrr,Sr. MO \5o " leo "^ 1/ Boun fyl'f 70 ■• 180 ]t70 ISJLAT^BS; OF TIIE IPACIJFZC o fSO 140 ^30 PO ]f.PO !>o '^o TONGA AND THE FELENDLY ISLANDS. DISCOVERY OF THE SOUTH SEAS. OU have heard, I dare say, that those ancient nations who have left us such wonderful proofs of their talents and skill in sculpture "and painting, in building temples and tombs, and in making poetry and speeches, were not very clever at geography. They had curious notions of the shape of the earth. Some imagined that it was lik'e a cylinder ; others compared it to a drum ; others again, thought that it was in the form of a ship ; and some believed it to be a very high mountain, exceed- ingly wide at the base, with the stars floating about its summit. It was a puzzling question to many people whether Italy was in the form of a square or a triangle. If a little English girl, who had paid fair attention to her lessons, could go back two tliousand two hundred years, and sit down to talk with that inquiriug, truth-loving, travelled old Greek, Herodotus, 2 DISCOTEEY OF THE SOrTH SEAS. she miglit teLl him a great deal that he did not know. The existence of Britain and America would seem to him wonderful news, too strange to be true ; and even if told that Africa stretches away to the south, far below Arabia, it is a question how he would receive so new an idea. Yet Herodotus was a traveller in Servia and in Southern Russia ; he visited Babylon and Susa ; he described the Caspian Sea ; and told his countrymen a great deal about Egj-pt and its wonderful river. No doubt he thought pretty well of himself and of his knowledge. And so he well might. He was in advance of his age. Such a man must have received greater gifts than his fellow men, or he must have turned common gifts to better account. The chief discoverers in the old world times were the Phceuicians, the Greeks, the Carthaginians, and the Romans. If you look at your classical atlas you will see that these people lived in countries whose shores were washed by an inland sea, now called the Mediterranean. At first they were content with short coasting voyages : but as years rolled on, and commerce increased, they learned to build better ships and they ventured out further. To the west, they passed the Straits of Gibraltar, and found out England and Ireland, Norway and the Baltic ; eastward they reached India and the borders of China : but what lay beyond, on either hand, was a great mystery to them. Further than India, they said, lay "land unknown." And away in the west, they might have DISCOYERT OF THE SOUTK SEAS. 3 said with more of trutli, " sea unknown." "Where knowledge failed, fancy was busy. They had pleasant dreams of the golden country that the sun left behind him every morning, and of the bright and happy islands gilded by his setting radiance : and though they had never seen them, yet they hoped to see them some day. Among many vague conjectures we meet here and there with one that startles us by its near approach to important discovery. Such was Aristotle's suggestion that, setting sail from the coasts of Spain, a voyager might reach India : and so he might, you know, if the huge continent of America did not lie in his way. In the middle ages, learning of all kinds was chiefly to be found with the monks. There it lay, shut up for long years within the walls of their monasteries, and not much the better for its conceal- ment. The maps of those days are amusing specimens of mistaken geography, and the writers about distant countries were more concerned to tell surprising stories than to give statements of fact. Towards the close of the thirteenth century, the noted Marco Polo set off on his Eastern travels. He went as the companion of his father and uncle, mer- chants of A'^enice. He was a boy of fifteen when he left his native city, and he returned to it a man of forty. During his long absence he had lived for many years at the court of the grand Khan ; and he had much to tell of his power and magnificence, of the warlike Tatars, and of the busy, wealthy Chinese ; he b2 4 DISCOVERT OF THE SOUTH SEAS. liad visited Japau, Sumatra, Cejlou, and Continental India. All lie told interested his countrymen : but they were especially pleased to hear of gold and gems, of lakes producing pearls, and mines filled with tur- quoise. Marco Polo showed them a great many diamonds, and sapphires, and rubies of his own. After telling his story over and over again, he was persuaded to write it down, and this he did wliile imprisoned in Genoa, having been taken captive as he was fighting for his own city, Venice. The book that he wrote contains an account of much that he did see and of much that he did not see. His own truth and accu- racy are confirmed by the more perfect knowledge of later times : but he often made mistakes when he trusted other people. It seems as if Marco Polo's voice, sounding out from his Genoese prison, helped to awaken Europe from her sleep of many ages. Soon after this we find her children all astir. The next two centuries are famous for invention at home and for discovery abroad. Gunpowder, oil-painting, } aper-making from linen rags, copper-plate engraving, and printing were among the new things found out. The chief object of the voyagers of those days was to discover the best Avay to India. On the one liaud, they thought it possible to accomplish this by sailing round Africa, and on the other, by steering in a direct course across the Atlantic, There was more talk then about these modes of getting to India than there has been lately about the North- West passage. DISCOTEEY OF TUB SOUTU SEAS. 5 In 14S6, Bartholomew Diaz, a Portuguese, in com- mand of a small fleet, rounded the Southern extremity of Africa unawares, and sought, along the eastern coast, the promontory that lay behind him ; till his men complaining, and his heart failing him, he turned home- wards, and on his way back found and noted well the long-loolved for point. It Avas a stormy sea that had borne him past it ; and moved rather by his discourage- ments than by his success, he called his discovery, " The Cape of Storms." His king named it the Cape of Grood Hope. I never think of Diaz without sorrow. Why did he not seize his advantage and press on to India ? Shakspeare's words come to my mind, words so often quoted that you will be sure to know them well by and bye : " There is a tide in the affiiirs of men, Wliicli, taken at the flood, leads on to fortune ; Omitted, all the voyage of their life Is bound in sliallows, and in miseries. On such a full sea are we now afloat ; And we must take the current when it serves, Or lose our ventures." Julius C.esab, Act iv.. Scene 3. The current served for Vasco de Gama when, eleven years later, he doubled the Cape and sailed to India, thus gaining the renown that poor Diaz might have won. I dare say that you are well acquainted with the interesting story of Christopher Columbus. You know how boldly he crossed the Atlantic, mannging crazy vessels, contrary seas, and discontented; grum- 6 DISCOYEKT OF THE SOUTH SEAS. bling sailors ; how flights of birds and green weeds floating by gave heart and hope to his men, till on the 11th October, 1492, a plank, rudely carved, borne past the Pinta, told not only of land near but of land peopled with human beings. That plank spoke as plainly to Columbus, as the "olive leaf pluckt off"" spoke to Noah, A few hours afterwards he and his men landed on San Salvador. Long before his death Columbus was aware of the existence of the South Sea, having heard of it from the inhabitants of the Isthmus of Panama, during his fourth voyage. But ten years later, Vasco Nixnez de Balboa had the joy of first be- holding its broad waters from the heights of Quaregua. He had tried hard to gain this end. He had crossed marshes, and forests, and mountains, and passed through tribes of hostile natives. At length, there was but one high ridge of land between him and the sea. He made his little company halt there, while he went forward alone. Before him lay forests, green fields, and winding rivers, and beyond all these, the vast ocean, brightened by the morning sun. Perhaps it was seen then, as Humboldt has since seen it, " reflecting along the line of the coast an immense mass of light, and rising in immeasurable expanse until bounded by the clearly defined horizon." Balboa signed to his followers to join him, and kneeling together they sang, ""We praise thee, O God." Three days after they reached the line where land and water meet, and Balboa, rushing into the waves, claimed their sovereignty^ for Spain. The South Sea was descried, but its waves were DTSCOYERT OF THE SOUTH SEAS, 7 still untracked, and its islands were still unknown. They were discovered by degrees and by voyagers of many nations, after Magellan, the first circumnavigator, had showed the world the path by which they might be reached. In 1519 he found his way through the strait that bears his name, between the paper-kite-like body of South America and the first joint of its tail, as Dr. Hamilton would tell you. After this Magellan crossed more than 10,000 miles of ocean, and reached Zebu in the Philippine Islands. He fell in an luijust and an unchristian conflict with the natives of one of liiese islands. The Spaniards, his companions, pursued their way across the Indian Ocean, passed the Cape of Good Hope, and finally reached Spain after an absence of three years. The communication between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans was thus ascertained, and froLi that date the names of voyagers and discoverers crowd thickly upon us, names owned by natives of Spain, Portugal, Prance, Holland and Great Britain. It would detain you too long from the main object of this book were I to tell you their story. You may read much that is interesting about them in the twenty- first volume of the Edinburgh Cabinet Library ; " Cir- cumnavigators of the G-lobe." Perhaps in another chapter I may say something about Captain Cook's voyages, because though the Friendly Islands were firs"; discovered by Jan Tasman, a Dutchman, yet our country's great navigator may be said to have re-dis- covered them, and made them known to us. tka^Uy M. ISLANDS OF THE PACIFIC. 'HOPE that wliile you were reading the lasc <• chapter, you had a map on the table by your side, and that you looked for the various "q" places named. If not, I am afraid that you fonnd it rather dull. We have an interesting subiect s before us to-day ; the ocean — the Pacific Ocesn — and its many islands. One cannot look at the ocean, with its strong waves and ceaseless flow, without thinking what a formidable hinderance it is to the intercourse of nations and per- sons. How many people would be for ranging abroad to the ends of the earth, if the sea did not keep them at home ! How many who knew each other in youlh, now sundered by distance, can never hope to meet again in this life, because the dangers of the migity deep, and the expenses of a long voyage hold tlem apart ! We sing that here " Oceans roll to sever us," and when the Bible tells us that in " the new earth " there shall be "no more sea," we rejoice in the ISLAXDS OF THE PACIFIC. 9 thought that this great hiuderance to kindly meetings of personal friends, and large gatherings of those that are one in Christ, will have passed away for ever. Tet in the present state of our world, we should make a great mistake were we to wish the sea away. Only think what a strange and an awkward position we should find ourselves in were the vast seas that gird our continents and islands to be drained off, and their bed left dry. Oar own country would then, indeed, be our prison-house. How could we get down the perpendicular, rocky sides of our cliffs, or find a path- way through the heavy sands that slope away from some parts of our shores ? There are deep places in the sea which no fathom-line has ever sounded, and there are mountains to match, up whose rugged sides our feet would fail to climb. Pancy many difficulties overcome. AYe stand in a low valley of the Pacific, having reached tlie broad base of one of its grand mountain ranges, and we look up to tlieir high peaks, thousands of feet above us, dwindling in the distance. How shall we reach the dwellers in the top of these mountains ? Their homes remind one of eagles' nests built on crags so steep and high that the heart of the most daring youth would warn him to let them alone. Well, but God who made this wondrous ocean basin has filled it brimful with sea — with salt, strong, buoyant sea ; and now, our good, tightly -made ships waiting on its outer margin have only to dip in gently, and then they sail away on its smooth surface, or ride over its rough waves, till they touch the opposite shore, 10 ISLANDS OF THE PACiriC. and land us comfortably at the same level as that of the country we leave beliind. The mariners who first found their way across the Southern Ocean gave it a new name, the Pacific. They called it so because the weather happened to be fair and the sea calm during their voyage : but in this, as sometimes in other cases, the name has lasted longer than the character; and voyagers, on their return home, have told us, with a smile, that they did not find the Pacific either peaceful or peaceable. You and I shall not be able, however, to change its name ; so let us turn to the map and look at its extent. It stretches northward and southward from the Arctic to the Antarctic Ocean, and eastward and westward from China to California, and from Australia to Chili, and covers almost one-third of the surface of our globe. Between the tropics we see its surface covered with the "many islands" from which Polynesia takes its name. How many there are ! Fix your eye steadily on one group, and count the little spots that stand for islands. Now go on to another and another cluster. They seem to increase in number as we count, like daisies on a lawn in summer, or like stars in a winter sky. And yet our map does not give us an adequate notion of the vast number of these Poly- nesian islands. The more important among them are put down ; but many of these are surrounded by others so small that the least speck upon paper would be too large to represent them as compared with their neigh- bours. We find that our map-makers note the suns, and ISLANDS OF THE PACIFIC. 11 omit the satellites. For example, let us try to count the Friendly Islands. Here are Tonga, Yavau, Kao, Tufoa, Lati, Nomuka, the Ilaabai Islands, and a few others. AVe cannot make them more than twenty. But there are really almost two hundred islands in this group, and among these from thirty to forty are inhabited. The Islands of the Pacific are peopled by two distinct races, the Malayo-Polynesian, or Polynesian proper, and the Papuan. We may take the meridian 180 degrees from Greenwich, as the dividing line between these two races. The Fijis, whose island- group lies close to the 180th meridian, seem to combine the characteristics of both races. Tlie Poly- nesians are mostly of a light copper colour, and have long, and straight hair ; while the Papuans are darker, almost black ; and have woolly, frizzled hair. Their language, too, is different. W. Von Humboldt, in his ■work on the Kawi tongues of the south-east of Asia, traces a clear connection between the widely-spread languages of Polynesia, and the Kawi or Malay family. They are thus related to the eastern branch of the great Asiatic stock. The Papuan is probably a branch from the same stock, " older, less developed, and more degenerate." The Papuan race posesses the islands on the north-east of Australia, viz : Xew Guinea, or Papua, New Britain, and New Ireland, the Solomon Islands, the New Hebrides, and New Caledonia. The name Melanesia (Black Islands), has been given to this "} oungest, and least- visited quarter 12 ISLANDS OF THE PACIFIC. of the world : " but, perhaps, a name derived from colour is not sufficiently distinctive, for among the Polynesian, or Malay races, there are many shades of colour, and some as black as the Papuans, or Austra- lians. On this topic, however, we will not linger, for our chief concern is with the Friendly Islanders, whose home lies beyond the dividing line that I have named, and who are well known to be regular Polynesians. The Polynesian islands, though lying almost exclu- sively within the tropics, are not quite so hot as one might suppose. The large body of water all around and the fresh breezes that sweep over their surface help to cool them. They are various in aspect. Some are mountainous. The highest peak in Tahiti is more than 8,000 feet above the sea, and there are two much higher in the Sandwich Islands, which though rich in tropical vegetation at their feet, have their heads capj)ed with snow during the greatest part of the year. Then there are many islands that may be called hilly, their greatest elevation not being more than five hundred feet. Besides these there are a few with a flat surfiice ; raised perhaps fifty feet above the sea, and bounded almost entirely by perpendicular clifi's. But the commonest kind are the low islands that scarcely rise above the ocean level. These are what are commonly called coral islands ; though strictly speaking they have no exclusive right to that name. Por, far above the highest watermark, blocks of coral have been met with on some of the moun- ISLANDS OF TKE PACinC. ]3 tainous islands, and coral reefs are sometimes found encircling volcanic centres. The Polynesian islands have a rich, soft soil, and most fruitful and luxuriant vegetation. Among their lofty trees are the cocoa-nut, with its graceful, plume-like head ; the broad-leaved banana, producing abundance of sweet fruit ; the bread fruit tree, in TUB BREAD FRUIT. form like our oak, and in leaf like the fig tree, bearing a large white fruit about the size and sliape of a child's head ; the Inocarpus, the fruit of which is a small nut, sweetish in taste, but not so good as the chestnut ; and the Stercidia, with lai-ge leaves and showy flowers. Then among lesser trees we may 14 ISLANDS OF TKE PACIFIC. name the garlic pear ; the dragon tree ; the paper mulberry, a low tree with large leaves, much esteemed by the islanders, who make cloth for their dresses from its bark ; a kind of plum, (Spondias Dulcis), with " small gold-coloured fruit, hanging in little nodding branches," its flavour somewhat like that of the pine apple ; the shaddock ; a kind of fig ; the Mimusops, so called from two words signifying ape and figure, because its flowers have been thought to resemble the countenance of a monkey ; the Tacca Pinnatijida, which yields arrow root ; and the Pandanus or screw pine, THE PANDANUS. ISLANDS OF TUE PACIFIC. 15 remarkable for its beauty of form, its white and glossy- leaves, and its pleasant fragrance. The pepper plant and the yam are prized and cultivated. You know perhaps that the yam is valuable for its roots, not for its fruit. The roots grow to a great size. They are propagated like the potato. Of these roots there are many varieties, some spreading out like fingers, or twisted like a serpent. The flesh of the yam is white or purplish, and glutinous when raw, but it becomes mealy when dressed. Yams may be either roasted or boiled. They are said to be of a very pleasant taste. The trees and plants that I have named are among those that were found growing on the islands when they were first visited by Europeans. Many others have been introduced and are now flourishing thei*e. You will observe that these South Sea Islands were then rich in fridt-bearing trees, far richer than our own England once was, though it is now notable for its gardens and orchards. How many, do you think, were our kinds of native fruit ? I heard it said the other, day that we had " only the acorn, the crab, the sloe, and the whortleberry." Eut the hand of civilisa- tion brought over foreign nurslings, planted, trained, and tended them, till they grew and flourished, and came at last to be quite at home amongst us. It is worth notice that on some of the islands though there are only a few kinds of trees, the varieties are almost endless. This arises from the peculiar mode in which the first planting of tliese sea-encircled woods took place. Not by man making up his mind 10 ISLATSTDS OF THE PACIFIC. to turn waste land to account, and so putting in many trees of the same kind, either useful or beautiful; this is the way most of our woods have been formed ; not by the natural and successive spread of young trees from a parent tree or a clump of parent trees ; but by stray seeds borne from one shore to another, at different times, and either washed on to the land by the waves, or dropped by birds. These seeds con- tained a living principle that the waters could not drown, nor the warm, digestive juices of birds' stomachs destroy, and so they sprang np into greenness and beauty as soon as they found a fitting soil. Fifty varieties of the bread fruit tree have been reckoned by visitors to these islands ; and thus we see that what might be called by some " the merest chance" is really under the wise and kind guidance of Him who giveth to all His creatures " their meat in due season." (Ehiijjfijr 313131. CORAL WORKERS AND THEIR DOINGS. OW for the coral-animals and tlieir wonderful /T^lP^ works! A recent writer on tbe earth saj's V^^y"fchat "pi'obably there is not an atom of the jo))V^ solid materials of the globe which has not X passed through the laboratory of life." Eocks, ! thousands of miles in extent, are found to be nearl}^ half composed of microscopic shells ; and deposits several feet in thickness, and stretching over many miles, are made up of animals so small that " eight millions of them do not fill up a space larger than a mustard seed." A large part of the limestone called Coral Eag, in Oxfordshire, Berkshire, Wilts, and Yorkshire, is filled with beds and ledges of petrified coral of many species, still retaining the position in which they once grew in the sea. With these facts before us, is not there an added interest in examining the process by which, even in our age, new tracts of land are raised from the depths cf ocean ? If we had heard that the great Master builder of 18 COTIAL-TVORKERS AKD THEIR DOINGS, this world of ours intended to employ creature-agency in making islands, which among the many living beings that we know should we hare judged most fit for the work ? Surely we should have turned to some of the large quadrupeds, with great tusks and teeth, firm backs, and strong, clever paws. Or to birds of swift wing, powerful talons, and sharp cutting bill. Or to man, creation's lord, with his sagacity, and skill and power of bending things animate and inanimate to his own purposes. But which of these could have done it ? Birds build most curious nests ; and one, the Me- gapodius, a native of Australia, and found also in the Possession Islands, constructs a mound ten or twelve feet high, with sloping sides from eighteen to twenty- four feet in length, piling up earth and fragments of coral to cover her eggs ; ants rear large dome-like homes and granaries ; beavers dam up rumiing streams, plaster their huts and plant their villages ; man builds cities and pyramids and more wonderful breakwaters : but all these creaturely doings fall short of the pro- ductions of the coral-workers. This is one instance among many that shews us how God chooses weak things for mighty works. We look at the four great departments of the animal kingdom, and passing by the three former which include all the more highly-organized animals, such as Mammals, Birds, Reptiles, Eishes, Insects, Crustaceans, Worms, and most Shell-fish, we take the fourth de- partment, Eadiata. This division has three classes- Sea-urchins, Jelly-fishes, and Polyps. We take the COEAL-'SVOEKEES A>"D THEIE DOIXGS. 19 lowest class, polyps. This class again lias three orders. 'We take the second, sea-polyps, (actinoids) ; and thus we find ourselves almost at the lowest step of the descending scale of animated being. The polyps are animals fixed to one place, like plants, having a series of flexible arms round their mouth. They have curious ways. Their number is increased not only by eggs, but also by buds that sprout from the parent body, and in some kinds, by division. A cleft is seen in the perfect animal, slight at first, but constantly increasing in depth, till after a time, two are formed out of one, so much alike that you could not tell the child froui the parent. Some pol}-ps are solitary, each having an independent stem and support. Others grow in company on one com- mon base. There is a singular connection subsisting among thousands of distinct individuals thus having a common body. There seems to be a transmission of will through the whole as perfect as in the limbs of a single animal. Thus a change of colour at the base has been obsen-ed to spread upwards to the tips of branching corallines. They remind one of buds on a tree, separate and yet united. Observe the next specimen of coral that you meet with. Tou perceive the many small holes in its surface. When that was a living coral, the heads and arms of its inhabitants protruded from those holes ; indeed the stony part was often almost covered by the soft animal substance. The polyps have however the power of drawing themselves back into their hard framework. c 2 20 COKAL-WORKEES AND THEIE DOINGS. They are very large eatei's ; more particular about the quantity thau the quality of their food. They help to clear away many impurities ; and thus perform the same good office in the water that many kinds of insects, devourers of animal and vegetable decay, perform ou the land. The kinds of corals that are the chief reef-builders belong to the genera Madrepora, Astrsea, Caryo- phyllia, Mseandrina and ]\Iillepora. These are hard names ; but I am sorry to say the unhappy corals have none easier. Botanists puzzle us sometimes by calling the pretty little flowers tliat deck our woods and fringe our paths by outlandish iiames, savouring more of the study and the herbarium than of fresh, sunny, country life. But what is that to us ? We can pick our forget- me-nots, buttercups, ragged robins and milkmaids, and leave tJie?n to root up, dissect, press, dry, and call names at their pleasure. If we could spend a morning among the corals in their own homes, and become familiar with their varied forms, colours, and habits, we would do our best to find out some pretty names for them too. As it is, you must be contented with a few drawings that will perhaps lessen your dislike to the hard names, by helping you to connect with them some notion of the things for which they stand. The number of these polyps in the waters of warm climates is immense. Numbers beyond count are at work, day by day, in constructing their small but lasting cells ; cells which ai-e their homes while they live and then' graves when they die. It used to be thought CORALS. 1. — FlNGIV AgAHICIFOKMTS. 2.— PorITES Ch.WAUIA. 3.— Cahvoi'IIYLI.ia Akhohka. 4.— Mahukpoue Ar.HOTAXOinK. 5. — MiF.ANDKINA Ci;Ui;mi'OKMIS. coeal-wohkees and tueib doings. 21 that coral-polyps were able to build up steep walls from great depths in the sea; but this notion is not now regarded as true. No corals have been found living and working at a greater depth than from twenty to thirty fathoms. Say twenty-five and multiply by six, — and this gives the number of feet below the sea to be one hundred and fifty. "Their upward limit of growth is determined by the lowest water at spring-tides." Living corals are never found building upon living corals. The reefs that they construct are raised layer upon layer, by successive generations ; the houses of the living race having for their foundation the graves of the past race. " Millions of millions thws, from age to age, "With simplest skill, and toil vmweariable, No moment and no movement miimproved, Laid line on line, on terrace terrace spread, To swell the heightening, brightening, gradual mound By marvellous structm-e chmbing towards the day. Each wroiight alone, yet all together wrought, Unconscious, not unworthy instruments, JBy which a hand invisible was rearing A new creation in the secret deep." MONTGOMEBX'S PELICAN ISLAND. Cailto II. p. 24. This "creation" is of three kinds, — Atolls; Encir- cling, or Barrier reefs ; and Fringing reefs. The atoll I'ises above the waves, a circular or oval strip of land, varying in breadth and enclosing a lake or lagoon of smooth water. This ring-like sea wall has generally one, and often many openings. It is always highest on its windward side. The harrier reef is like the atoll, only it is either found running parallel to a coast, 22 COEAL-WOEKEKS AND THEIE DOIIS-GS. or enclosing one or more islands. The largest coral reef in the world is the barrier reef that guards the north east coast of Australia. It is 1,100 miles in length, and varies in its distance from the shore from ten or fifteen to a hundred miles. Its mean distance is about thirty mUes. The islands that are encircled by barrier reefs are often mountainous. Their shores are washed by the smooth waters of the lagoons, and about two or three miles off, the protecting ring shields lake and islets from the might of an angry ocean. Some travellers have likened these islets to castles surrounded first by a moat, and then by a strong wall of defence. Others have compared them "to a framed engraving, where the frame represents the breakers, the marginal paper the smooth lagoon, and the drawing the island itself." Fringing reefs, as theii* name imports, skirt the margin of a shore. They are common to con- tineiits and islands. Within the lagoons the water is shallow, varj'ing from one hundred and twenty to three hundred feet. Beyond the outer wall the sea is deep, and often unfathomable. Now we have seen that the coral-polyps cannot live and work in these deep places, and we know too that they must have some foundation on which to begin. It is also true that dead coral has been fetched up from depths below the range of living coral, and has been found on higher ground than any that the sea now washes. Mr. Darwin has a theory, now generally adopted, which accovmts for these facts. He supposes that every atoll marks the site and traces the outline of COUAL-AVOUKEES ASD TKEIE DOIKGS. 23 sunken laud. Wherever there is uow a higoon there was ouee au island with a girdle of coral arouud it. By slow degrees the land subsided, and as it sank lower and lower the corals round its base grew up higher and higher, till, when the downward progress of the land was stayed no part of the original island w^as to be seen above the waves, and only a ring-like reef appeared — new land for new inhabitants. Some of the present islands are known to be sinking very gradually, while some, in other parts of the ocean are rising. " The Friendly Archipelago consist of a group of atolls, upheaved and since partially worn down." I only state this view without attempting to prove its truth. Should doubts arise in your mind, or should you think the subject so interesting that you would like to know more about it, I would refer you to Darwin's book "On the Structure and Distribution of Coral Eeefs," or to a shorter statement in his " Naturalists' Journal of a Voyage Eound the World." Let me also name the fifty -first chapter of Ly ell's " Principles of Geology." The lagoon-enclosing reefs are very numerous in the Pacific. Mr. Jukes gives a beautiful description of their appearance at a distance in his " Narrative of the Surveying Voyage of Her Majesty's Ship -F/y," vol. I. " There is considerable beauty in a small coral reef when viewed from a ship's masthead at a short distance in clear weather. A small island, with a white sand beach and a tuft of trees, is surrounded by a symmetrically oval space of shallow water of a bright grass green colour, enclosed by a ring of glittering 21' COllAL-WOKKEKS AND TUEIll DOINGS, surf as white as suow, immediately outside of wliicli is the rich, dark blue of deep waters. All the sea is free from auy mixture of sand or mud. Eveu wheu it breaks ou a sand beach it retains its perfect purity, as the large grains of coral are heavy and do not break into mud, so that if a bucketful of coral sand be thrown into the sea, it may be seen gradually sinking like a white cloud, without producing any disocloration iu the surrounding water. It is this perfect clearness . . . which renders navigation among coral reefs practicable, as a shoal with five fathoms water on it can be discerned at a mile distance from a ship's mast- head, in consequences of its greenish hue contrasting with the blue of deep water." The smooth and still waters of the lake have often been contrasted with the rush and roar of the breakers beyond. "VVe uill quote Mr. Jukes again. He speaks of a reef a quarter of a mile wide ; a fresh breeze ; and a heavy sea running. " The water " he says, " is per- fectly clear, and of great and almost unfathomable depth right up to the outer slope or submarine wall of the reef. The long ocean swell being suddenly im- peded by this barrier, lifted itself iu one great con- tinuous ridge of deep blue water, which, curling over, fell on the edge of the reef in an unbroken cataract of dazzling white foam. Each line of breakers was often one or two miles in length, with not a perceptible gap in its continuity." Mr. Darwin says, "The ocean throwing its breakers on these outer shores appears an invincible enemy, yet we see it resisted and even COEAL-AVOEKERS AND TIIEIE DOIKOS. 25 conquered by Bieans which at first seem most weak and inefficient. No periods of repose are granted, and the long swell caused by tlie steady action of the trade wind never ceases. The breakers exceed in violence those of our temperate regions, and it is impossible to behold them without feeling a conviction that rocks of granite or quartz would ultimately yield and be demolished by such irresistible forces. Yet these low, insignificant coral islets stand and are victorious, for here another power, as antagonist to the former takes part in the contest. The organic forces separate the atoms of carbonate of lime, one by one, from the foaming breakers, and unite them into a symmetrical structure. Myriads of architects are at work night and day, month after month, and we see their soft and gelatinous bodies, through the agency of the vital laws, conquering the great mechanical power of the waves of an ocean, which neither the art of man, nor the inanimate woi'ks of nature could successfully resist." The corals that are the chief agents in reef-making are much larger than those usually brought home as specimens. There are massive kinds at work on the outer shores that could not live within the lagoon where the delicately branching kinds flourish. These gigantic corals far surpass in size, strength and weight, any fossil specimens that have been found. It is difficult to get a sight of them, alive and working, because of those heavy seas that break upon the outer reefs ; but large blocks are often rolled up by the 26 COEAL-WOEKEES A]S"D THEIE DOIKGS. waves and left upon the laud. Mr. Jukes says, " I have seen a block of mseandrina, of irregular shape, twelve or fifteen feet in diameter, the furrows of which were wider than my three fingers : also very large blocks and crags of a pontes, twenty feet long by ten feet high, but all one connected mass without any breaks in its growth." The delicate kinds of coral, so often described as beautiful in colour and like a marine shrubbery in growth, are found on the inner edges of the reef within the calm lagoon. A missionary, who spent many years in the Friendly Islands, tells me what a pleasant thing it is to float in a canoe over the shallow parts of these very clear waters on a fine day. Keeping your oars still, you may watch the busy and beauteous life below ; you may see fish of bright hues playing in and out of the coral stems and branches, seeming to be glad of a refuge from their enemies in the open sea ; while the ripple of the waves, touched by the light of a brilliant sun, heightens the charm of the scene. I have been doubting whether to insert a passage in which Mr. Jukes describes a sheltered nook, on an extreme slope, " where every coral was in free life and luxuriance." But I cannot help thinking that you will admire the beauty and distinctness of the picture, in spite of the use of many terms that you may not yet understand. " Round masses of maeandrina and as- trsea were contrasted with delicate leaf-like and cup- shaped expansions of explanaria, and with an infinite variety of branching madreporse and seriatoporte ; some COEAL-AVOEKEES AKD TIIEIE DOIXGS. 2/ with mere finger-shaped projections, others with large branching stems, and others again exhibiting an elegant assemblage of interlacing twigs, of the most exquisite workmanship. Their colours were unrivalled, vivid greens, contrasting with more sober browns and yellows, mingled with rich shades of purple, from pale pink to deep blue. Bright red, yellow and peach- coloured nuUiporse clothed those masses that were dead, mingled with beautiful, pearly flakes of eschara and retepora ; the latter looking like lace work in ivory. In among the branches of the corals, like birds among trees, floated many beautiful fish, radiant with metallic greens or crimsons, or fantastically banded with black and yellow stripes. Patches of clear white sand were seen here and there for the floor, with dark hollows and recesses beneath overhanging masses and ledges." These bright creatures have not always peaceful lives. There are many kinds of sea animals that bore holes in the corals, and take up their lodging amongst them ; while some kinds of fish prey upon them. These fish have been seen watching hard by a reef, with their long, bony jaws ready to crop off" the heads and arms of the soft-bodied polyps as soon as they thrust them out of their stony framework. And when the corals themselves die, other animals occupy their forsaken buildings. I have read a description of a block of coral that was brought up by a fish-hook from a con- siderable depth. Its substance was worn and dead ; but it was covered with many small, delicate, and brightly-coloui'ed corallines, with sea-weed and spon- 28 COEAL-WOEKERS AND THEIR DOINGS, ges ; and when broken up various kinds of boring shells were found within ; while in the hollows and recesses lay worms twisted in and out, and three small species of crabs. Though not a foot in diameter, " it was a perfect museum in itself." But I fancy that I hear you wondering how reefs formed in the way that I have described come to be islands, where trees grow and men live. We have seen that when the reef rises so high as to be almost dry at low water, the corals cease to build. But large blocks of coral are often detached by the action first of the sun, and then of the sea, and are thrown upon the reef so as to give it by degrees a higher elevation. Then the washing of the waves wears down the more delicate kinds of coral and rubs them into powder ; and this powder fills up vacant spaces, while chemical precipitation aids in forming masses of limestone. Besides, wherever throughout the ocean rocks are found, there is also life in abundance. Sea- weed creeps over them ; beds of oysters, of muscles, and of other shells, cover them in thick layers ; large shoals of fish disport themselves and seek their prey around their edge. In " this great and vidde sea are things creeping innumerable." The hard teeth and palates of fishes, and many kinds of shells, some among the largest and heaviest of known species, serve to increase the compacted mass. Drift timber is fre- quently cast ashore ; stones of considerable size are occasionally brought entangled in the roots of trees ; insects, especially such as feed on dead animals. COKAL-AVORKERS AXD THEIB DOINGS. 29 abound, and sea birds find a resting place for them- selves and their young. You may readily imagine how a fitting soil for stray seeds is soon formed, and how, as vegetation spreads, that soil becomes richer and more productive, till graceful and lofty trees lift their heads up towards the blue sky, above a thick growth of bushes and creeping plants. Lizards, and other small animals, are among the early inhabitants of the new land ; and, at last, man comes and soon proves him- self to be master of the whole. It is believed that the men who first peopled tlie Pacific Islands came from the mainland of Asia. Their appearance, their language, and some of their customs, are regarded as justifying this view. Cases are frequent of canoes being carried to long distances iu these seas ; a Japanese junk was recently drifted, with its surviving crew, as far as the Sandwich Islands ; and looking once more at your map, you may see how many stopping places there are between the Malay coast, and the islands lying further east. You can imagine the population spreading, at intervals of time, to Borneo, Celebes, Bouro, and Ceram, the New Hebrides, and so on to the various small groups in tlie Pacific. Let me just aslc whether it has occurred to you, while reading this account of the formation of islands, to observe that in whatever part of our world we see life, we need but look a moment longer to see death and decay ? There is no spot on earth so utterly drear that life has not visited it, giving colour, and 30 COEAL-WOEKERS AND TUEIE DOINGS. beauty, and motion : but deatli always tracks her steps to cliill and to deface. Yet, in this ceaseless strife, we find life the victor. Again and again out of the ruins of the past, arise the fair forms of the present. Death slays its thousands, but life raises up its ten thousands. Yes ; and even where death seems to triumph most, where he is used by Grod as the punisher of sin, we find him more than ever vanquished. We " believe in the resurrection of the body." "The dust and ruins that remain, Are precious in His eyes ; Those ruins shall be built again, And all that dust shall rise." ^k^Ux IF. THE FRIENDLY ISLANDERS. fA ONGr years have passed, how many we can- not tell, since first the atolls of the Friendly J'^^j Archipelago lifted their heads above the blue ►>*«^ waters and, basking in the beams of the sun, ^ exchanged saltness and barrenness for verdure and ] fertility. Long years have passed since man, ever a wanderer, first landed on these islets and found a beautiful home all ready for him. It is not possible for us to know how many generations have lived and died here. The people when first discovered had no written language, no sculptured records of the past, no history. There are, however, tokens in crowded burying places, in stories handed down from father to son, and in occasional traces of arts once known but now lost, that the sojourn of the present inhabitants has been far from brief. If we have hinted at the true way in which these lauds were peopled, it is easy to account for the rude and simple state in which Europeans found 32 THE FRIENDLY ISLANDEKS. them. It does not follow that because they are now in a savage state, they always were so. If men leave a country where social arts are known and practised, in small numbers, and without proper instruments for carrying out the lessons learned at home, (suppose, for instance, that iron is wanting), they soon forget what their fathers knew. All the sooner, if they light upon abundant provision and a fine climate. It was to a pleasant spot that the fathers of the present race came. They found a kindly sky above them, fruit for the picking it, a sea swarming with fish, a soil that amply repaid sliglit cidtivation. So they led an easy, quiet life. To prepare patches of land for the growth of the more useful plants, to clear pathways through the thick brushwood, to beat the bark of the bread- fruit or paper mulberry tree into cloth for their scanty garments, to rear simple, one-roomed houses, to work cocoa-nut fibre into cordage, matting, and fishing-lines, and to construct canoes for their short voyages, were among their hardest tasks. They sang, and danced, and dressed their hair with bright flowers, and bathed, and feasted, and slept. They wore a pleasant smile when strangers reached their shores, and their women especially, spoke with a pleasant tongue. Their amiable manners and light-hearted chattiness seem to have taken the fancy of their early visitors. It was this general amiability, with their apparent peaceful- ness, that led Captain Cooli to call them Eriendly Islanders. And many a romantic story reached this country about their innocence and happiness. Some TKE FRIENDLY ISLANDERS. 33 people here believed these stories, and envied the distant children of the sea. But tliey forgot what was said about their lazy self-indulgence. Did you ever see an idle child ? Was he happy ? Certainly not. Idleness and happiness never go together. Show me a man, poor or rich, who never worked hard, and you show me one who has yet to learn what it is to be happy. Dr. Watts teaches us truly that " Satan finds some miscliief still For idle hands to do." And among these islanders it was soon found that mischief was stirring. They were without law. They Avere not withheld from wrong-doing either by divine command, or by human restraints. They had no dread of eternal punishment to deter them from sin ; no hope of eternal reward to urge them to virtue. No " angel flying through the midst of heaven " had stopped to tell them that " Grod is angry with the wicked every day," nor to "preach" to them "the everlasting gospel." No voice from the open firmament had proclaimed aloud " Thou shalt not kill. Thou shalt not commit adultery. Thou shalt not steal. Thou shalt not bear false witness. Thou shalt not covet." No written word of God had spoken to them the law that God gave on Sinai. Among all the people in those islands there was not an eye that had seen nor an ear that had heard the things that we 34 THE FEIENDLT ISLANDERS. see and bear every day, and of which, alas ! we think too little. And reason did not supply the place of reve- lation. JNot one of all their great chiefs, gathering his people around him, had stood up among them and proposed that, for the well being of society, certain vices should be given up, and care should be taken that the good and orderly among them should be shielded from the evil designs and practices of the bad. They went on in the way of their own hearts, gratify- ing self, wronging each other, kindling into speedy rage, taking summary vengeance on their foes, setting light by human life, and looking at a dead body and a new-made grave without tenderness or awe. Their great chiefs liked to be treated as if they were gods. Self was their idol, and before it all their inferiors were expected to do homage. Every desire must be instantly met, or punishment must follow refusal. The lesser chiefs crouched before their masters and trampled on those beneath them : while the common people caught eagerly at each passing pleasure, and held it with the closer grasp, because they knew that the will of another might wrest it from their hold at any moment. Domestic comfort was unknown. How should there be peace in that home where man's depraved will is enthi'oned, and where his passions own no other master ? Polygamy — the practice of having many wives — has been a fruitful source of family strife, wherever it has been tried. I suppose that from Lamech, the first breaker of God's early ordinance, THE PRIENDLT ISLAKDERS. 35 down to tlie present time, no man ever was the happier for this attempt to enlarge the circle of his pleasure, of his power, and of his dignity. But in the early times of which the Bible tells us, the patriarclis had the good sense to afford to each wife a separate tent where she might be sole mistress. The Friendly Islanders were not so wise. They huddled their many wives into one house, and shut out all hope of quiet comfort. Ignorant of the true God, they had some notion of powers above them ; but those notions were false and vague. They did not conceive of good beings who desired their happiness, but of strong and angry beings who wished them ill. They hoped to appease the wrath of their gods by vrounding and piercing their bodies, and by loud and lamentable cries. A common practice was to cut off the little finger when they wished to avert calamity or to secure a benefit ; and this torture was often self-inflicted. Such were their superstitious fears that, like little children in this country — afraid of the dark — who have not yet learned how safe a hiding place there is under the "feathers" of the Almighty, they dared not venture out after nightfall. "We must not forget, while we look at the forlorn and degraded condition of these heathen, that their race had not been always without the knowledge of God. They were descendants of those who had had the truth, who might have held it, but who let it go. A forefather of these very islanders stepped forth with 1)2 36 THE FRIENDLY ISLANDERS. Noah from the sheltering ark, and on the earth fresh from the flood that had washed away all traces of recent wickedness, bowed before Grod, making "a covenant by sacrifice," saw the bow in the cloud, and heard the promise. And later on in the world's history, another ancestor saw Abraham's day, and heard the tidings of God's covenant with him; as the seal of that covenant, which these heathen still use, though they have lost its meaning, clearly proves. According to God's method of governing this world, many generations are often the worse for one man's sin. All mankind suffer in consequence of the transgression of God's law by the first man. " By one man's disobedience many were made sinners." " In Adam all died." And similar acts of unfaithful- ness have since that first transgression plunged whole families and tribes into depths of ignorance and woe. But we must bear in mind that this does not afiect the question of individual salvation. God will not call any to account for knowledge that he did not possess, or for sins that he could not avoid. And wherever a heathen is found that has acted conscien- tiously according to the little hght that has shone into his darkened mind, he shall surely be accepted with Him who is "no respecter of persons." Is such a heathen to be found ? Who has met with him ? God searcheth the hearts. " Shall not the Judge of all the earth do right ?" We cannot look at the state of the heathen world without deep pain and much trouble of spirit. There THE FEIEXDLT ISLANDERS. 37 is, however, one tliought that may clieer us. Ours is a redeemed race. Christ who made atonement for us by His blood-shedding, called little children to Him and said, " Suffer the little children to come unto me, and forbid them not, for of such is the kingdom of heaven." And how many such have been rescued from mothers who would never have named the name of Jesus to them, and carried by angels to their loving Saviour's arms ! One sees, in imagination, a bright cloud of infants' spirits passing upwards from this gloomy earth, each filled with unutterable joy as he learns from what guilt and defilement he is for ever saved ! At length a new day dawned upon these islands. The time now came that brought the ships of strangers to their shores. Jan Tasman landed in 1643. A hundred and thirty years later they were visited by Captain Cook, and affcer'him by La Perouse, Edwards, D'Entrecasteaux, and others. A looker-on might have exclaimed, " Surely the time to favour these islands is come." The white men, who now associa- ted familiarly with the iuhabitants, came from lands where God's love was known, where His word was read, where churches and chapels held Sabbath wor- shippers, where the most holy Name was on every lip. What was their conduct ? Did they not hasten to make the poor heathen acquainted with spiritual truth ? I am sorry to say that nothing seems to have been further from their thoughts. The leaders of these expeditions were usually intent upon some 38 THE FRIENDLY ISLANDERS. scientific object. They gathered fresh stores of facts for the study of learned men at home, facts illustrating a wide range of subjects ; new lands were explored, and their products noted; coast lines were traced, and the navigation of difficult seas made easier ; stones, rocks, plants, trees, and animals, till then unnoticed and unnamed, found their own place in scientific classifica- tion ; and the starry world above gave up its long-kept secrets. They went further. They studied man in his savage state, his person, manners, customs, lan- guage, religion. They tried to improve his temporal condition by adding to the number of useful plants and animals around his dwelling. We ought not to speak slightingly of these men, or of their services. "We admire their manifold talents and acquirements, and the energy, pains-taking earnestness and skill, that overcame difficulties, and achieved successes. But while admii'ing their diligence, and rejoicing in its results, we do regret that man's spiritual state seems to have moved no sympathy, and prompted to no effort. If we are ever tempted to look coldly upon "all knowledge," it is when, as in St. Paul's day, it usurps the place of Christian charity. A lover of flowers botanising "upon his mother's grave;" a geologist peering into pieces of broken rock, while a boatful of his fellow men are sinking within reach of his help ; deserves no sharper rebuke than those do who, while ransacking land and sea for " specimens," can spend months among a heathen people, accepting their aid, eating their food, joining in their sports, and THE FllIENDLY ISLANDERS. 39 yet speak no word of their common Maker, of His wrath against sin, or of His mercy towards sinners. Such men can but feebly realise the certainty of a future day of reckoning, when the grandest discoveries in science will be of little account compared with the humble labours of those who have turned a nation from sin to holiness, or even of him who has broken the yoke of Satan from the neck of one captive, and set him, free and happy, on his way to heaven. In speaking of the intercourse of Europeans with the Friendly Islanders, we have not merely to mourn over great duties left undone, but over great crimes committed. In spite of some attempts made by superior oflB.cers to check improper conduct on the part of the ships' crews, it is grievous to think that many of the white men indulged themselves in all sorts of excesses, and left the natives far worse than they found them. They amused themselves with the follies and vices of the heathen. They encouraged them in old evil habits, and taught them new forms of iniquity. They helped them to construct more deadly instruments of war ; and increased the fierceness and cruelty of their contentions by giving them new cause for jealousy and anger, and by adding the skill of the civilised man to the raging passions of the uncivilised. They robbed woman of that modest reserve which the barbarism of centuries had not sufficed to destroy, and taught her to be bold in vice. Some of the first English words learned by the willing natives were oaths. 40 THE FEIENDLT ISLANDERS. I cannot enter into details on each of these subjects ; but something may be said as to the lessons on war taught the natives by their white visitors. The wea- pons in use among the people were reed-ai'rows, clubs, and spears barbed with fish-bones. Eui'opeans and Americans introduced guns and gunpowder, muskets, and swords. They taught the natives to barb their spears with iron, and to use hatchets tied to the end of strong sticks. The fear of their gods had led the natives to regard the Eaitokas as sacred. Here their fathers were buried, and those who cared little for the living would not touch the dead ; so that when other refuge failed, numbers of the inhabitants would seek safety in these. It was" the hand of a wicked Englishman that first set fire to one of these places of refuge when filled with helpless human beings. A chief present, seeing his " father's house " in flames, cursed his party and left them. The native mode of fortification is to surround a village with a high fence, and that again with a deep ditch, sometimes dry, sometimes filled with water. There may be two or three of such fences and ditches. In one instance a village of this kind, crowded with thatch-roofed houses and thickly peopled, was attacked by the enemy. Taught by civilised men, they fastened burning brands to the points of their spears, and pro- jecting them into the village, soon set fire to the thatch in many places. The people flying from the scorching flames, fell into the hands of their foes and were quickly cut to pieces. THE FRIENDLY ISLANDERS. 41 White men seem to have taught the natives cruel sports as well as cruel warfare. One of the first Wesleyan missionaries took with him a few fowls of a superior breed. The natives no sooner saw them than they begged earnestly for one of the birds ; and it was discovered on inquiry that they wanted him for cock fighting. Our righteous indignation burns while reading that men baptized into the name of Christ, chose to sink below the level of savage life, and to commit " all iniquity with greediness." Tet pity soon follows anger. What a precious opportunity they lost of winning the glorious reward of" them that turn many to righteousness ! " And how awful is the doom incurred by men " who knowing the judgment of God that they which commit such things are worthy of death, not only do the same, but have pleasure in them that do them." It does seem a strange and sorrowful kind of madness that prompts men to seize eagerly those pleasures which, if sweet for a moment, leaves only a bitter remembrance, at the risk of undying souls, their own and others'. I once heard an eloquent preacher say, — and the echo of his words has been in my ear and in my heart ever since, — " all eternity lifts itself up against the passion of a day ! " ^h^Ur ¥. CAPTAIN COOK'S VISITS. ^° N the 2nd October, 1773, Captain Cook's ship, the Endeavour, dropped anchor within a short distance of the hilly and beautiful island 1^1] Eua, called Middleburg by Tasman. Eua is remarkable for its fruitfuluess, and is sometimes called "the granary of Tonga." Its nearest dis- tance from Tonga is about twelve miles. The ship was soon surrounded by canoes filled with natives, fine looking men, who seemed to have no fear of their visitors. They offered cloth, fish-hooks and other curiosities, and were greatly delighted with the spike-nails given in exchange by the strangers. One of them seemed to be a chief; so Captain Cook presented him with a hatchet, and they became good friends immediately. On landing the English were greeted by a large crowd and a hearty cheer. The natives carried no sticks, or other weapons. This was satisfactory as to their peaceful intentions ; but they soon became very troublesome, pressing forward with CAPTAIN cook's VISITS. 43 cloth and matting which they offered in exchange, or as gifts. Some would throw whole bales of cloth into the boats, and go away without waiting for anything in return. By-and-bye the chief ordered the people to disperse to the right and left, and a way was made for the Englishmen to land. They were led to the chief's house, standing on a fine lawn, and overhung with fruit trees. Here the strangers were seated on mats, while the people placed themselves in an outer circle, and three young women entertained them with a song. It may have been such a song as Labillardiere describes, when he visited the Friendly Islanders twenty years afterwards. Here it is : — These few notes were repeated without variation for half-an-hour, to words that meant " pleasant," or " agreeable evening." Captain Wilkes, of the United States' Exploring Expedition, furnishes us with another specimen of Tongan music : — * * "The natives have a boat or canoe song, that they call Tau-alo. They often row to music ; and will, for half-an-hour together, paddle and chant as follows : bleia ; lelia ; lelei ; lelei ; varying the tones of their voice, and making the a very long. The sound upon the waters, when many voices are engaged, is pleasing. Lelei means good. "Agreeable evening," would be Koe bo lelei. If there were good singing, good company, and good manners, that would be called Bo lelei." — Rev. John Thomas. 44 CAPTAi:S' COOK S VISITS. ,-.. e^^=ES33-: Captain Cook says that the singing "was not dis- agreeable ; but he seems to have been in a very good humour. It was a fine day ; the scenery around was charming ; a shade of pleasant trees lessened the heat of the sun, and the most delicious odoui's filled the air. Again and again he names the fragrance as very grateful. He was taken to another dwelling of the same chief, and here bananas and cocoa-nuts were set before him and his companions to eat ; and a bowl of kava was prepared for them to drink. This repast over, he made an excursion through the island, and observed several plantations, enclosed by neat reed fences. These plantations were most numerous near the sliore. Towards the centre the ground was less cultivated, but not less lovely. Here was thick grass, with groves of cocoa-nut trees ; and here, too, were crossing paths, various and picturesque. CAPTAIN cook's TISITS. 45 One day spent in this pretty island seems to have delighted all. They returned to their vessel with the highest opinion of the place and the people. Had they stayed a little longer their views might have changed, as we shall soon see they did at Tonga. First-sight im- pressions, notwithstanding much that has been said to the contrary by those who boast of keen and penetrating vision, are not to be trusted. When Captain Cook and his party returned to this very island, after four yeai's' absence, one or two startling incidents occurred. The conduct of one of the natives having offended the rest, they rushed upon him, struck him down with a club, laid bare his skull, broke his thigh, and, in all likelihood, would have killed him on the spot, had not the English lookers-on interposed ; when they carried him, without any signs of life into a neighbouring house where he partially recovered. Shortly after, one of Captain Cook's people, happening to walk alone, was surrounded by twenty or thirty natives, knocked down and stripped of every thing he had on. From Eua, Captain Cook proceeded to Tonga, (called Amsterdam by Tasman,) the largest of all the Friendly Islands, and the seat of government. The natives sometimes add the word iahu, set apart or sacred, to Tonga ; and call it Tougatabu. It was long the stronghold of heathen idolatry, and to this day it is not wholly Christianised. Tonga is aboiit twenty miles long and eleven broad. It is a low, flat island, rising but a few feet above the level of the sea. Its highest ground is the little mount of Nukualofa, sixty 46 CAPTAIN cook's VISITS. feet in height, on which a Christian church now stands. Tonga has a rich, black soil, and abounds in thriving vegetable productions. Here are all the kinds of plants to be found in the Society Islands, with other sorts not known there. Its whole surface was in a state of cultivation Avhen Captain Cook visited the Islands, and he found it covered with a net- work of roads rendering all parts easy of access. Some of the roads were sixteen feet broad, and perfectly level. On their arrival, Captain Cook and his people were as warmly welcomed as they had been at Eua, and the friendly natives took them to see the curiosities of their country. Chief among these was a house, built after the fashion of their own dwellings of posts and rafters covered with palm-thatch ; but raised on an artificial mound several feet in height, and enclosed by stone walls. Some of the coral-blocks of which these walls were made, were nine or ten feet by four and six inches thick. Captain Cook found it difficult to decide whether this house, and other similar build- ings, were burial places, or temples ; but on observing the respect paid to them by his native guides, and that the people on approaching one of them would sit down in silence, while a priest-like person advanced nearer, and repeated a speech or prayer, he concluded that they were used as places of worship. Under this impression, Captain Cook, who was allowed to enter one of these houses, laid down upon the floor an offering of blue pebbles, nails, medals, &c. These FA I TO K A. CAPTAIN cook's VISITS. 47 were eagerly seized by one of the natives and pocketed. He calls this place an Afiatuka ; but the name, accord- ing to the present mode of spelling, is Fai-toka. From the Missionary who told me about the pretty corals in the lagoons, I learned the true nature of these curious houses. They are burying places. Some- times when a great chief died, his body was put into a stone vault several feet below the surface of the ground ; sand from the sea-beach was strewn above, and such a house as Captain Cook describes was built in honour of his memory. The people called it aebotu tabu, a sacred place ; and in going there, they would do homage to the spirit of their departed chief. Their feelings would be solemn, something like those of a devout Roman Catholic when he visits the shrine of his patron saint. The spirits of their departed great chiefs, of both sexes, were supposed to come at times, and to inspire certain persons, often their own relations. These persons were then regarded as shrines of the god ; and if their own affairs turned out prosperously, or their predictions of good or evil came true, houses would be built and called by their name. They did not forsake their own dwellings to live in these, but repaired to them occasionally to receive such persons as needed the advice and aid of the god. These inquirers were expected to bring offerings, as well as to ask questions. Sometimes the houses that I have described were built in the village ; sometimes at a convenient distance from it. They were neatly surrounded with reed fences. There were once many 48 ' CAPTAIK cook's YISITS. such houses in the Friendly Islands, with many priests and priestesses. To return to Captain Cook. He ohserved that the dwellings of the natives were neatly constructed ; the floor raised a little and covered with strong mats. The same kind of matting served as a wall on the windward side ; the other being left open. Small areas in front of most of the houses were planted with fruit trees and sweet smelling shrubs. The people were more willing than those of Eua, to supply bananas, cocoa-nuts, yams, pigs, and fowls in exchange for nails and pieces of cloth ; and a brisk trade was carried on. The chiefs gave more largely than the common people, and were favoured in return with a few superior articles, such as hatchets, axes, looking-glasses, and shirts. Some few would gladly exchange a pig for a large nail or a hatchet ; but generally they did not seem to know the value of iron, but would prefer old jackets, shirts, and even rags, to the best edged tool. Whenever a bargain was struck, or a present given, the new owner lifted the purchase or present to his head in token of acceptance or thanks. A mother whose child had received a gift, would take up its little hand and put it to its head in order to teach it the same good manners. The eagerness of the English to catch at every- thing they saw amused the natives, who began wag- gishly to offer bits of stick or stone in exchange. During his stay here Captain Cook was treated CAPTAIN cook's visits. 49 with hospitality, and as a special mark of respect kava was often prepared for him. As this is a favourite beverage vrith the islanders, I shall give you some account of its preparation. It is made from the root of a kind of pepper plant (Piper Mythisticuni) which the natives plant and cultivate with great care. When there is to be a kava-drinking, the party who are to partake of it seat themselves in a ring, while the preparers of the kava place themselves in an outer and inferior circle. The root is then split up into small pieces, scraped clean with shells, and handed to the persons who are waiting to chew it. These must be young healthy people, with sound, clean teeth. They contrive to keep it dry, biting it carefully, with- out suifering the moisture of their mouth to mix with it. Each person places his piece, when sufficiently chewed, on a plantain or banana leaf, and passes it on to the men who are to make the infusion. Ail the pieces are then neatly arranged in a wooden bowl. This process is repeated till enough is ready. Then the mixer begins to knead together the chewed root, while one man pours in water from cocoa-nut shells, and another fans off the flies with a large leaf. The mixture is afterwards carefully strained and poured into neat cups made of the leaf of the banana tree, and handed to the company according to the directions of the presiding chief. I wonder whether you woidd accept the compliment were it offered to you, after you had seen the mode of making. Some visitors refuse it ; others conquer their natural disHke, and 50 CAPTAIN cook's YISITS. either from curiosity or from a desire to please their hosts, taste their liquor. Some say that it is flat and insipid ; others that it reminds them of a dose of magnesia and rhubarb, with a dash of liquorice ! If taken in large quantities it has a stupefying effect like opium. The Missionaries have tried to check the fondness of the natives for it, and have succeeded in moderating its use ; but the custom of kava- drinking still continues. It began to be seen, even during this short visit of four or five days, that it was not kindheartedness alone that prompted the Friendly Islanders to enter- tain strangers. Self interest was as strongly at work among these children of nature as among the experi- enced and calculating of the money -getting world's disciples. What they could gain from their visitors was uppermost in their thoughts, and they soon proved themselves to be expert and unceasing thieves. One of the ship's company had taken off his shoes and stockings while wading from tbe boat to the landing place, and as he stooped down to put them on again, they were dexterously snatched away by a person behind him. Some of tliem carried away the grappling of the boat. One man found his way into a cabin of the ship, and took away books and other things. Another laid hold of a seaman's jacket and, in spite of all that could be done, carried off his prize. These proceedings induced Captain Cook to place a guard of marines on shore to protect those who went to trade at the landing place ; and on one occasion CAPTAIN cook's YISITS. 51 a native who would not give up stolen goods was fired at. The Tongan thieves were scarcely so daring as those of Nomuka (Tasraan's Kotterdam), where Captain Cook stayed for a few days in June, 1774. Here nothing was safe. Clothes, coopers' tools, lead and line, and even guns were carried off, till orders were given that some small shot should be fired at the offenders, and one man was wounded. In 1777, Captain Cook again visited the Friendly Islands, remaining among them from April to August. During this visit, he became acquainted with several of the smaller islands, and had time to observe more closely the natural productions of the country, with the habits and customs of the people. The islanders had found out the value of many articles previously obtained from their English friends, and iron was now more eagerly sought for. Captain Cook supplied them with foreign seeds and plants; and from this time they were able to grow Indian corn, melons, pumpkins, pine-apples, and turnips. At Eua, Captain Cook partook of a dish of turnips, grown from seed left by himself on his former visit. Of domestic animals he only saw fowls and pigs. He left behind him dogs, cattle, sheep, horses, rabbits. This experiment was not very successful. The larger kinds seem to have been destroyed by the natives. The sheep did not breed. The rabbits grew out of shape. It was plain that the country did not suit them. One of the chiefs sullenly refused a present of E 2 52 CAPTAIN cook's VISITS. two goats, whicli would have proved more serviceable than the other gifts. These animals have been intro- duced since, and are now very much prized ; their milk being used as the milk of the cow is at home. Lately the Missionaries have tried horses once more, with good hope of success. Turkeys and Muscovy ducks have also been added to the few kinds of animals used as food. But pigs and fowls are still the staple supply. Among the natives, rats — a small, mouselike kind — are often eaten. Wild ducks, not unlike widgeons, parrots, parroquets, pigeons, turtle- doves, owls, bald coots, of a blue or violet plumage, and some smaller birds, with lizards and bats in such large numbers that hundreds may be seen hanging from the branches of a single tree — make up the short list of animals whose names are usually given in answer to inquiries respecting the natural history of the Friendly Islands. During this visit, as formerly at Eua, proof was not wanting of the cruelty that ever marks heathenism. One day an inferior chief ordered several natives to retire from the post that the English were occupying. Some venturing back again, he took up a large stick and beat them unmercifully. He struck one man so savagely that the blood gushed from his mouth and nose. He fell down and remained for some time motionless ; then convulsions came on, and in that state he was carried away. The chief, on being told that he had killed the man, only laughed. "When the common people offended Captain Cook by thieving. CAPTAIN cook's TISITS. 53 their chiefs would often advise him to kill them. Their mode of showing grief partook of the same barbarous character. A man who had stolen a pewter basin from the ship was pursued and captured. Three old women, his companions, uttered loud cries and beat their faces and breasts in a most violent manner. Many of the people had a mark on their cheek bones produced by this habit of beating themselves. The blows were often so severe as to graze the skin and make the blood flow copiously. Sometimes this part of the face was actually cut with a sharp instrument. Captain Cook did not see anything to make him sure that the custom of offering human sacrifices prevailed here as in most of the South Sea Islands ; but before be left he was told that in about three months a grand ceremony would take place, and that ten human victims would be slain to deter an angry god from destroying their king. At Haabai, Captain Cook was entertained by Finau, who represented himself as king of the whole group of islands. He was about thirty years of age, tall and thin, with a European cast of countenance, intelligent and commanding, but crafty withal. He attached himself to Captain Cook early in his visit, and became, to all appearance, his fast friend. It was sometime before the discovery was made that the real king held his court at Tonga. Tinau maintained his own right to the title till he came into the presence of his sovereign, to whom, after all his boasting, he was then glad to do homage. Captain Cook calls 54 CAPTAIN cook's YISITS. this king Euttafaiha and Poulalio ; but the natives call him Pau. These chiefs seemed to vie with each other in doing honour to their guests. They gave a succession of grand entertainments, on a scale till then unknown in the islands, so numerously were they attended and so lavishly were gifts bestowed. At one of these, two large piles of yams were raised in the following way : Long posts were driven into the ground, two feet from each other, thus, o o and the space between was fiUed up with yams. "When these rose four feet from the ground the natives fastened sticks across to keep the yams in, and to serve as steps for themselves. They then tied new posts to the first four, and went on building their pile, till it rose to the height of thirty feet. A baked hog was laid on the top of one of these lofty piles ; a living hog was fastened to the top of the other, and half way up another of these animals was tied securely. Smaller heaps of yams, cocoa-nuts, and bread fruit were gathered around. To these the chiefs added turtle, fish, and other valuables. All these were presents to their English guests. The entertainments consisted of feastings, musical concerts, evening dances, and boxing and Avrestling matches. They displayed much dexterity in their games and exactness in the measure of their dances. The female dancers looked very graceful, in flowing garments of native cloth, their dark hair garlanded with crimson flowers. They kept time to their own singing, while a chorus of voices from an outer circle CAPTAIN COOK'S TISITS. 55 responded, and the scene was lighted up by the red glare of torches, or by the pleasanter moonbeams. The English, in return, amused their hosts with military exercises and fireworks. But under all this show of friendliness there were doubts on both sides. Erequent robberies induced Captain Cook to seize three of the native canoes, and to put a guard over the king, his brother, Fiuau, and others of the great chiefs, until the missing articles should be restored. The people, resenting the in- dignity put upon their honoured chiefs, armed them- selves and gathered round. The chiefs checked these manifestations, and ordered the return of the stolen goods. They were soon brought back, and the old friendly relations resumed with sincerity on one side, and with what seemed to be sincerity on the other. When Captain Cook left the islands he spoke of their inhabitants as "good," and " worthy " people. With all his sagacity he did not suspect that his professed friends had laid a plot against his life, and that he had twice narrowly escaped from their treacherous hands. It seems that they invited him and his officers to a feast, intending to kill them with the whole of the two ship's* companies, and then to seize on the vessels and all that they contained. Einau had a large share in these fierce and cruel counsels. But disputes arose about the best method of carrying out the scheme ; and while they wavered, the strangers weighed anchor. * The Itesohdion and the Discovery. Captain Clarke accom- panied our great navigator on his third voyage. 56 CAPTAIN cook's VISITS. Do not be too hard in your censures of these heathen islanders. It was not likely that a people who had never yielded up their own will, except in obedience to their own chiefs, should cordially relish the conduct of intruding strangers who, when they could not coax them with beads, mastered them by fire-arms. Self-interest, too, is a close and nice cal- culator. Among these islanders were men who had shrewdness enough to find out that, in the affairs of trade, the strangers usually had the best of the bar- gain. "We have seen how ample were the supplies obtained at Tonga, and when they left Nomuka they had " quite exhausted the island of every article of food that it afforded." The few presents and exchanges received from the foreigners were like bits of bread broken off" from a loaf and thrown to a hungry man. The appetite of the natives was whetted. They longed for all that the ships held. Coveting what was kept back, and angry with those who threatened them into submission, can we wonder that they planned their conquest ? It strikes me that could we have changed places with them, our forbearance would not have been much greater. Suppose that — were it indeed possible — a people as much superior to us in skiU and resources, as we are to the Friendly Islanders ; a people possessed of more amazing productions of science and art than we had ever known, were to pounce upon England, scour the country and consume its produce, pry into our houses, and buy or beg every thing that CAPTAIN cook's VISITS. 57 came to hand ; suppose that some of the lower sort of people oiFending them, they were to seize the Prime Minister, and menace the Queen ; — would not our fighting men be ready enough to secure their persons, and to capture their curiosities ? And can we be bold enough to say that there are none in this Christian country who might not be disposed, fair means failing, to rid themselves of such invaders by foul means ? "We have learned, by many unhappy instances of loss and bloodshed, that there is not only humanity, but policy in respecting the rights of savage, as well as of civilised man ; and we are glad to know that in our day English captains have visited nations as untamed as the Priendly Islanders used to be, and have come away without doing any violence. "The collisions between natives and Europeans will almost always be found to arise from some exhibition of force on the one side, exciting alarm or passion on the other. Remove the possibility of resistance, and even the wildest savages will respect the hero who trusts himself among them unharmed and undaunted. The Wesley ans in the Eiji group have now dwelt for years among the most sanguinary barbarians of the earth, wholly defenceless, and as yet, says Mr. Lawry, no injury whatever has been committed on them."* From the date of Captain Cook's visits, the Friendly Islands became a frequent calling-place for English, * Quarterly Review, Vol. 93, page 117. 58 CAPTAIN cook's TISITS, and other vessels. Between 1777 and 1791, they were visited by the Princess, a Spanish frigate ; and by the Pandora, the Bounty, and the Providence, English ships. Less favourable accounts of the inhabitants reached this country ; accounts which spoke of the fierceness of the men, and of the immodesty of the women. The truth was that these evils were increased tenfold by the intercourse of the natives vsdth Euro- peans. In the year 1792, two Erench ships of war, the Becherclie, and the Esperance, under the command of Rear- Admiral d'Entrecasteaux, called at these Islands. The date of this voyage, and some of the terms employed by M. Labillardiere, who writes its story,* remind one of the state of France at that time. He speaks of "Citizen''^ Beaupre, the engi- neer, "Citizen" Avignon, one of the gunners, and " Citizen " Lahaye, the gardener of the expedition. The Erench had taken a disgust at the titles Duke, Count, Marquis, and Monsieur. They chose to call each other Citizen, contending that this was the best name for all men not holding public offices. Even the King might not be called " Sire," or "your Majesty." It is curious to note the quiet pursuits of a few men of science and enterprise, busy among the South Sea Islands, in contrast with the scenes * "Account of a voyage in search of LaPerouse, undertaken by order of the Constituent Assembly of France, and performed in the years 1791, 1792, 1793. Translated from the French of M. Labillardiere. London, 1800." CAPTAIN cook's VISITS. 59 of uproar and bloodshed that were defacing their ovra country, and horrifying astonished Europe. It seems worthy of remark that the misrule upper- most in France had contrived to creep into these two ships before they sailed away. The citizens did not always agree among themselves ; neither did they pay the strictest attention to the commands of their oflB.cers. Private quarrels and instances of direct dis- obedience are often named. Once arrived at a place of rest and refreshment they gave themselves up to self-indulgence. The worst class of natives were received, contrary to orders, into the vessel ; and those of the crew who went ashore spread the plague of their own wickedness still further among the people. Things which men who had not lost all sense of shame would have tried to hide, were done beneath the open eye of day, and spoken of by the historian of the voyage with a joke instead of a sigh. But we turn gladly from this part of our subject. From Labillardiere's narrative I shall try to glean a few particulars that may amuse you, as well as help you to form a more correct and distinct notion of the state of the Friendly Islands, up to the time when the first effort was made to convey the gospel to their shores. Diu-ing the stay of d'Entrecasteaux clubs were com- monly used by the natives, and he received some very handsome specimens from the chiefs. A few of the clubs were of bone ; but most were made of a very hard kind of wood {Casuarina Equisetifolia) . Some of them 60 CAPTAIN cook's VISITS. were inlaid witli pieces of bone rudely representing star-fisli or birds. They were of many shapes and finished in a workmanlike manner. They were carved with instruments made of sharks' teeth fastened to the end of a piece of wood. Yolcanic flint, shells, bones, sharks' teeth, and the hardest wood were applied to the purposes for which we should use iron or steel ; files were made of sharks' skin, and pumice-stone was used for sharpening and polishing their tools. Several natives were seen squaring large blocks of stone for the burial-place of a chief. They dressed them by means of a volcanic flint, surrounded near the middle with pieces of mat to prevent the splinters from flying into their eyes. In shaving they used the sharp end of a shell. A barber was seen operating upon one of the chiefs who sat before his house, leaning his back against the wall. " The barber having for his razor the two valves of a particular species of shell, fixed against the skin that which he held in his left hand, while with the right he leant the edge of the other valve against the base of the hairs, which he repeatedly scraped, and took them off", as it were, one by one. We were astonished at so much patience ; and we quitted them, as may well be conceived, long before the end of the operation." I have already named the practice of cutting ofi" the little finger, or a portion of it, in sacrifice. It was so common, that a grown person was rarely met who had CAPTAIN cook's VISITS. 61 not suiFered from this kind of mutilation. In this process, the same rough instruments were employed. The fiiiger was laid flat upon a block of wood ; an axe or sharp stone was placed with the edge upon the line of separation, and a powerful blow being given with a mallet or large stone, the operation was finished. M. Labillardiere speaks of a young girl who "had the little finger of the left hand wrapped up in cloth made of paper-mulberry-tree bark, which was stained with blood. We desired to see the wound, and immediately another reached down from the roof under which we were, a bit of plantain leaf, out of which she took the two first joints of this young girl's little finger, that had been cut ofi" very recently, on purpose, as she told us, to cure a serious disorder." Sometimes a native would perform this ofiice for himself. He would take a sharp shell and hack away till his finger was severed from his hand. In the manufacture of earthenware but small advance has been made. The few vessels in use among the people were very porous and rather slightly baked; so that water put into them would have oozed out had not their surface been covered with a coating of rosin. Thus fitted for holding water they were of no use in cookery, as rosin melts when exposed to fire. In boiling they sometimes used earthen pots from the Fiji Islands, or iron vessels procured from ships, or even banana leaves. But more commonly their food was baked. They would take a hog, wash and clean it, fill the inside of its body with hot stones, each 62 CAPTAIN cook's TISITS. wrapped iu bread-fruit leaves, and lay it in a hole in the ground lined with stones just heated. They would place a few small branches within this hole or oven, and a few over the back of the pig. Banana leaves were strewed above, and over the whole a mound of earth was raised so that the steam was kept in. AVhen partly cooked the animal was taken up and cut into pieces. These pieces were wrapped in leaves and the baking process was repeated. In the same way they dressed yams, fowls and bread-fruit. Occasionally they roasted food upon hot embers. They had a favourite dish ; a kind of cocoa-nut pudding. The receipt for it, if the natives of the Friendly Islands wrote cookery books, would be something like this : — " Take a few very ripe cocoa-nuts ; scoop out the kernel carefully ; bruise it with a hot stone till reduced to a pulp ; mix and add a little boiled bread-fruit ; form into balls and eat immediately." One would not object to joining them in such a repast ; but it seems that they offered lizards, as very good food, to their French visitors, and even spoke of bats as capital eating. Fish formed a variety in their diet. In fishing they either employed a line and hook, or a net. The lines M'ere made of the plaited fibre of the cocoa-nut husk, and their hooks of pearl and tortoiseshell. Their nets were of fine thread ; the meshes made like our own. The fishermen attached pieces of coral to their lower edge, threw them into the CAPTAIN cook's YISITS. 63 sea, and then dived in order to bring the two sides of the net together by means of small lines and to take ont the fish that were caught. M. Labillardiere once saw a man on land catch a couple of fowls by means of one of these fishins; nets. TOOLS AND FISHING TACKLE. Their canoes were mimerous, neatly made and greatly prized. They preserved them as much as possible from the weather, and might be often seen pohshing them with pumice-stone. The Tonga people were then, and are now, famous as navigators : but in the art of canoe-building they have been greatly aided by the Fiji Islanders.* D'Entrecasteaux and his party • " In point of neatness and workmanship tlieir canoes exceed everything of this kind we saw in this sea. They are built of several pieces sewed togetlier with bandage in so neat a manner, tliat on the outside it is difficult to see the joints. All the fasten- 64 CAPTAIN cook's VISITS. only remained among the Islands for three weeks : but towards the close of his visit quarrels became frequent. A few of the French were wounded and several of the natives were killed. The result of these and of similar encounters with the companies of other ships was ings are on the inside, and pas3 through kauts or ridges, which are wi-ought on the edges and ends of the several boards which compose the vessel, for that purpose. They are of two kinds, viz. : double and smgle. The single ones are from twenty to thu'ty feet long, and about twenty or twenty-two inches broad in the middle ; the stern terminates in a point, and the head some- thing like the point of a wedge. At each end is a kind of deck, for about one-third of the whole length, and open in the middle. In some the middle of the deck is ornamented with a row of white shells stuck on little pegs wrought out of the same piece which composes it. These single canoes have aU out-riggers, and are sometimes navigated with sails but more commonly witli paddles The two vessels which compose the double canoe are each about sixty or seventy feet long, and four or five broad in the middle ; and each end terminates nearly in a point Two such vessels are fastened to and parallel to each other, about six or seven feet asunder, by strong cross beams, secured by ban- dages. . . . Over these beams is laid a boarded platform. All the parts which compose the double canoe are made as strong and hght as the nature of the work will admit, and may be immerged in water to the very platform without being in danger of filling. Nor is it possible, under any circumstances, for them to suik, as long as they hold together The sail is made of mats ; the rojDC they make use of is laid exactly hke ours, and some of it is four or five inch. On the platform is buUt a httle shed or hut, which shields the crew from the sun and weather, and serves for other purposes. They also carry a moveable fire-hearth, which is a square but shallow trough of wood, filled with stones. The way into the hold of the canoe is from off the platform, down a sort of uncovered hatchway, in which they stand to bale out the water." — Capt. Cook's Voyages, Vol. I, p. 425. ■ jf^-uf -1 MODERN DOUBLE CANOE, OR KALIA. OLD DOUBLE CANOE, OR TOGIAKL CAPTAIN cook's VISITS. C5 distrust on both sides. Europeans became wary and sought their own ends by a system of intimida- tion; while the natives hid evil designs under a mask of kindness, or openly attacked foreign ves- sels and cruelly murdered their crews. They were Friendly Islands no longer. From this time for many years they were a terror to the frequenters of the South Seas. In the year 1827, Capt. Dillon wrote : — " Some four or five years ago the natives of this Island (Eua), to the number of about ten or twelve, were admitted on the decks of the Supply, whaler, then standing off and on under easy sail, trading, and waiting for a boat to return to the shore. Suddenly they armed themselves with capstan bars, and clubs brought out of their canoes, under pretence of offering them in barter, attacked such of the crew as were on deck, killed the captain's brother, besides the carpenter of the ship and one seaman and actually seized the captain and threw him overboard. Fortunately however he fell into a whaleboat that was hoisted on the ship's quarter, where he found a telescope, which with admirable presence of mind, he presented at the natives that were pursuing him ; who, supposing it to be a new description of firelock, immediately retreated, and thus the captain's life was preserved. By this time the crew who were below at dinner, hearing the yells of the savages and the groans of their dying com- panions, became alarmed for their own safety ; and 66 CAPTAIN cook's visits. seizing each a liarpoon or lauce, they sallied on deck where, after having killed some of the murderers, they compelled the rest to seek safety by leaping overboard and swimming to their canoes. Since that period these Islanders have on several occasions enticed the crews of boats, sent there for various purposes, from ships lying off" and on, to land ; when, having been seized on by hundreds of savages who bound them individually to coco^i-nut trees, one of the prisoners has been despatched to obtain a ransom from the Captain for the rest of his men, whom they would by no means release till their demands (in most instances four or five muskets and a couple of barrels of gun- powder,) were acceded to, and the ransom actually in their possession." Again : " This evening I divided the crew into three watches, attaching an officer and petty officer to each ; the former to be stationed on the poop, and the latter on the forecastle during the respective watches. With a view to keep their vigilance alive, I called their attention to the fate of the American ship, Duhe of Portland, which had been cut off at this place, and all on board murdered, with the exception of Eliza IMorley, an English female, and three boys. I reminded them also of the melancholy fate of Capt. Pembleton and Mr. Boston, the one commander and the other supercargo of the American ship, Union. Likewise of the capture of the Port au Prince and massacre of her crew ; the fate of two CAPTAIN cook's VISITS. 67 ■whalers at Vavau ; and lastly the affray between the natives and M. Dumont d'Urville, which happened only a few weeks before. With such awful warnings I did not suppose that even a Lascar would venture to sleep during his watch." * * Narrative of the Discovery of the fate of La Perouse. By Chevalier Captain P. Dillon. Yol. I, pages 259 — 273'. r2 (I|ltaj?ti[it UL FIRST CHRISTIAN MISSION. F the many ages that have come and gone since England has had a name among the ly^T^'f nations of the earth, all have not been equally 9T^ memorable. The history of some is known only Ji to men of thought, who love to trace effects to their Y causes, and who know how much the records of past centuries are needed in solving the problems of the present century. To the common mind these are blank years and nothing more. Others again are marked by events so great, that the casual glance perceives, and the ordinary memory retains them. "Wlio that has once learned, ever forgets the date of the Norman Conquest, the starting point in the modem history of England ? Or who is not familiar with the time when the clouds of the middle ages began to melt away before the morning of the Eeformation ? The century preceding our own is another of these noticeable periods of time. We who live near it think so ; and in all likelihood our successors, many genera- FIBST CHBISTIAN MISSION. 69 tions hence, will look back to it with even more of admiration and thankfulness ; for they will live in a world flooded with the blessed light whose early rays fell scantily upon the nations at the commencement of the era of modern missions. To judge of the relative value of things, we must take our stand where more than a part can be seen. "We step back from a large picture when we would form an opinion as to its proportions; and our eye conveys a truer impression of the size of a mountain when we look at it from a dis- tance, than when we cUmb its side and become familiar with ridge after ridge in toiling to its highest point. So it is commonly with the times in which we live, and the men by whom we are surrounded. The past and the present century are rich in wonderful events and discoveries. They have their great men too : but then we see them close at hand. The names of their fathers, and mothers, and sisters, and brothers; their own domestic story and personal weaknesses are familiar to this generation ; and because they are "of us " we fail to note how high above us they are, and we leave it to a future age to measure their full stature, and to give them their just place among the world's greatest or its best men. In the beginning of the eighteenth century religious knowledge and religious feeling were both at a low ebb. There were few witnesses for God in the Church ; and the world was left to take its own course, almost without reproof for sin, or invitation to holiness. The character of the times was stamped with ungodliness. 70 riEST CHRISTIAN MISSION. It was •seen in the coarseness and self-indulgence of circles distinguished by rank, fashion and literary taste; in the writings of the humourists and the moralists of the day ; even in the ministrations of the pulpit. It was in the midst of these times of religious decay and abounding vice that, by the study of Grod's word and the teaching of His Spirit, a change took place in the opinions and in the hearts of several young men whose caUing was to preach the Grospel to others. They were led to feel the importance of those great truths that in the Apostolic age had " turned the world up- side down." They saw that sin had separated man from God; that there was a mode of Grod's own planning by which the alien and the rebel might be again united to his justly-offended Father and Sove- reign; and that the best way to spend a short life- time, was to work hard and to work ceaselessly in persuading men to "be reconciled to God." To this one object several clergymen of the Established Church devoted their whole time, mental faculties and bodily energies. Among them, was the Eev. William Grim- shaw; who, besides incessant labours in his own parish, had two circuits which he visited alternately, week by week. He called one his " idle week," because in it he seldom preached more than twelve or fourteen times ; but in his "busy" or " working week," his sermons often exceeded twenty-four, and sometimes amounted to thirty. "While the Eev. Henry "Venn exercised his ministry at Huddersfield, he preached from desk and pulpit, in his own house, and in cottage homes, to riEST CHEISTIAN MISSION. 71 crowds of weeping bearers, many of whom so deeply felt the truths he taught, that on their way back they would walk in silent thought, or only speak to talk over the sermon they had heard, and to urge eacli other to live iu accordance with their pastor's lessons.* Fifty years after Mr. Venn left Huddersfield, his grandson sought out the remaining living frmts of his earnest ministry; and he met with many who, after the lapse of so many years, could repeat the texts from which they had heard him preach, and describe the effects produced on themselves and on others by bis powerful sermons. The Rev. S. "Walker, of Truro ; the Rev. Richard Conyers, Vicar of Helmsley, and afterwards Rector of St. Paul's, Deptford; the Rev. Thomas Adam, whose " Private Thoughts" have helped so many Christians in their closet retirement, were all men who consecrated their life to the same object. As the century advanced their numbers multiplied. Mr. Romaine used to say, that when he began his course he " could only reckon up as many as six or seven who were like-minded with himself; in a few * The impression made by Mr. Venn's preacliing was not eon- fined to one class of hearers. The author of his memoir, says : — " A gentleman, highly respectable for his character, talents and piety — the late WiUiam Hey, Esq., of Leeds, who frequently went to Huddersfield to hear liim preach — assured me, that once returning home with an intimate friend, they neither of them opened their lips to each other tiU they came within a mile of Leeds, a distance of about fifteen miles ; so deeply were they impressed by the important truths which they had heard from the pulpit, and the impressive manner in which they had been delivered." 72 FIEST CHRISTIAN MISSION. years the number was increased to tens ; and before he died (1795) there were above five hundred, whom he regarded," as fellow labourers with himself in word and doctrine." While these devoted men were spreading the influ- ence of their teaching and example around them in a comparatively small sphere, the Wesleys and "White- field, with a noble band of helpers, were going to and fro throughout the knd, calling upon sinners every- where to " repent and believe the Gospel." The results of these zealous labours were soon manifest. Tormal- ism gave way before the living energy of God's own truth, and multitudes from every class of the people were turned from sin to holiness. New life was put into old forms in the Church of England ; Nonconform- ing Churches owned their departure from the teaching of their falhers, and returned to their early simplicity, and their first love ; while thousands of lost and wandering sheep, for whom none had cared, found a fold and pastors in the Methodist societies. Tou will remember that when the man, out of whom the Saviour had cast a legion of unclean spirits, prayed that he might remain with Jesus, his prayer was not granted. " Jesus saith unto him, Go home to thy friends, and tell them how great things the Lord hath done for thee." However much he loved his Benefactor's person, and delighted to listen to His gracious words, he felt that it was better to show gratitude by prompt obedience ; better to sound abroad the name of One who had cured his terrible malady, FIRST CHRISTIAN MISSION. 73 and who was willing to heal all that should seek healing at His hands. So " he departed, and began to publish in Decapolis how great things Jesus had done for him: and all men did marvel." That man, as a constant follower of Jesus, might have listened, and loved, and drunk in daily draughts of happiness from a fuU cup of blessing : but the question must have arisen, " What am 1 doing for Him to whom I owe my all ? How am I showing my thankfulness ? How can I take everything, and pay back nothing ? " Jesus knew what the yearnings of loving gratitude are. He knew that the restored sufferer would be happier in Decapolis, telling all men who He was that had healed him, than he could be following Jesus in the way ; and so, as much for his own soul's sake, as for the sake of the men in Decapolis, He sent him there. And this is a lesson which Christ's churches, as weU as His members individually, learn. Their love to their Lord constrains them to look beyond themselves, and to seek the conversion of their neigh- bourhood, of their nation, and of the whole world. Thus it was that the great religious revival of the eighteenth century, led to the formation of the chief among the existing Missionary Societies. Those good men, who had been labouring restlessly among their own countrymen, found themselves surrounded by agents ready to carry on at home the work that they had begun, and, lifting up their eyes, they saw the field of the world " white already to harvest." The Missionary movement did not owe its com- 74 riEST CnEISTIAN MISSION. mencement to a search for employment by men who had little to do. It was the fruit of a busy age. The war that ended in the Independence of America, was but just oyer; and the public mind of England, was agita- ted by questions arising out of the French revolution. But above the noise of political excitement, the Savi- our's parting command, " Gro ye into all the world and preach the gospel to every creature," fell on the ear of His servants with pew emphasis ; and it was ans- wered with cheerful readiness. In 1786, before the death of John Wesley, the first Methodist Missionaries, headed by Dr. Coke, entered the British Colonies. The Baptist Missionary Society, was established in 1792 ; the London Missionary Society in 1795 ; the Edinburgh or Scottish, and the Glasgow Missionary Society, in 1796 ; and the Church Missionary Society, in the year 1800.* A mission to the South Seas, was the first under- taking of the London Society. The accounts of Cook's voyages, had interested many persons in favour of the islands of the Pacific. There was one good man, the Eev. Dr. Haweis, Eector of Aldwinkle, in Northamptonshire, and Chaplain to the Countess of Huntingdon, whose heart was set on sending out Missionaries to Tahiti, then called Otaheite. Several * The Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in Foreign Parts was estabhshed in 1701 ; and a few years later, the Christian Knowledge Society which gi'ew out of it, afforded valuable help to the Danish Indian Mission, best known in this country through the Life of Swartz. FIEST CHBISTIAN MISSIOIT. 75 years before the formation of the London Missionary- Society, he undertook to prepare two young men for the work, and to pay the expenses of their outfit and passage. The men who offered to go, and who went through a course of suitable study, did not prove to be of the right spirit. When the way was open for their departure, they disappointed Dr. Haweis, by requiring one condition after another that could not be granted, and finally refusing to go at all. Dr.iHaweis says, " Their subsequent conduct left me no cause for regret." Three or foiu' years after, another student from Lady Huntingdon's College in Wales, offered himself for the work : but it was thought expedient to send two out together, and no companion for Mr. Lewis could be found. A little later, we find Dr. Haweis offering " £500 for the equipment of the first Missionary that should be sent on this blessed service ;" but to this offer there was no immediate response. In spite of so much that might have discouraged him, his hope and aim knew no change. This one thing, was " for ever in the imagination of the thoughts of his heart." Such faith and effort as his, are not in vain ; and at last the glad day came, when, at the formation of the London Missionary Society, Dr. Haweis proposed, and it was agreed, that the first mission of the Society should be to the islands of the Pacific. Christians of different churches joined in this enter- prise ; devout and ardent spirits gave vent to their feelings in praise and prayer ; and abundant gifts were 76 FIRST CHRISTIAN MISSIOIT. poured into the treasury of the Society. A ship of 300 tons burden, was purchased and furnished with suitable stores by the friends of the mission. Imple- ments of husbandry, tools of many kinds, seeds and other useful things were sent out, in hope of teaching the natives to value and to practice the arts of civilised life. Thirty persons were chosen as Missionaries, out of a much larger number who willingly offered them- selves. In this selection, the Committee endeavoured to secure piety, and therefore only accepted those who were strongly recommended by the mioisters and churches, with whom they had been associated, and whose religious knowledge and principles had been tested by strict inquiries. They sought for some who had had the advantage of a liberal education ; but they chose many, whose chief recommendation was skiU in various useful arts. Among the whole number, only four were ordained ministers. The rest were chiefly mechanics. It was, however, intended that these, according to their ability, should instruct the heathen in the truths of Christianity. Some among them, if not all, were lay-preachers. Early on the morning of the 10th August, 1796, " the Missionaries embarked at Blackwall, multitudes flocking around them to take their leave ; and as they sailed down the river, singing the praises of Grod, the scene became still more deeply affecting. Three of the directors, the Eev. Dr. Haweis, Messrs. "Wilks and Brooksbank, went with them to the ship, and accompanied them down the Channel." The T>vff FIEST CHEISTIAN MISSION. 77 was detained for some weeks at Spithead, and was visited bj many friends from Portsmouth and Gosport, as well as from London. " On the first Sabbath in September, Dr. Haweis preached an excellent sermon on board, and afterwards united with the Missionaries, the Captain, and such of the crew as were members of churches, in commemorating the dying love of Him, the tidings of whose salvation they were bearing to the utmost ends of the earth."* At length the signal for sailing was made. Dr. Haweis happened to be on shore, but hastening on board, he observes : — " Every heart welcomed me and every hand. We now felt the propitious gale, and trusted, after long patience, that the Lord's time was come." After- wards the Missionaries and many of the seamen came to the quarter-deck. "I spoke to them," says Dr. H. " From the first verse of the third chapter of He- brews, and uniting in praise, we closed with prayer and solemn dedication of ourselves to God. Our tears of joy and sorrow mingled; every heart appeared fuU, But the glory of God our Saviour, and the great object we had in view, seemed to absorb every other consideration. We believed we should meet and pray no more together, but we vowed to remember each other before the Throne daily, and knew we should shortly unite in that kingdom, where our prayers should be exchanged for everlasting praises. The boat was waiting to convey me to the shore, the even- * Ellis's History of the London Missionary Society, vol. i. p. 43. 78 FIEST CHRISTIAN MISSION. ing approaclied, our distance was considerable, but the day was beautifully fair. I stepped down the side of the ship, cast many a mingled look of joy and reluc- tance behind me, till the ship faded from my view, and miagling with the multitude of masts around her, was no longer distinctly visible."* The I>i^ff sailed under convoy for a few days, as it was a time of war, and captiire by French vessels was feared. However, nothing occurred to impede her progress. The voyage was safe and prosperous. On reaching the South Seas, the four ordained ministers and fourteen of the other brethren were landed at Tahiti; and then the Duff pursued her course to Tonga. Ten Missionaries were allotted to the Friendly Islands. Ton may feel interested in reading their names, and in knowing what had been their previous occupations. SheUey . . Cabinetmaker Mr. Buchanan . Tailor Kelso . , . Wearer ,, Cooper . . Shoemaker Wiltinson , , Carpenter „ Nobbs . . Hatter Bowell . . , Shopkeeper 5, Yeeson . . Bricklayer Harper . . . Cotton Manu- facturer And Gaulton. I cannot tell what Mr. Gaulton' s business was before he left England. He had been received on board the Duff shortly before she sailed, and was so anxious to join the Mission, that he accepted a very inferior position in the ship, rather than remain at * Evangelical Magazine, 1796, p. 472. riRST CIimSTIAN MISSION. 79 home. " He so commended himself to the Captain and the Missionaries during the voyage that, on reach- ing their destination, they unanimously elected him a member of the Mission to the Friendly Islands." His faithfulness equalled his zeal during the short period of his Missionary life ; and the last act of that life was an act of self-sacrificing love. In the midst of a hasty fliglit, by which he might have escaped death, he turned back to try to rescue his brethren from the hands of merciless savages, and was slain with them. The brethren landed at Tonga, on the 12th April, 1797 ; young, hopeful, and as far as man could judge, all devoted for Christ's sake to the work on which they had been sent out. Who among them thought, as with light step and buoyant heart he took posses- sion of his new home, that of his own little company one would prove a traitor ; that three would be cut off in their prime, cruelly murdered by those whom they came to bless ; and that the rest, after enduring a grievous " fight of afflictions," would leave the Islands without the recompensing hope, that they had been the means of leading one soul to Christ ? It is wisely ordered, that when we are sent into the Lord's vine- yard to do His work, we are not told how long it will be before we shall gather ripe clusters of fruit. " To do our duty and leave events with God," is a lesson that we are often taught by precept and by Providence, Among the first visitors to the ship, were two white men, named Ambler and Connelly, the first a native 80 nssT cnuisTiAN mission. of London, the second of Cork, in Ireland. They had resided on the Island about thirteen months. Ambler spoke the language fluently, and both acted as inter- preters between the Missionaries and the Islanders. They were ill-looking fellows. Ambler was bold, talkative, and presuming. The Missionaries soon found that they must not rely upon his truthfulness. From him they learned that all the chiefs were weU- disposed, and at first they saw nothing that made them doubt this statement. There seemed to be many chiefs of equal power and influence, and they had some difficulty in making up their minds as to where to go, and under whose care to place them- selves. Ambler advised them to go to Hihifo and to live under the protection of Tinau Ukalala, the brother of the Finau who was Captain Cook's friend. They say of him in their journal, that " he is about forty years of age, of a sullen, morose countenance ; speaks very little, but when angry, bellows forth with a voice like the roaring of a lion." Though so surly, he told the Missionaries that they might live where they chose, and that no one should hurt them. So they took their goods on shore, housed them safely, and lay down to sleep on native mats, after commend- ing themselves and their property into the hands of their God. The next day they were able to say, that they had never slept more soundly in their lives. At one o'clock, however, they were waked up by an officious chief to partake of an entertainment of fish, hot yams, and cocoa nuts. FIRST CnmSTIAX MISSION. 81 Two days after tlielr lauding, the Duff proceeded on her way to the Marquesas, Ou the IGth, the first Sabbath spent in their newly adopted laud, they held a prayer meeting at seven o'clock in the morning. In the forenoon, Mr. Bucha- nan prea-ched, of course in English, from the words, " Behold, I am the Lord, the God of all flesh ; is there anything too hard for me?" Jer. xxxii. 27. A text well-chosen for the subject of the first sermon ever preached in Tonga. The same day the friendly chief gave them three pieces of land ; one well-stocked with yams and banana trees ; the two others uncultivated. These added to the enclosure in whioh their house stood, made up about five acres. The Missionaries soon set about the work of turning this land to account. They stubbed up old bread fruit trees, and prepared the ground for garden seeds ; they planted crops of peas, beans and turnips ; they made an enclosure for their pigs ; they tried to prepare a forge and to make moxilds for bricks. These attempts to make a comfortable settlement interested the natives, who flocked around them and were at times exceedingly troublesome, asking ques- tions, and examining their various tools. But of all their possessions, none seemed to excite so much wonder as a Cuckoo-clock. Its striking was caused, they fancied, by a spirit who lived in it. They chose a name for it, " Akaulea," or " speaking wood." They dared not touch it, and they thought that if they stole anything, the bird-spirit would detect them. G 82 PTRRT CHRISTIAN MISSION. This alarm was uot without its use in a nation of thieves. Gifts were brought in large quantities to the Mis- sionaries, who, in their turn, made many useful presents to the chiefs. For some time all seemed friendly and promising ; but by-and-by Ambler began to show a hostile spirit. He was joined by Morgan, another English- man, from a neighbouring island. This man was even more depraved than Ambler and Connelly. They lived after the customs of the heathen around them. Each had several wives, and Ambler treated the poor women who lived with him so badly, that their friends helped them to make their escape. These men de- manded iron tools from the Missionaries, though they knew that their stock was greatly reduced; and Ambler did not scruple to say, that unless his wish was met, he should take means to satisfy himself before ten days were out. The chiefs too, showed signs of jealousy, when one of their number could boast of more presents than the rest. Reports were abroad that the chiefs were " dying in love for the goods of the Missionaries," and that they planned an extensive robbery, but were waiting till the return of the ship, when they expected more valuables to be landed. While the brethren heard these things, they were eye witnesses of some acts of barbarity, that were not likely to allay their anxiety. One man who displeased Finau, " had his hand cut off on the spot ; and another was tied up with his arms FIRST CUEISTIAN MISSION. 83 extended, and two women were ordered, with lighted sticks, to burn him under the arm -pits." As week after week passed, the Missionaries fovmd themselves involved in new dilncvdties. Several chiefs had died recently, and the natives said that they had never died so fast before, and that it was the siuging and praying of the new comers that had killed them. The truth was, that the Englishmen, " lewd fellows of the baser sort," who led idle and profligate lives, hated the Missionaries for their better morality ; stole their goods ; menaced them with oaths ; went from hard words to harder blows ; stirred up the chiefs to dis- trust and ill-use them ; and in short, did all in their power to make their residence in the island wretched and profitless. The poor men speak of being " in perils among the heathen, but in greater perils from their own countrymen." This was an unforeseen evil, and was perhaps at the root of all their other troubles. The Missionaries consulted together, and agreed that it would be best to break up into small parties, and to station themselves in several parts of the island. One or two could be more easily provided for by a chief than a larger number ; and then they hoped by mixing constantly with the people, to gain an insight into their language. Their progress in this, had been very small while they had employed Euglish interpreters. Messrs. Bowell and Harper, went to Ardeo, now Bea ; Veeson, to Ahoge, or Ahake ; Cooper, to Mua. The rest remained at Hihifo. Changes, however, took place afterwards, and when the g2 84 riEST CHEISTIATT MISSION. Z>M^ sailed foi* China, Messrs. Buchanan and Gaulton had settled at Mua. It was arranged, that they should have a common meeting-place, and that they should come together once a month for prayer and counsel. It was also resolved that each party, at home, should hold a weekly prayer-meeting. The natives were permitted to attend the Sabbath services. Many did so, behaving quietly. It does not appear that any attempt was made to convey truth to their mind by public teaching. Perhaps the wicked Englishmen refused to interpret. Perhaps the Mis- sionaries thought it better to wait till they could dispense with the services of those who might give a false turn to their words. Things were in this unsettled state when the anniversary of their embarkation came round. The brethren met together, and enjoyed a season of happy fellowship. They found cause for praise in the way by which God had led them ; in the fulfilment of their early Christian hopes as to foreign service ; in their safe voyage ; in their preservation from harm, though defenceless, among heathen ; and in the frustration of the evil designs of their own wicked counti'ymen. And as they mused on these things, and named them one by one, numberless acts of Fatherly tenderness rose to the memory of each, so that besides the social thanksgiving there was the individual joy of heart, with which no stranger can intermeddle. That verv dav a large axe was snatched from one FIEST CnRISTIAN MISSIO:?!. 85 of tbe brethren as he was cutting firewood ; and at night, while all slept, some thieves broke into the house, and riiled the first box they came to. It happened to contain medicines only, and the thieves not relishing their gains left them in tlie yard ; so that in the morning the Missionaries found nitre, jalap, bark, &c., scattered about. They had made oft', how- ever, with some clothes belonging to the inmates. Two or three days after this the Duff arrived at Tonga, bringing that part of the cargo which, in a division recently made at Tahiti, fell to the share of the Friendly Island mission. The number of useful iron tools was much greater than the brethren had expected, and they were filled with thankfulness. The natives were amazed to see so many valuable things, and sought friendship with the owners for the sake of their goods. On the 7th September the Duff weighed anchor, taking with her Mr. Nobbs, whose health had failed. "With the departure of the vessel, all hope of human help in case of need was lost : but the Missionaries had counted the cost, and their faith did not fail. Up to this time their difficulties, though many, had been manageable ; but we now turn over another and a sadder page in their story. The vessel was scarcely out of sight when they began to notice a change in the conduct of one of their own number. George Veeson was not seen so often in their meetings for prayer; indeed, he shunned their society. Soon after they found him dressing like the heathen, and joining 86 FIEST CHRISTIAN MISSION. in their bad practices. They mourned over his strange and wicked conduct, nrged him to return to his former habits, and made him the subject of special prayer. But he gave no heed to their words. They found that he had attached himself to a heathen woman, who lived with him as his wife. He asked the missionaries to unite them in marriage, and they were willing to do this as the less of two evils : but when they made the woman understand something of the meaning of the rite, she would not consent to be bound by so close a tie. Veeson would not give her up, so the brethren were obKged to shut him out of their fellowship. This was a keen trial to the Missionaries. How could they hope to persuade the heathen of the superiority of their religion, when one of its professors could part with it so lightly ? They had lost the strong argument that an appeal to personal character affords. They could no longer say, as a company of Christian teachers, " For yourselves- know how ye ought to follow us ; for we behaved not ourselves dis- orderly among you." " Ye are our witnesses, and God also, how holily, and justly, and unblameably, we behaved ourselves among you." This sad warning led the " faithful brethren " to heart-searching, aud to more simple, self-renouncing reliance on aid from above : and that aid was given. In the narrative that Veeson afterwards furnished of his residence in Tonga he says, after speaking of the number and variety of alluring temptations, " Con- sidering all these obstacles, it must be a great FIUST CnmSTIAN MISSION. 87 satisfaction to the promoters of tbo South Sea Mission, to be assured from one who has to condemn himself, and who remained at Tongataboo after all the brethren left it, that no other of the Missionaries whom he accompanied thither, acted unbecoming their sacred character."* As for Veeson himself, he threw off all restraint. The brethren, who took his letter of dismission to him, claimed any property that he might have belonging to the society ; but, on finding that except a few nails he had nothing but books and paper, they entreated him to keep these, and to take such notes as would enable him to know the Sabbath. They also urged him to attend their religious service, if on any Sabbath-day he happened to be near their dwellings ; or if he were at a distance, to withdraw from his heathen associates, and to spend some time in reading the Bible. But far from consenting, he carried all his books and papers to Mr. Graulton at Mua. To have any sort of comfort in his new life, he must put away all that could remind him of what he had been. He ran a dreadful career of wickedness, going beyond the heathen themselves in vice and cruelty, joining them as eagerly in their wars as in their pleasures ; and, as he himself acknowledges, committing " all iniquity with greediness." The chief with whom he lived, Mulikehama, made him master of a pleasant little estate of fifteen acres, covered with groves of cocoa * Authentic Narrative of a Foui' Years' Residence in Tongataboo. London : Longman & Co., 1815. Page 115. 88 FIEST CHRISTIAN MISSION. and plantain trees, and dotted here and there with the dwellings of the natives, who became his servants, and spent their time in toiling for him and for them- selves. He grew yams, kava-root, and taro, and planted thickset hedges, that as they grew up formed a shady walk. He kept his little shrubbery neat and clean, and ate delicious fruit under its cooling shade. He took a new wife whenever he thought that he could improve upon the last, and had a household of from twenty to thirty people, who were his attendants and workmen. Did he try to do good of any kind ? Hear his own words : — " I had so much imbibed the spirit of the natives, and joined their practices, that I never attempted to teach and improve them ; or else I might have done much good. But I thought of nothing but of employing them for my service in the labours of the day, and for my amusement in the diver- sions of the evening." Was he happy? Hear him again. " Amid all these interchanges of ease and indul- gence, employment and amusement, I could not prevent the intrusion of uneasy reflections. I enjoyed no true peace and happiness. My dereliction of all religion often so pained my conscience as to render me a burden to myself," He became more and more wretched till, in 1801, he was glad to escape from the country by means of an English vessel, and to return to the habits of civilised life. Our story goes back to the eight true-hearted Missionaries. Within a month of the Dujfs depar- ture, several white men landed at Tonga from an FIRST CHRISTIAN MISSION. 89 American vessel. Most of them joined Ambler and Morgan in their disgraceful way of life; but one, named Beak, a smith by trade, attached himself to the Missionaries, and served them steadily. He soon set up a forge and busied himself in the manufacture of useful articles, knives, scissors, and many kinds of tools. The natives, as well as the Missionaries, were glad to employ him. During the year 1798, the time of the Missionaries seems to have been chiefly occupied in providing for their o^vn immediate wants ; — raising houses, making clothing, and defending themselves against attacks from the natives, who were easily provoked to anger, and who never thought that the Missionaries had done enough for them in the way of gifts. At Ardeo (or Bea) they built a new house, which they reckoned " commodious, stately, and secure." It was thirty- two feet long by fifteen broad ; it was of one story, about ten feet high, had three rooms on the floor, besides a passage. The floor was made of rods, and the roof thatched with the leaf of the sugar cane. The windows were composed of rods nailed across, admitting light and air ; the walls of the same materials as the windows, plastered with a strong and very white lime,* made from the coral rock. Veeson says : — " Happening to meet some of the Missionaries, and finding they had some work to perform at their * Transactions of the Missionary Society. Vol. I, page 277. 90 FIRST CHEISTIA5f MISSION. habitation, I offered my assistance and went to Ardeo ; where I helped to plaster their house with a composition of lime, made of burnt coral, mixed up with the fibres of the cocoa nut, instead of hair. It looked very neat when fijiished. Its situation also was very pleasant. It was enclosed with a beautiful garden, which, in some parts, was planted with rows of pines, that now flourished luxuriantly ; in others with cotton seeds, from which young trees had shot up, and promised to be very productive. Some already began to bear; I saw one quite laden with cotton The Missionaries appeared very happy and united, settled in safety under the protec- tion of Yahargee (Veaji), a chief who lived near them. They faithfully remonstrated vrith me respecting my conduct, but whatever impression I felt at the time, passed off when I left them. By this time I had arrived at considerable power and dignity in the island ; and with the assistance of my workmen built a small canoe, which would carry eight or ten men." The Missionaries too, made a boat this year, twenty-one feet in length, hoping to find it useful in case of sudden danger. Messrs. Bowell, Harper, and Gaulton made con- siderable progress in the language, and maintained several natives for the sole purpose of perfecting themselves in it. Mr. Bowell was trying to form a grammar of the language : but in this he was inter- rupted by the war, which soon after broke out. FIEST CHKISTIAN MISSION. 91 Beyond what I have already stated, little seems to have been done towards teaching the natives. The Missionaries wei'e waiting till they should gain the confidence of the people by repeated acts of kindness, and by constant loving ministrations to their temporal wants, and till their own knowledge of the native tongue should enable them to do some justice to the truths they came to teach. This was not the way to learn a language quickly. This was not the way to teach religion at all. They should have gone straight to their work ; using signs till they could gain words, and giving defective notions till they could fill up the imperfect outline. But there was clearly an error at the root of the whole scheme. In the instructions given to Captain Wilson, under whose care the Mis- sionaries went out, we find the following words : — " When you consider the qualifications of the Mis- sionaries you will perhaps be inclined to think, that remaining in one or two bodies, they may form models of civilized society, small indeed, but tolerably com- plete."* How a model of civilised society, could be formed by setting down ten young men in an island, without wives and children, is a staggering question to begin with ; but letting that pass, was it likely that wild and lawless heathens would be won over to Clu'istianity by merely looking at a fair model ? It * Missionary Voyage in the Ship Duff. Introduction — page 44. 92 riRST CHKISTIAN MISSION, has never yet been found that savages have "wished to leave their old customs, and to adopt the customs of strangers, till their consciences have been awakened, and their hearts touched by the truths of revelation. Let religious motives work, and social improvements follow. In this instance, though the gospel was brought to the shores of Tonga, it was not carried home to the hearts of the Tonguese. Indeed, many natives who were living in the time of the first Mis- sionaries, have stated, since their conversion, that the object for which the white men settled in the islands was never rightly understood by the inhabitants. I may mention here that the Tougan notion, was that their English visitors came from the sky. They fancied that at the horizon, earth and sky met, and that there was no difficulty in passing from one to the other. In the sky were, they thought, extensive manufactories where adzes, hatchets, knives, and all kinds of iron tools were made. The quantity of iron brought by the Missionaries, and their skill in turning it to account, favoured this notion. " The men from the sky," was the usual name given to the Missionaries. While Veeson lived in the house of Mulikehama, he sometimes heard him at night conversing with his attendants before falling asleep. The chief would say, " Let us have some conver- sation." Another would reply, " What shall we talk about ?" A third would say, " Let us talk of the men from the sky." " They would talk for hours of the articles, dress, and customs of the Missionaries, enter- FIRST CURISTIAIf MISSlOIf. 93 taining eacli other with conjectures respecting the distance of the country whence they came, the nature of it, and its productions." It seems strange that the Missionaries were so long in learning the language. Yeeson soon spoke it with fluency. But it must be remembered that there are great difficulties to be got over in learning an un- written language. \^eeson had forsaken his brethren's society, and to talk at all he must talk Tonguese. Then he made himself one with the natives, and they w^ere pleased to teach him. The others lived in little companies of two and three, in the midst of perplexi- ties and alarms. English came readily to their tongue while the language of the country was a hard task. It has been found too, that no great progress can be made with an unwritten tongue, till its native speakers are disposed to render willing aid. As soon as these very Tongans received some idea of the lead- ing truths of religion, — when they began to " see men as trees walking" — they were eager to teach their teacher. The more words they could give him, the more thoughts were paid back to them. Old words "with fresh meanings were seized by them as priceless treasure. For example : they had a word in their language answering to our word "redeemed." Arti- cles of value had been occasionally exchanged for a slave, and this word used to express the transaction. They gave this word to the Missionary, and how their hearts wondered and rejoiced as they received it again: — 94 FIEST CHEISTIAN MISSION. " Ye were not redeemed with corruptible things, as silver and gold, from your vain conversation received by tradition from your fathers ; but with the precious blood of Christ." Several untoward circumstances might be named as hinderauces to the success of this early mission enterprise. The abundance of iron goods, kindly, but not wisely, placed at the disposal of the Missionaries ; the counsel that separated them into many parties under the care of rival chiefs ; the wicked conduct of Ambler and his associates, who persuaded the people that the Missionaries in their Sabbath services were working spells and bringing pestilence on the people ; the apostacy of Veeson ; all these were serious obsta- cles : but I am disposed to think that none of them was so great as the Missionaries' own notion of begin- ning with civilisation, instead of with heart-conversion. Had their first and constant business been to tell the people of siu and of a Saviour from sin, the results might have been different. In saying this, one does not detract from the excellence of the project, nor from the high aims and personal devotedness of the Missionaries themselves. They designed to convert the natives to Christianity ; and for this end they endured fearful perils, and doubtless won heavenly rewards ; but they erred in their mode of setting about their work. It was the experiment of young beginners. The London Missionary Society would now address itself to the same business after another riEST CHRISTIAN MISSION. 95 metliod. Failure may give as valuable a lesson as success. It may lead to a better adjustment of our forces in a new campaign, and to such a trust in " power from on bigh," as is the surest guarantee of triumph in our spiritual warfare. Early iu the year 1798, an old female chief, aunt of the Tui-tonga, died. She had been infirm and ailing for many years, so that her death was by no means an extraordinary event. But the Missionaries were blamed as its cause. In, July, a rumour reached their ears of a plot formed to murder them all and to seize upon their property. The Tui-kanokubolu, or princi- pal chief, seemed almost persuaded to kill those who lived under his protection ; but Ata, one of their best friends, Kaumavae, and the Tui-tonga-fefine, the high- est lady in the island, pleaded their cause, and they escaped that death. In January, 1799, Messrs. Shelley and Cooper visited Vavau and the Haafulahao group of Islands, and brought back a better account of them than any that had then been published. It was generally thought among Europeans, previously to this visit, that Vavau was a large solitary island. The Mis- sionaries discovered that it was only the largest in a cluster of many islands. They also improved consider- ably in their knowledge of the language, having been thrown, during tlie voyage, almost entirely into the Society of the natives. In the month of April, the brethren met to talk over " the proper steps for facilitating their great 96 FIEST CHEISTIAN MISSION. design," They had found tlie children " quite averse to restraint and instruction;" and they had not been able to attempt much in conversation. They now resolved to spend one hour every Wednesday evening in prayer for the success of their work ; and to attempt to reduce the language into some kind of grammatical form. None however was prepared to proceed to this business immediately, and the subject was deferred till their next monthly meeting. Before that time came they were in new dangers, fleeing from place to place in order to escape death. dtlmjjtiir VM. HOPE DEFERRED. night of the 21st of April, the Tui-ka- nokubolu, King of all the Islands, fell a victim to the wicked designs of Finau Ukalala, a chief fif^j) "^ some power and more ambition. The king's Jl miu-der was the signal for a civil war. You shall f have an acconnt of this outburst in the words of an eye witness. It was the period of the annual meeting " when all the chiefs from Haabai and the neighbouring isles, as well as the chiefs of Tonga, assembled together at Mua, in the mansion of the Tui-tonga, to present liim with their first ripe yams and other first-fruits of their fields. On this occasion Tui-tonga personated the deity of their fields who, they supposed, caused them to be fruitful. When the ceremony of presenting the first fruits is completed, they usually have a dance, and often fight with branches of the cocoa-trees before they return to their respective districts.* In appearance * A fuller account of this annual feast, or Inaji, will be found in the next chapter. This was usually held in October. 98 HOPE DEFEEEED. they all did so on this occasion ; but a plot had been formed for assassinating Tui-kanokubolu. The author of this plot, Ukalala, was a chief of Tongatabu, who had attached to himself a number of enterprising young men, through whose assistance he was much advancing in wealth and power. Mulikehama was his distant relation. To make their design more secret, his two canoes which were large and filled with his fellow-conspirators, set off as though they were going away ; but waited off the reef, at Ahoke, till evening, when the conspirators returned by land to Mua, where Tui-kanokubolu continued that night, as well as Muli- kehama and his party. As soon as they arrived they proceeded to station an armed watch in every road leading to and from the residence of Tui-kanokubolu ; that none might be allowed to pass or repass to excite any alarm. Having placed everything in a state of preparation, a chosen band proceeded in search of the spot where Tui-kanokubolu slept. They found all his attendants asleep, but were afraid to slay any one, lest they should mistake the person of the chief and give the alarm. At length he was betrayed by the perfumed oQ on his head. This oil is scented with wood (sandal wood) brought from the Fiji Islands, not far distant from Tonga. The wood is rubbed or scraped with a rough fish-skin into a kind of saw-dust ; with this the oil is mixed and strained, and then it possesses a strong Tlie meeting referred to above must have been a lesser meeting for presenting food and produce. The people may have called it an Inaji ; but it certainly could not have been the great Inaji. HOPE DEFEBUED. 99 perfume. This is used ouly by tbe principal chief. Discovering Hm by this distinction, they murdered him, and seven or eight of his attendants. This gave the alarm, and the rest fled ; but as every road was beset, many of them were killed also. The conspirators then proceeded down to the water, and seizing as manycauoes as they needed, broke all the rest, to secure themselves from being pursued during the night. " By the next morning, the alarm was spread through great part of the Island, and multitudes flocked to Mulikehama with the particular friends of Tui- kanukabolu, to enquire into the cause of the outrage, and to rouse him to revenge the death of the chief on TJkalala. Tha people of Hihifo, which was the par- ticular district of Tui-kanokubolu, warmly took up the cause of their chief; and hastily repaired to Muli- kehama, to fight for it under his standard. " TJkalala, meantime, with his forces continued at Ahoke, to prepare for battle in the place of the greatest hostility. The enemy, from Hihifo, dared not follow him by sea, on account of the inferiority of their fleet in number and skill. They hastened therefore by land, and met him, just as he had disembarked with his men. Ukalala and his party, all young, uufatigued, and elated with the spirit of enterprise, attacked them with a vigour which they could not withstand. They fled, and Ukalala returned to the canoes, and sailed off" for Haabai, to strengthen his cause by an addition of troops. " In three days he returned with ten sail of canoes, II 2 100 HOPE DEFEEEED. aad a considerable number of men ; many of whom expected that they had come to fight for the cause of the murdered king. By this time all the districts were in arms, and thousands were ranged under the standard of Mulikehama ; ' but to the astonishment of all, a coalition was formed between Mulikehama and Ukalala, to fight for their own cause, against that of the murdered Tui-kanokubolu. His friends instantly de- serted and fled to Hihifo. Meanwhile, Mulikehama was joiued by the three districts of Ahoke, Mua, and Ardeo."* You will remember that each of these three dis- tricts was the residence of one or more Missionaries. Messrs. Kelso, "Wilkinson, and Shelley were at Hihifo, with the loyalists ; while the others were liviag among chiefs who sided with the rebels. It seemed very desirable that the Missionaries should quit their out- posts and meet together at Hihifo, where they would be exposed in common to one danger instead of to many dangers : but another diflficulty occurred. As soon as the news of Finau's rebellion reached the Missionaries, they were told by the most friendly chiefs that their power to protect them was at an end ; and they soon saw that all restraint was taken off the people. " The first that felt the eflects of their liberty were the hogs, fowls, and other articles of food, of which in * Authentic Narrative, page 158. HOPE DEFERRED. 101 general they receive but a small share : these were destroyed in the most extravagant manner."* The Missionaries did not like, at the first note of alarm, to abandon their houses, and to leave all their goods at the mercy of reckless savages ; so they " abode by the stuff" as long as they could, watching by turns every night. Meanwhile they had enough cause for fear. It must have tried strong nerves to hear, through the dark night, the horrid din of conchs, log-drums, and war- songs. Then news came of a " slight skirmish, in which one of Finau's party had been taken prisoner, who was immediately cut up alive and eaten raw." This was followed by a story of Ata's inhuman con- duct. This chief had been in ill-health for a long time : but on hearing of the murder of his king, he had roused himself and gone forth to battle. His services were declined, and he was sent home to guard the sacred houses. Bent on doing something, he caused the body of the murderer's father to be dug up and fastened to a tree at Bangimotu. This was the greatest indignity that could be offered to a famdy, and it served as a pretext to several chiefs for declaring themselves in favour of the rebels. On the 29th, the brethren met, as it afterwards proved, for the last time. They engaged in prayer together, and it was noted that Messrs. Gaulton and * Missionary Transactions. Vol. T, p. 282. 102 HOPE DErEEEED. Harper, from Arcleo, appeared to have mucli confidence while committing themselves and their brethren into the hands of their heavenly Father ; so that this meeting cheered drooping spirits, and left all better prepared to go through the yet severer trials that awaited them. It now struck them that it might be well to launch their boat, ready for removal to a neighbouring island in case a place of temporary refuge should become desirable. She had been built, however, at the dis- tance of a quarter of a mile from the beach ; more hands than their own were required to move her; and when they asked for help even their friendly chief, Ata, would not, or could not, grant it. So they found themselves hemmed in on every hand. That island must be the limit of their range in case of pursuit. It might not unlikely be their grave. On the 9th of May, it became certain that Mr. Buchanan must quit his residence at Moko. Tuivakano and a strong party threatened to seize on everything. A friendly and loyal chief, Mafi, loaded several men with tlie best of the clothes and iron, and sent them off to Hihifo, where they placed their burden in safety for the present moment. Beak and an old man remained behind to guard the rest of the goods : but when Mr. Buchanan returned with his men he found them in the midst of distress and ruin. Tuivakano's party had been there, had torn the house to pieces, carried off everything that they fancied, and had taken Beak with them into a field, where he fully expected to be murdered. The gang who had accompanied HOPE DEFERRED. 103 Buchanan, seeing things so, rushed in to secure whatever might be left : but finding only books, they tore them up in a rage. Buchanan and Beak hastened to Hihifo, where they had the sorrow of finding that the goods carried there for safety in the morning had been already stolen. ■ They were kindly received by the brethren, now united in one party at Hihifo, excepting tlie three at Ardeo, Messrs. Bowell, Harper, and Gaulton, with an Englishman, named Burham. On the 10th of May the first important engage- ment took place. Up to this time the Missionaries, though often requested by their chiefs to go with them to war, had refused to do so ; but now they saw that their only hope of safety was in following the army. Mulikehama was advancing with a large force, and had come as far as Teikiu, while TJkalala's fleet of fifteen large canoes lay near the coast. It seemed to be the aim of the enemy to shut up the people of Hihifo in a corner, and to destroy them utterly. " We accordingly fell in with Ata," (say the ]Mis- sionaries) " who was carried in a sort of litter in the rear, about four o'clock. The march was conducted under the command of Veaji, with a tolerable degree of order and regularity, and about day-break, we fell in with the enemy's van. The Hihifaus after three shouts, began the onset with great bravery, and in a short time the enemy gave way on all hands, leaving their killed and wounded to the mercy, or rather cruelty of 104 HOPE DEFERRED. the victors, who at the first gave no quarter. A little way from the spot where the fight began, we found one old man roasting a part of one of the dead bodies, apparently with a design to eat it ; at a little distance we found the body of a chief, who had signalised him- self by his ill-ofiices to our brethren, which afibrded a scene as shocking as the former. A fellow who had severed his head and body asunder, was exhibiting them as a sign of his prowess ; and even some of the women as they went by, dipped their hands into his blood: and licked them. The enemy made several stands, but were as often worsted and driven back with a considerable loss : in their flight they divided themselves into two parties, that of Tui-tonga taking one road and Mulikehama another ; the latter of w^hich having gained a rising ground, maintained it some time ; expecting the other party to flank the Hihifans which, if they at all attempted, they were not able to effect. At length Mulikehama being killed, they were entirely routed Nothing could be more pleasing to the Hihifans than to see us on the march with them, when it first began, as they were persuaded we had got fire-arms and would make use of them> Accordingly on every little advantage they obtained, we came in with their imaginary deities for our share of the warmest acknowledgments ; even the dog which brother Kelso led in his hand had abundance of kava presented to him; but as soon as they found we took no active part in the business, we became almost as obnoxious to them as any of their adversaries ; HOPE DEFEEEED. 105 which occasioned us to leave them about eight o'clock, thinking we could not be in a more dangerous place, though we knew not where to go. It seemed the most desirable to have proceeded to Ardeo, where we expected that the brethren would have been perfectly safe, but this was quite impracticable ; and if we returned to Hihifo it seemed very improbable we should escape the canoes ; however, after some deliberation we de- termined to return thither." When the Missionaries arrived at home, they found that their beds had been carried oiF, and that all their goods were in the hands of spoilers. They sent out to reconnoitre and soon espied a party from the enemy's canoes making towards them. They imme- diately fled to the back of the island, (Liku) where the high coral reef and the rough breakers sheltered them from an attack by sea. There we will leave them for the present ; resting after their toils and anxieties, and more at ease than they would have been had they known all that had that day taken place in another part of the island. Just about the time that the Missionaries made up their mind to leave the army of the loyalists, Veeson, their former companion, quitted the army of the rebels. When, in the morning, the conchshells had blown the alarm of war, and thousands had obeyed the summons, Veeson joined them, as eager for the bat- tle as the most blood-thirsty of the savages ; he partook vdth them in all the horrors of the morning ; but when lOG HOPE DEFEREED. towards night he found that the enemy were pushing on, and that his friends were likely to be worsted, " he pressed through to the rear, and took to " his heels, with all the speed that fear administered." Boldness in sin does not make a man courageous in danger ; indeed, the worst men are often the greatest cowards. After a time, the rebels rallied and Veeson again fought amongst them. He says : — " While we continued fighting, with loss of little ground but many men, another division of the enemy kept pouring in their forces to increase the main body ; which so alarmed the party of Mulikehama that their spirits sank, and they took to flight in great disorder. .... Theenemy pursued Mulikehama' s army till they came to Ardeo. When they approached the habitation of the Missionaries, the brethren came out to look at them, not expecting that they, who had taken no part in the war, would be molested. But amongst the enemy arrived one, who had formerly requested some presents of the brethren and been refused ; this opportunity he barbarously improved to revenge himself, and directly running to attack them, others readily joined him. They knocked down Harper and Bowell, and an European who was with them, and immediately mur- dered them. James G-aulton fled ; but looking back and seeing his companions fall, to whom he was strongly attached, he returned and immediately shared their cruel fate. Gaulton always resided with the brethren whom he loved as his own soul ; and so nOPE DEFEKUET). 107 pleasant bad his life been witb them that even 'in death ' he chose not to be ' divided ' from them." The next day an obstinate and bloody battle Tvas fought; and this time the rebels were the victors. Yeeson says : — " After our engagement, our victorious troops took the bodies of their slain enemies, dragged them to the sea-shore, and after inflcting every brutal insult of savage cruelty, roasted and ate them ; think- ing it a just revenge on their enemies to devour them. In the midst of their savage repast they were sur- prised by the appearance of the enemy ; but they were so voraciously hungry, that their own safety did not avail to make them stand on their defence in time to resist them. The enemy therefore threw us into confusion. We fled to the canoes with precipitation ; some of which were nearly sank by numbers. Many did not reach them ere they had put off from the shore, and fell a sacrifice to the foe. One canoe filled with men and women was stranded. The chief of it determined to defend it to the last ; and menaced and defied the enemy. But one of them stole behind the canoe, and, with his club, knocked him down, and taking possession of the canoe, all that were in it were massacred." News of the victory won by the rebels reached the Missionaries in their place of shelter. They were 108 HOPE DEFERUED. told tbat many of their friends were killed, but that Mafi survived, and wished to speak with them. They hastened to do his bidding ; but they soon lost their guide, and, without his aid, they were unable to find the chief. Having spent some time in the search, they gave it up as hopeless. Falling in with a party of armed men, they were stripped of their clothes ; but this misfortune was lessened by their having at hand garments of country cloth, got ready in case of such an emergency. At last they found a hiding- place among some thick trees. In the evening, Shelley and Cooper went in search of food, and happily fell in with some friendly natives, who gave them a bread-fruit and some green bananas ; a gift of great value to the tired and hungry men. A day or two after, we find them hiding in a cave so small that they could not turn in it. But small as it was, it sheltered them from rain then falling. Such is a specimen of their fugitive life. War all around them ; victory sometimes with their friends, sometimes with the rebel party ; the final issue doubtful ; all that they valued a prey ; their brethren slain ; their lives sustained by stray gifts of food, and by water found in holes of the rocks ; — we can scarcely imagine a more troubled existence than theirs. Yet stripped of all earthly good, and daily anticipating some greater calamity, these men rejoiced in the thought of a heavenly inheritance that no heathen could wrest from them ; and the nearer death came, the more were their hearts cheered by the hope of HOPE DEFEERED. 109 soon being with their Father above, whose grace and love now sustained them. Their books, including their Bibles, were gone ; but portions of the holy book were graven on their memory, and they could yet pray. When Sunday came they spent it chiefly in conversation and prayer, holding a conference in the morning on Psalm cxlvi. 5. " Happy is he that hath the Grod of Jacob for his help, whose hope is in the Lord his God ; " and in the afternoon on Isaiah xxvi. 4. " Trust ye in the Lord for ever : for in the Lord Jehovah is everlasting strength." Before the Sabbath day closed, their retreat was discovered. They consulted together, and agreed to go to some of the chiefs whom they had known for- merly, and to place themselves under their protection. They were pretty well received by one or two of their old friends, and at last took I'efuge at Mafanga, a kind of privileged district, having been neutral during the war. On their way there, they passed through a desolate country. The crops had been destroyed; the gardens were now a wilderness ; and along the road were scattered the dead and decaying bodies of men, women, and children. On the 29th, another battle took place. The loyal party were entirely routed, and Tinau Ukalala became master of the country. On the 3rd of June he summoned the chiefs of Hihifo, that he might tell them their fate. The poor prisoners were cruelly insulted ; but at last all were allowed to go in peace, " except Mail and ten others, who received sentence 310 HOPE DEFEEEED. of banisliment to a solitary and unfrequented island near Haabai ; wbich, yielding nothing for their sub- sistence, was much the same as condemning them to utter starvation ; they were immediately put on board a canoe, and sent off amidst the bitterest lamentations of wives, children, and other relatives. We have since heard various accounts of their death," (say the Missionaries) "the most favourable of which was, that after taking them to such a distance from land as to render their return impossible, they were all thrown overboard." Two days after the Missionaries had an oppor- tunity of visiting Ardeo. The chief with whom they were staying, Fakafanua, desired them to go to search for some things, that he heard had been hidden there by the brethren ; and he sent an acquaintance of the murdered Missionaries, Mangunu, and about a dozen other men, on the same expedition. " Though we were no way solicitous for the success of the business upon which we were sent, we hoped, before we returned, to be able to render the last offices of friendship to our deceased brethren, who still lay upon the road, exposed to the insults of all that passed by. We accordingly set forward upon our journey, and soon found Mangunu, who had already searched the place, and made a pretty good booty for himself. On our arrival at Ardeo, we found it a perfect desolation ; the fences were all torn in pieces, the houses either burnt or laid in ruinous heaps, and the fruits mostly HOPE DEFEEEED. Ill destroyed. After taking a short survey of the pre- mises, we were conducted to the place where our brethren lay, which afforded a still more melancholy and distressing scene ; we found brothers Bowell and Gaulton upon the road, very near to each other ; brother Harper lay in the adjoining field about fifty yards nearer home ; they were all so much disfigured, that we could not have known any of them, but for the natives, who had often seen them since their death. Burham was at a considerable distance from them, and being in a kind of ditch, seemingly in such a state that he could not be moved without falling in pieces, we covered him with earth where he lay, and after- wards with the assistance of the natives, digging a grave large enough to contain the brethren, we with some difficulty moved them into it ; and thus buried them, without either cofiin or shroud, not having so much as a change of country cloth for our own use."* A short time after this, the Missionaries were glad to receive from friendly chiefs, several articles that had belonged to their deceased brethren. They found among these, clothes, paper, pens, ink, a watch, a mariner's compass, four razors, with a few other instruments, books, and above all, two Bibles. They were soon again separated from one another, being claimed by several chiefs who were glad of their help in making useful articles. The forge was set to work again, and they received the necessaries of life * Missionary Transactions. Vol. I. ; p. 299. 112 HOPE DEFEEEED. in exchange for their labour and its produce. But they had no assurance of personal safety. Their wor- ship, in particular, seemed to provoke the anger of the natives, who would throw sticks and stones at the house where they met to sing and pray. Mr. Mariner, in his "Account of the Tonga Islands," blames the Missionaries for closing their doors, and shutting the natives out during their hours of worship : but he does not say under what circumstances they had recourse to this measure. We have seen that in the earlier and better days of their mission, they invited the natives to attend at such times. The conduct of the natives was such as often to alarm the Missionaries ; and during Finau's absence at Haabai and A'^avau, when he went there hoping to reduce those Islands to submission to his usurped authority, their lives were often in great danger. One night Mr. Wilkinson heard his own death pro- posed by an inhuman method. A broken cocoa-nut shell, jagged for the purpose, was to be beaten into the crown of his head with a club. All night he lay under the dread of being taken out in the morning to be thus cruelly slain ; but the threat was not fullilled. A short time after this, Messrs. Wilkinson and Beak were shamefully treated by the chief with whom they were staying, Pakafanua. He beat them with a cud- gel, turned tliem out of doors, and stripped Beak of his clothes, all for the sake of a little property that they had gained by hard toil ; consisting of four hundred yams, ten or twelve fowls, cloth, knives, a grindstone, HOPE DEFERRED. 113 and a few other things. After this an Englishman, named Knight, and their old foe, Ambler, took possession of their forge and house, and undertook to carry on their trade. Very hkely they were at the bottom of this mischief. In the midst of their troubles they were affected by the kind thoughtfulness of Veaji, the chief under whose care the murdered Missionaries had resided. He sent for Mr. Wilkinson that he might see the remains of his brethren removed with care to a more suitable resting-place, and he promised to built a Fai- toka over them. In the month of December, news came that Finau Ukalala had reached Haabai on his way back to Tonga, and that he meant certainly to kill some, perhaps all, of the Missionaries. Fresh stories to their disparage- ment were every day spread abroad, every sudden death being attributed to the working of their charms. Nine weary months of suspense and alarm rolled by. There seemed to be no prospect of a speedy close of the war ; for the loyal party, though quieted for the present, were ready to rise again whenever they should have strength for the contest. With them it was death or victory. The Missionaries were wholly in the power of the people, and as one result, were often without food and clothing ; while all hope of doing the work on which they were sent seemed to be at an end. They had busied themselves in repair- ing their small boat, and sometimes they talked of 1 114 HOPE DEFEREED. venturing to sea in it and trj-ing to reach New Hol- laucl ; but the want of suitable provisions for so Jong a voyage deterred them. Better stay with a chance of life at Tonga, than incur so great a risk. While thus shut in, with more of fear than hope, they heard on the evening of the 21st January, 1800, the report of two guns ; and the next day they set out in their canoe and reached an English ship. The captain pitied their circumstances, and kindly offered them a passage to Port Jackson, granting them the use of his own cabin and promoting their comfort in every possible way. On the 24th, they put to sea, and as they came near to the north point of the Island, their old friend Ata, and several others came off with cocoa nuts for the captain. They took an affectionate leave of the Missionaries, Ata shedding tears at parting. Hitherto the joy of deliverance from such great dangers seems to have filled the hearts of the Missionaries ; but now, when the last words were spoken, and the kindliest of the heathen were seen paddling back to the lessening shores of Tonga, thoughts of the past three years ; of their hallowed mission enterprise ; of its disastrous close; and of the thousands whom they were leaving behind them as dark as ever, rushed on their minds with overwhelm- ing force. "Was their any relief for their oppressed spirits ? Any bright spot for their eye to rest on ? Yes ; but it was in the future, not in the past. God's promises to a perishing world, the promises on which they relied at first starting, came to their aid. They HOPE DEFERRED. 115 were sui'e as ever ; and tlie day would jet come when " the name of the Lord Grod of Israel " should be glorified in these " isles of the sea." In the course of a few weeks the Missionaries were landed safely at Port Jackson. Messrs. Shelley and Cooper remained there, with Beak, who had accom- panied them in their escape. The other brethren returned to England. Thus the story of a mission began under singularly favourable auspices, ends in failure and flight. First attempts in a great and good cause are often unsuc- cessful. "We need to learn the lesson of patient and energetic persistence ; one of the lessons given by Elisha to Joash. " And he said unto the King of Israel, smite upon the ground, and he smote thrice and stayed. And the man of God was wroth with him, and said, Thou shouldest have smitten five or six times; then hadst thou smitten Syria till thou hadst consumed it ; whereas now thou shalt smite Syria but thrice." 2 Kings, xiii. 18, 19. " Hast thou been long and often foiled, And vainly striven, vainly toiled For what some gain with ease ? Yet bear up heart, and hope, and will, Nobly resolved to struggle still ; With patience persevere ; Knowing when darkest seems the night. The dawning of morn's glorious light Is swiftly drawing near." The Christians of England can scarcely be com- i2 116 HOPE DErEEEED, mended for leaving tlie Friendly Islands alone from this time for twenty-two long years. Why did they not try again ? Was there no new voice to be heard mingling with the crying needs of the people, and inviting their return ? There was. It came from the graves of brethren whose lives had been " offered upon the sacrifice and service of " the Church's "faith," and who fell in attempting to claim the land for Christ. Yet for nearly a quarter of a century, Christian dust was left to be trampled on by heathen feet ; and the unhappy murderers were permitted to " eat of the fruit of their own way, and to be filled with their own devices." Veeson remained in the Islands one year after his for- mer companions. The civil war continued to rage. The Hihifans sent a message to Ukalala that they " would die rather than be his slaves ; " and rising in a body, during his absence, they set fire to the dwellings of their enemies, and killed all whom they could seize. They raised a fearful trophy of their victory by piHng up large stacks of human bodies, laid transversely upon one another. Einau, bent upon revenge, returned with his warriors, laid a plan by which the principal roads were guarded by his followers, and then, sud- denly alarming the inhabitants, drove them all towards one spot, where they were cruelly massacred, nourish- ing plantations were cut down, and the once fertile island made so desolate that the remaining inhabitants were starved into submission. It was not long before the people of Tonga were HOPE DEFERRED. 117 again ready to resist the usurper, and he found him- self obliged to be contented with the government of the Haabai and Vavau Islands, only making an annual descent on Tonga, in the vain hope of final conquest. All this time there was no king there ; but several petty chiefs contended for the headship, whose feuds added to the distress of the inhabitants. In the year 1806, an event occurred that greatly increased Finau's power of doing harm. This was the capture of the l?ort an Prince, off Lifuka, one of the Haabai islands. As usual, many of the natives were admitted on board this vessel. Something in their conduct alarmed the fears of a Sandwich Islander present, who gave instant warning to the Captain. Unfortunately, that warning was not heeded. The next day, nineteen of the sailors left the ship, con- trary to orders, that they might spend their Sunday in their own fashion, on the island. Meantime, a larare number of natives, armed with clubs and spears, assembled between decks- On the following day, as many as three hundred were received on board. Deaf to all hints from his men, Mr. Brown, the whaling master, went on shore, unarmed, to view the country. Scarcely had he left the ship, when the natives set up a shout and fell upon the crew. A youth, named Mariner, was below; but when, hearing the noise, he came on deck he " saw enough to thrill the stoutest heart. There sat upon the companion a short, squab, naked figure, of about fifty years of age, with a sea- man's jacket, soaked with blood, thrown over one 118 HOPE DEFEEEED. shoulder; on the other rested his iron-wood club, spattered with blood and brains On another part of the deck there lay twenty-two bodies, perfectly naked, and arranged side by side in even order. They were so dreadfully bruised and battered about the head, that only two or three of them could be recognised. At this time a man had just counted them, and was reporting the number to the chief, who sat in the hammock-nettings ; immediately after which they began to throw them overboard."* Mr. Brown, and several of the men who had landed on the Sunday, were also slain. Mariner, and about fourteen other Englishmen, were all that remained. They were made to cut the cables, and work the ship in shore, through a narrow and dangerous passage. The iron work of the vessel was secured by the natives. Eight barrels of gunpowder were brought on shore, with seven of the carronades and four long guns. They then set fire to the ship. Mariner became a great favourite with Einau, and was his constant companion during the four years of his residence in the island. Not long after his cap- ture he was employed, with four other Enghshmen, to assist the chief in his annual attack on Tonga. Erom his narrative I shall now make a few extracts, as nothing can give a better idea of the kind of lessons that our countrymen taught the natives. * Mariner's Tonga, Vol. I. ; p. 45. HOPE DEFERRED. 119 "Mr. Mariner, and tliose of liis companions who were with him at the Island of Lifuka, received orders from the king to prepare for the usual annual attack upon the Island of Tonga, and to get ready four twelve pound carronades. They immediately set to work to mount them upon new carriages with high wheels, made by the native carpenters under their directions ... Mr. Mariner and his companious promised that they and their countrymen (who were dispersed upon other islands) would remain in the front of the battle with their four guns, provided the Tonga people would agree to stand fast and support them. ... In the meantime, the Englishmen employed themselves in collecting the shot which the natives had brought from on board, but which they had thrown aside, not being able to shape them for any common purpose. They also cut up a quantity of sheet lead, and made it up in rolls to be used as shot. During this time every preparation was making by the natives for the approaching war : they repaired the sails of their canoes, coUected their arrows, spears, and clubs ; and the women employed themselves in packing up bales of native cloth, mats, &c." After calling at one or two islands, they sailed from Nomuka " with aU the forces of the confederate islands, amounting in all to about one hundred and seventy canoes, direct for the Island of Tonga. . . Finau being arrived with the whole of his fleet oft" Nukualofa, and having with him, besides Mr. Mari- ner, fifteen other Englishmen, eight of whom were 120 HOPE DEFEEEED. armed with muskets, he proceeded to land his troops under cover of a fire of musketry, which speedily drove ahnost all the enemy, who had sallied forth, back into the garrison. The first fire killed three, and wounded several ; and a repetition of it threw them into such dismay, that in five minutes only forty of the bravest remained to molest them ; and these began to retire as the forces of Finau increased on the beach. In the meanwhile the carronades were dismounted from their carriages, slimg on poles, and conveyed over a shallow reef to the shore. The whole army being landed, and the guns again mounted, the latter were drawn up before the garrison, and a regular fire was commenced. Finau took his station on the reef, seated in an English chair, for his chiefs would not allow him to expose his person on shore. The fire of the carronades was kept up for about an hour. . . . . It was then resolved to set fire to the place ; for which purpose a number of torches being prepared and lighted, an attack was made upon the outer fencing ; it was fo\md, however, but weakly defended, and was soon taken: for the door-posts being shot away, an easy entrance was obtained. A considerable portion of the inner fencing was now found undefended, and towards this place a party rushed with lighted torches, whilst the enemy were kept in play elsewhere : the conflagration spread rapidly on every side ; and as the besieged endeavoured to make their escape, they were clubbed by a party of the besiegers, stationed at the back of the fort for HOPE DEFEREED. 121 that purpose. During thia time tlie guns kept up a regular fire with blank cartridges, merely to intimidate the enemy. The conquerors, club in band, entered the place in several quarters, and slew all they met, men, women, and children. The scene was truly horrible. The war-wlioop shouted by the combatants the heart-rending screams of the women and children the groans of the wounded ; the number of the dead and the fierceness of the conflagration, formed a pic- ture almost too distracting and awful for the mind to contemplate. Some, with a kind of sullen resigna- tion, ofiered no resistance, but waited for the hand of fate to dispatch them, no matter in what mode : others that were already lying on the ground wounded, were struck with spears, and beaten about with clubs by boys, who followed the expedition to be trained to the horrors of war, and who dehghted in the opportunity of gratify- ing their ferocious and cruel disposition. Every house that was set on fire was plundered of its contents. . . . . In a few hours the fortress of Nukualofa, which had obstinately and bravely defended every attack for eleven years, or more, was thus completely destroyed. AVhen Finau arrived upon the place, and saw several canoes which had been hauled up in the garrison, shattered to pieces by shot, and discovered a number of legs and arms lying around, and about three hundred and fifty bodies stretched upon the ground, he expressed his wonder and astonishment at the dreadful effect of the guns. He thanked his men for their bravery, and ]\Ii'. Mariner and his companions, 122 HOPE DErEEllED. in particular, for the great assistance rendered by them." This attack with fire-arms upon men who had only clubs, and spears, and arrows for defence, cannot be called a fight. It was a massacre. Some of the prisoners who were taken, gave a curious description of the effect of the guns. They said that when a ball entered a house, ," it did not proceed straight forward, but went all round the place, seeking for some one to kill ; it then passed out of the house, and entered another, still in search of food for its vengeance." Sometime after this, an old Vavau warrior declared his utter contempt for the guns, having never seen them at work. It is customary for every professed warrior before he goes to battle to give himself tbe name of some particular person whom he means to single out and fight. This warrior, however, instead of assuming the name of one of the enemy, proudly called himself Tana Fanua, a great gun, declaring that he w^ould run boldly up to a camion, and throw his spear into the mouth of it. He had soon an opportunity of fulfilling his threat, much to the surprise of the Englishmen who were with his enemies. Tlie circumstance is thus named in "Mari- ner's Tonga." " One of the advanced party of the enemy came up to within fifteen or sixteen yards of the carronade of which Mariner had the charge, and there stood brandishing his spear in a threatening attitude. Mr. Mariner immediately fired the gun at HOPE DEFEBEED. 123 him, but the moment the match was applied, the niau fell on his face, and the shot missed him : the moment after he sprung up again and advanced forward to within ten paces of the gun, dancing and making sundry war- like gesticulations ; he then brandished and threw his spear, intending it to enter the gun, but it struck against the muzzle. Mr. ]\Iariner, astonished at the boldness and presumption of this warrior, was deter- mined to punish him for his rashness, and accordingly levelled his musket: but just as he was pulling the trigger, an arrow struck the barrel of the piece and caused him to miss his aim. The warrior then shouted aloud, and retiu-ned with all speed to the fortress." After the siege of Nukualofa, Finau returned to Haabai, contrary to Mr. Mariner's advice, who wished him to follow up the blow and completely subdue Tonga. He does not seem ever to have renewed his attack. The remaining years of his life were occu- pied chiefly in endeavours to reduce the Yavau Islands to submission : for they had risen against him, and their resistance to his tyranny was energetic. He died before Mr. Mariner left the Islands, and was succeeded by his son, a man of a milder mood. Tonga remained in an unsettled state for some years. At last Tubou-malohi, brother of the mur- dered king, was chosen in his place, the government being thus restored to the rightful family. His name signifies strong, or powerful. He was the uncle of the present King George. He resigned his ofiice to 124 HOPE DEFEEEED. his brother, Tubou-toa, George's father, in the year 1812. After the death of Tubou-toa, in 1820, there was no king for seven years, or more. In 1827, Josiah Tubou was elected king ; George being at the same time head chief or king of Haabai, and Finau- fiji, chief of Vavau. In 1845, George Tubou was chosen as the successor of Josiah, his father's uncle. He was placed on the throne of his fathers with great ceremony, and now reigns over the whole of the Friendly Islands. ^\m^is[\[ VMh RELIGION, SOCIAL STATE, GOVERNMENT, AND LANGUAGE OF TONGA. E have come to a break in the missiou his- tory of these islands, and perhaps it may be as well to devote this chapter to somewhat fuller details than those already given respect- ing the rehgion, government, and social state of the people, before they embraced Christianity. The mythology of the heathen Tonguese is more than commonly obscure. Different stories are told by different parties, and it is hard to come at truth. The particulars that follow have been obtained chiefly in conversation with the Eev. John Thomas, who is con- sidered an authority on these subjects. The gods of Tonga were many. It would be easy to number seventy, with distinct names and attri- butes. They were not all the objects of worship. There were two especially, whom the people regarded as uncreated beings, living in the sky. These they did not worship, though they held them in profound reverence. Tlieir names were thought too sacred for 126 EELiaiON, SOCIAL STATE, GOVEENMENT, utterance, and indeed only a few persons of the high- est rank knew what their names were. There was an order of created gods of diflferent ranks. Among these were the three Mauis ; Maui Motua, Maui Atalonga, and Maui Kijikiji, (pronounced Kitzikitzi). These were related to each other, father, son, and nephew ; or as others say, father, son, and grandson. They live under the earth. There were also three Tangaloas, living in the sky ; and one Hikuleo, whose residence was in Bulotu, or the invisible world. The Mauis were human beings of extraordinary size and strength. The Tangaloas and Hikuleo were spiritual creatures. The people never presented offer- ings to the Mauis, or the Tangaloas, and rarely to Hikuleo. Bulotu was peopled with the spirits of departed chiefs and great persons of both sexes ; and it was to these chiefly that worship was paid and that sacrifices were offered. These spirits in Bulotu were supposed to act as intercessors with the superior gods, who were too highly exalted to be approached by men except in this way. The spirits were in the habit of re-visiting earth. They would come in birds, or in fish as their shrines. The tropic-bird, king-fisher, aod sea-gull, the sea-eel, shark, whale and many other animals were considered sacred, because they were favourite shrines of these spirit-gods. The heathen never killed any of these creatures ; and if, in sailing, they chanced to find them- AKD LANGUAGE OF TONGA. 127 selves in the neighbourhood of a whale, they would offer scented oil, or kava to him. To some among the natives the cuttle-fish and the lizard were gods ; while others would lay offerings at the foot of certain trees, with the same idea of their being inhabited by spirits. A rainbow or a shooting star would also command worship. I have said that the people in their heathen state, would not venture out after night-fall. It was this notion of the presence of invisible beings that kept them at home during the dark hours. They said the day was for them, the night for their gods. After the sun went down, the ground was too sacred for them to stroll over it ; nor would they go to work in the morning till the sim was up. There were certain priests and priestesses into whom the spirits entered ; and houses were built from which these sacred persons might utter their oracles. "When a great blessing was desired, or a serious evil deprecated ; if they wished to have health, or children, or success in voyaging, or in war, they would go to the burying grounds of their great chiefs, clean them up thoroughly, sprinkle the floor with sand, and lay down their offerings. Such houses were once numerous. Five stood in Nukualofa alone. In case of the sickness of one whose cure was ear- nestly desired, they used to proceed on this wise : — They would approach the god's house with every sign of deep sorrow, their dress consisting of old mats, rough 128 EELIGION, SOCIAL STATE, GOTERNMEXT, and torn, and a circlet of green leaves round their neck, expressive of humility. They brought offer- ings of natural produce, and sometimes their young children too ; the first joint of whose little finger they proceeded to cut ofi". If that had been already pre- sented, they cut oft' the second joint, and then the third ; or if all the joints had been sacrificed on one hand they began vs'ith the other ; and then they held up the bleeding hands in hope of softening an angry god. This done, they bowed their heads to the ground, weeping freely, but in silence. The priest or priestess, (the god's shrine remember) received the offerings, heard the case and gave the answer. But there was another person present, the friend of the god, who addressed the priest in behalf of the offerers. He spoke of them as a company of rebels, who had be- haved very badly and who deserved all their sufferings ; he exculpated the god, maintaining that he had acted quite properly in punishing them : but then he pro- ceeded to say how very sorry the people were for their bad conduct, and what proof they had brought of their true mourning. The Eeaa, as the priest was called, was sometimes sullen and gave no answer. Sometimes he would ask, " Do you think that I am going to take any notice of such paltry things as you have brought ?" The poor people on hearing this, would go off to fetch more costly gifts, and sometimes, not finding help from the first being to whom they applied, they would visit five or six of their gods in succession. When these second- A>'D LA^'GUAGE OF TO>'GA. 129 ary gods were pleased, it was imagined that they pleaded with the venerable deities in Bulotu, who dispensed the benefit. Tor these spirit-gods, the Tonguese did not enter- tain sentiments of love, or of true reverence. The name by which they called them expressed a mixed emotion of fear and contempt. It answers nearly to our term hobgoblin. Once a year there was a general religious gather- ing in honour of the god Hikuleo. It was called an Inaji. The sacred conch shell was blown, and a person in each district had to go along very leisurely, holding a walking-stick in his hand, and crying with a slow and solemn voice, " Nofe-Tci-lalo, tabu-gane, Nofe-Tci-lalo, tabu-gane,^^ " All sit down, cease from labour." The road was then cleared. People from every part went towards the meeting-place at Mua, all chant- ing as they went, None might walk in a contrary direction ; none might stand in the way. The object of this gathering was to secure fruitful crops. It took place just before the planting season. The people carried young yams fastened to long poles and offered them to Hikuleo, or rather to the Tui-tonga, the high priest of the god, who represented him. At Mua, acts of worship were performed, and when these were over the people amused themselves with a variety of sports. Wrestling, boxing, dancing, and club fighting were their chief pastimes. The Inaji lasted 130 EELiaiON, SOCIAL STATE, GOVEENMEKT, for a fortnight. During that time, all common busi- ness was laid aside, so that even the corpses of any who might die were left unburied. It did occasion- ally happen, in times of confusion and disorder, that the office of Tui-tonga was vacant. It that case his dress of native cloth, called Vakai, was brought and placed on the spot where he should have sat, and the people bowed down before that dress as though he were actually wearing it. Valuable gifts too were presented to this " shadow of a shade." A great many strange stories were told by the natives respecting Bulotu and their gods. To us they seem at first sight only foolish. But we do find here and there a slight trace of knowledge derived from a higher source than man's own " many inven- tions ; " knowledge that the hand of heathenism has never entirely blotted out from man's memory, though its lines have become fainter, age by age, since he first began to walk frowardly in the way of his own heart. Cannot we see in the friend of the god who yet pleads for sinning man, a broken shadow of the " One Mediator between God and man, the Man Christ Jesus ? " The souls of chiefs were all supposed to go straight to Bulotu after the death of the body. Of the fate of the common people there was no certainty. Tliey were scarcely thought to have souls. There is an interesting passage in the "Authentic Narrative," confirming these statements. AND LAN &U AGE OF TON&A. 131 " There were times, when ideas were thrown out by the natives, respecting the immortality of the soiil, which much surprised and abashed me. One day they were conversing about a person that was lately dead ; they said to each other, ' He goes to the island through the sky.' Wishing to know their sentiments upon this subject, I pretended ignorance and unbelief. ' How can he be," said I, ' in that place, when he is dead, and his body is here ? Did you not bury him some moons ago ? ' But all they answered was, ' But he is still alive.' And one, endeavouring to make me understand what he meant, took hold of my hand, and squeezing it, said, ' This will die, but the life that is within you will never die ;' with his other hand pointing to my heart. This sentiment, expressed on sucb an occasion, so unexpectedly, with such animation, and by a young man with whom I was particularly intimate, deeply impressed me." Veeson afterwards heard the chiefs speak much of Bulotu. " Into this region, however, they believed none were admitted but themselves. The Tuas, or lower class, having no hope of sharing such bliss, seldom specu- late upon a futurity, which to them appears a subject lost in shadows, clouds, and darkness." The higher orders spoke of them as " low, common people, who eat earth," or "insects;" and thought that they ran no risk if they killed them when it suited their purpose. On one occasion a woman having offended a chief, he ordered her to be cut in k2 132 EELIGION", SOCIAL STATE, GOTEENMENT, pieces lengthwise. By the way, you will remember that this mode of punishment was common in Eastern countries, and that Scripture contains references to it. See Dan. ii. 5 ; iii. 29. Matt. xxiv. 51. Luke xii. 46 ; and Dr. A. Clarke's Commentary on Gen. xv. 9, 10. Bulotu was said to lie in a westerly direction. It was approached either through the earth, or by the sea. Within its sphere enjoyments abounded. The inhabitants had health without sickness, plenty with- out scarcity, life without death. Yet in spite of these blessings, Bulotu had few attractions for the heathen Tonguese. None said, " It is better to depart." On one occasion, some of the people of Tonga are said to have filled a canoe and taken a trip to Bulotu, for the purpose of trying their skill in some of their country's games, and thinking to rival, if not surpass, the spirit-tenants of the other world. Their hope was vain. They did indeed take a part in many amuse- ments ; but the spirits were far too strong for them. At length some of the mightiest spirits laid hold of the trunk of a Yi-apple tree, and shook it so lustily that the apples flew off in all directions. Some went straight to Tonga ; some to the Navigators' Islands ; and some all the way to England, or as they call it, Papalangi. The god Hikuleo was in the habit of carrying oif the first-born sons of chiefs and other great men in order to people Bulotu. He went such lengths in this system of abduction that the men on earth grew very uneasy. Their ranks became thinner and thinner. AND LANGUAGE OF TONGA. 133 How was all this to end ? At last the other gods were moved to compassion. Tangaloa and Maui seized hold of Hikuleo. They passed a strong chain round his waist and between his legs, and then taking the two ends of the chain they fastened one end to the sky and the other to the earth. Even this confine- ment did not hinder Hikuleo from making many attempts to seize upon first-born sons ; but whenever he approached within a short distance of his prey he was pulled in one or the other of two contrary directions. Hikuleo has a very long and intelligent tail. lu all the journeys made by the body of the god, the long tail remains in Bulotu watching. He is thus aware of what goes on in more places than one. Is not here a distant hint of that Omnipresence which makes the true and living God to be so much feared by His enemies, so fuUy trusted by His own people ? The Tonguese had curious notions of the origin of the earth and the dwellers in it. They thought that slime and sea-weed gave bii'th to rock. From the rock thus produced sprang many gods of various natures ; among others, the serpent and the wood- pigeon. The low islands were said to have been fished up from the sea by Maui ; the high islands thrown down from the sky by Hikuleo. They said that after the earth was fished up and levelled, the god reported his proceedings to the sky. Soil was then sent down to cover the bare rock. Seed was next given, and there sprang up a beautiful, broad-leaved, creeping 134 RELIGION, SOCIAL STATE, GOTEENMENT, plant. This creeper spread rapidly and soon the land was covered ^vith its green leaves and bright flowers. The god then pulled up a part of this plant and left it on the sea-beach. There it lay till it withered and rotted. From its decayed substance a maggot was born. Kiji-kiji came again to earth in the form of a sea-lark, and with a stroke of his beak divided the maggot into two parts. From these, two men sprang into being. But there was a small piece of the maggot sticking to Kijikiji's beak that, unnoticed by him, fell at a short distance. This also became a man, and he was called Momo. A canoe from Bulotu brought wives for the two men first-formed, and their children became great chiefs. Does this tradition of the superiority of the first women to their earth-born lords account for the unusual respect shown to women generally by the Friendly Islanders ? Or, does this respect account for the tradition ? Momo, of whose existence Kijikiji thought so little, grew up into a wonderful man ; indeed he was a kind of demigod. He never became old, and outlived many generations. Now, when any thing is spoken of as having happened long since, the people will say, " It happened in the time of Momo." After the peopleing of the earth it was long before fire was known. Of course no food could be cooked. This want was at last supplied in the following way. Maui Atalouga and Maui Kijikiji lived at Koloa in Hafaa. Every morning Mai;i Atalonga left his home AND LANGUAGE OF TONGA. 135 to visit Bulotu ; every afternoon he returned bringing with him cooked food. He never took Kijikiji with him, nor did he allow his son to know the mode by which he made the journey ; for Kijikiji was young, full of fun, and fond of practical jokes. Kijikiji's curiosity was awakened however, and he determined to find out his father's path and to follow him to Bulotu. He traced him to the mouth of a cave, over which grew a large reed bush, so as to hide it from the observation of passers by. But young Maui made a prying search, found the entrance, and descended. Arrived at Bulotu, he saw his father at work with his back towards him ; he was busy with a plot of ground that he kept under cultivation. Toung Maui plucked a fruit from the nonu-tree, (this fruit is somewhat larger than an apple) bit a piece off, and in his mischievous way, threw the remainder at his father. The father picked it up, saw the marks of his son's teeth, turned and said, " what brings you here ? Mind what you are doing ? This Bulotu is a dreadful place." He then proceeded to warn him against the dangers attending bad conduct. Maui set Kijikiji to help him in clearing a piece of ground, and above all, he begged him not to look behind him. Instead of minding his father's advice, Kijikiji did his work very badly. He would pull up a few weeds and then look behind him. All the morn- ing it was weed and look round, weed and look round, so that very little good was done. The weeds grew apace, much faster than father and son could pull up. Afternoon came, and Maui Atalonga wished to cook 136 EELIGION, SOCIAL STATE, GOVERNMENT, his food, " Go," said he to his son, "and get a little fire." This was just what Kijikiji wanted. "Where shall I go ?" " To the Modua." Off he went, and found the oldest Maui lying on a mat by the fire-side for warmth. His fire was a large iron-wood tree, heated at one end. Toung Maixi appeared. The old man was much surprised at the intrusion, but did not know his grandson. " What do you want ?" he asked. "Some fire." "Take some," Toung Maui put a little into a cocoa-nut shell and carried it a short way. But his love of mischief springing up, he blew it out, and went back to the old man with an empty shell. The same questions and answers followed. Again young Maui obtained the precious gift, and again he made away with it. A third time he appeared before his grandfather. The old man was nettled. " Take the whole of it," said he. Young Maui, without more ado, took up the immense iron-wood tree and walked off" with it. Now the old man knew him to be some- thing more than mortal, and shouted after him, " Helo, he, he, Ke-ta-fai,^' a challenge to wrestle. Quite ready for this also, the youth turned. They closed and wrestled. Old Maui seized his opponent by the dress that was tightly girded round his waist, swung him round, his feet clearing the ground, and dashed him towards earth. Kijikiji, catlike, lighted on his feet. It was now his turn ; and seizing his grandfather in the same way, he swung him round, flung hijn on the ground, and broke every bone in his body. Old Maui has been in a decrepid state ever since. He lies, feeble and sleepy, AND LANGUAGE OF TONGA. 137 iinderneath the earth. When an earthquake threatens, the Tonguese shout the war-whoop in order to awaken old Maui, whom they suppose to be turning round. They fear lest he should get up, and in rising, over- turn the world. On the return of Kijikiji to his father, he was asked what had detained him so long. The youth was silent ; and as he refused to answer any questions about the old man, Maui-Atalonga suspected that something was wrong. He went to see, found old Maui bruised and disabled, and hastened back to punish his son. The son ran off, and the father chased him vigorously, but without success. Evening came on, and the two prepared to return to earth. Maui cautioned his son against taking any fire with him ; but again the sober spirit of the elder was no match for the tricksiness of the younger god. He wrapped up a little fire in the end of the long garment that he wore, and trailed it after him. The father went on first. As he was nearing the summit he began to sniff. " I smell fire," said he. Young Maui was close behind. He hurried on, hastily drew up his sash, and scattered its con- tents all around. The neighbouring trees were soon on fire, and for a time the earth seemed to be in great peril. However the evil was soon checked, while the good remained. A lasting benefit was conferred on the islanders who have, ever since, been able to light a fire, and cook their food. There is something in this legend of the rude Tonguese that reminds one of the Prometheus of the classic Greeks. 138 EELIGIOH", SOCIAL STATE, GOVEEKMENT, Coming from the region of fancy to the sober world of fact, I may here name the way in which fire is actually obtained when needed by the Friendly Islanders. We are told that it is done " by rubbing two sticks together." Perhaps you may think as I used to do, that all that is required is to pick up any two sticks that one may happen to meet with, and to rub tiU they begin to burn. Not exactly so. The natives choose hard wood. They take one piece and cut a short groove in it ; they then take a second piece and work it up and down the groove, always pushing it to the end. A little fine dust is soon rubbed off ; and by-and-by this dust at the end of the groove begins to smoke ; and where there is smoke, according to our English proverb, we expect to find fire. The people in their heathen state not only had a dread of spirits, but often went to them for help. " They used divinations." If a man were robbed of his property, or otherwise ill-used by another, he would go to those who knew the mind of the spirits, and state his wrong. And, strange as it may seem, the wrong-doer either brought back the stolen pro- perty, or died in the course of a short time. Perhaps the strength of fear is sufficient to account for death. They were very superstitous. Plights of birds across their path would alarm them. Sneezing was noticed as a bad omen. Dreams were much observed, as they imagined that the spirits often spoke to them thus. All the shrines of gods were tahu, forbidden. A AND LANGrAGE OF TONGA. 139 piece of land in Tonga was left uncultivated for the sake of the wild pigeon. It was tahu to the natives : and these birds wei-e its undisturbed tenants. Things belonging to the chiefs were often forbidden to the common people, and some sign of its being tahu was placed upon it. Thus a chief wishing to preserve the fruit of a certain tree, would hang up in its branches a piece of white cloth. It was then tahu to the peo- ple, none of whom dare touch it. Several distinct orders of people are recognised in the Friendly Islands. The common people are called Tuas. Above them rank the Ilatahulis. Their name is taken from two words meaning face and govern. They represent the king, and fill offices of trust, as heads of villages. Next come the Mtoas, occupying an inter- mediate place between the Matabulis and the chiefs. They may be called gentlemen, and are companions of the chiefs, associating freely with them, and helping them with advice when consulted. The Eihes, or chiefs, are a large class, differing from one another in degree of dignity. The term " Eike " answers well to our term " Lord," and is so used in Scripture transla- tions. It was at one time only applied to the royal family ; but after a while all the great chiefs were honoured with this title, and now it is often used to masters of canoes and other vessels. Like our "Esquire" it has become a term of compliment. Prom among the chiefs are chosen governors of districts, or of groups of islands. One is sent out as head governor, 140 EELIGION, SOCIAL STATE, GOVEENMEKT, and others are around him to lighten his toih They have also the charge of expeditions. The chiefs are distinguished by the comeliness of their persons, and by an air of superiority ; so that it is not very easy to mistake a Tonguese aristocrat. This superiority may be accounted for in part by the careful manner in which the children of chiefs are brought up. They are always well fed, and nicely clothed ; and, like wild flowers planted in a garden, they soon improve in size and beauty. There is a royal family among the chiefs, and the king must be chosen from its members. Eoyalty is not hereditary. The king's son, if a very promising person, may be chosen as his successor : but all the male members of the royal family are eligible ; and very often the king's brother, or nephew, is preferred to his son. A very young person, or a foolish person, stands no chance of election. They wish their king to be the father and friend of his people ; and for this they need a man of some sense and experience. In Tonga, if war is declared, the king must declare it : if peace is made, the king is the maker of it. There used to be in Tonga a lower order of people than any that I have named, — Bohulas, or slaves. They had been either taken in war, or presented by one chief to another. This was a frequent mode of punishing offenders. Their own chief, when greatly displeased, would send them away to be the slaves of another. There was one family, the servants of a great chief, the members of which were always liable to be AND LANGUAGE OF TONGA, 141 offered in sacrifice. "Was a human sacrifice needed, this devoted family knew that one among their number must soon bleed and die, and the only question was upon which the stroke would fall. To that family the message of the gospel must have been good tidings indeed ! Slavery in Tonga is at an end. George, the present King of Tonga, heard what England had done for her West Indian slaves, and calling his own together, he gave them their freedom. Some begged to remain with him, and are now his willing and active servants, glad to stay, though, free to go. The word " Bobula" is still used as an expression of contempt. In their heathen state the chiefs did nothing but amuse themselves. It was a pleasant pastime to go out in their canoes to fish, and at home they had many games to assist them in filling up the hours of the long day. One game was called Z,afa. A mat was spread before them and some seeds placed upon it. To strike these seeds from one to another formed a sufiicient entertainment for their vacant minds . There was a little more ingenuity and excitement in another of their sports. To take the wild-pigeon, Hea-luhe, they made a large cage and covered it with leaves and small branches ; then creeping inside they set a decoy-bird on the top of the cage to call others down. AVhen the pigeons came at his bidding they were suddenly seized by the lier-in-wait. Marriages in Tonga are more frequently the result 142 EELIGION, SOCIAL STATE, GOVEENMENT, of arrangements made by friends than the choice of the young people themselves. Betrothals are common in early life. The parents consult together and when the marriage is agreed upon the parents of the young man take presents to the intended bride. Visits are ex- changed ; food is eaten, and kava drunk. In due time the young woman is taken to her future home, and from that day preparations are begun for the bridal feast, which does not take place tiU eight months have gone by. It sometimes happens that the parties do not like each other ; they separate, and the feast is never given. But such a case does not often occur. The preparations for a grand wedding are very exten- sive. "Whole fields of yams are set apart, and number- less articles of native manufacture, cloth, baskets, &c., are provided. Sometimes 4,000 or 5,000 will meet and feast together on such an occasion. Tou may imagine how many friendly visits are exchanged, and how busy the Tonguese cooks are. Children are much desired and greatly prized. In- fanticide, so common in the Society Islands, was not known in Tonga, even in her worst days. On the cont^rary, a large family was always a subject of rejoicing. The natives show their love to their children by tending them carefully. The first food of infants after their weaning is the kernel of very young cocoa- nuts. On this the Tongan babies live and thrive. They are not squeezed out of shape with tight bandages. Their parents dress them in scanty clothing. They ' are kept very clean by frequent bathing. Cleanliness AND LANGUAGE OF TONGA. 143 seems to be a point of anxiety with the parents, and to secure it they are in the habit of shaving off much of an infant's hair, and anointing the head with a kind of clay, moistened and mixed, till it becomes quite soft. It is allowed to lie for a short time on the head, and then gently washed off. Much time is spent by the natives in cleaning and dressing their own hair. Oil is in constant use. They make it from the cocoa-nut, and sweeten it with pleasant scents of flowers, and fruits, and sandal- wood. This is applied freely to their heads and persons. Some of the young men, Tongan exquisites, use it with more profusion than good sense. They have not yet learnt that admirable lesson, " To overdo is to undo." To give you an idea of the various kinds of native dress, I will borrow a passage from the " Authentic Narrative." " The dress principally consisted of a piece of cloth, several yards in extent, wrapped round the body, and fastened by a peculiar kind of knot, below the bosom, whence it hung down loose below the knee. This dress, by being tied close with a belt, was sufliciently long to throw the upper part on the shoulders. But however this was done at other times, it was always thrown oiF the shoulders whenever a chief came in sight. A person who should neglect this would be instantly struck to the ground, as guilty of the greatest disrespect. This full dress, however, was too costly for the generality to procure, nor do the chiefs always wear it. The general dress 144 EELIGIOK, SOCIAL STATE, GOVEENMEXT, is made of the Gee leaves, which spring up from a large root and are very broad and strong. These are shredded fine : and being thickly entwined in a belt of the same kind, and fastened round the waist, they hang down to the mid-thigh like a full fringe. On festive occasions this is a very common dress with the women as well as the men, especially in their public dances, when encircling strings of flowers are the only addition to this di'ess. There are none but can obtain this dress. The inferior classes, however, often wear only the maro, which is a belt about four or five inches broad, crossed and fastened round the waist. And, indeed, when they are employed in fishing, or any other active business, or when they go to war, this covering generally composes the whole of their dress." There are a few official titles, Tui-tonga, Tui-kano- kuholu, Tamaha, &c., that always used to puzzle me when I met with them in the narratives of English visitors to the islands. I shall try to make them plain to you. It appears that in former times the whole control in civil and religious matters was in the hands of one person. He was called the Tui, or king of Tonga. But he was as much a priest as a king. Thus things continued for many years. But at last one of the Tui-tongas found his double oifice more than he coiild well sustain. So keeping the priestly duties and honours in his own hands, he placed the civil govern- AND LANGUAGE OF TONGA. 145 ment in the liands of his brother, who became Tui- Jcanoleubolu, or King of all the Islands. The interests of the Tui-tonga have ever since been cared for by the Tui-kanokubolu. He is watched over so well that he has no choice in anything ; all his business is to take the pleasures provided for him. So he eats, and sleeps, and enjoys himself as well as a man can who is so lazy, and who never has the stimulus of contradiction. The Tui-tonga must marry the daughter of the Tui-kano- kubolu ; and that young lady must be handed to him by her father. She is usually taken away again when she has become the mother of one or two children ; being considered too great a lady to be subjected to the cares of a large family. If she have a son, he becomes the next Tui-tonga. He is, you will observe, the grandson of the reigning king ; but he is called his sacred son, Foha-tabu. Her daughter, if she have one, is called the Tui-tonga Fejine, the lady Tui-tonga. Her dignity is very great. She is treated as a kind of divinity. Hei; rank is too high to allow of her uniting lierself in marriage with any mortal : but it is not thought wrong or degrading for her to have a family, and in case of the birth of a daughter the child becomes the Tamaha. This lady rises higher than her mother in rank, and is nearer the gods. Every one approaches her with gifts and homage. Her grand- father will bring his offerings and sit down before her, with all humility, like any of the common people. Sick people come to her for cure. Shortly after Mr. Thomas's arrival at Tonga, he began to dispense L 146 EELIGION, SOCIAL STATE, G0VE3lNME^•T, medicines to those "nho needed them, and the fame of his success reached the Tamaha. One day a sick person was brought to her. " Why do you bring him to me r " she said ; " Take him to Mr. Thomas." Mr. Thomas was sent for, and explained that though he gave the medicine, Grod gave the cure ; and that it was his practice to pray for a blessing upon the means he used for the recovery of the sick. The Tamaha did not object ; but some of her attendants thought it would be an infringement upon her dignity to allow prayer to be made to another in her presence. The man was taken to a short distance, and then prayer was offered and medicine given. You will feel glad to hear that the man recovered speedily. This Tamaha became a true Christian. She died in 1852, after a long life of more than eighty years. She well remembered Captain Cook's visit — the starting point in Tonguese chronology. No one has been appointed to succeed her. From what has been said you will not fail to per- ceive that as Christianity prevails, these heathen titles must drop. The present Tui-tonga, long a resolute heathen, and now a Roman Catholic, is likely to be the last man who will hold that office. King George has no daughter to give ; but had he many he would not think of handing one of them over to the Tui-tonga. Besides the uselessness of the office is now generally acknowledged. The language of the chain of islands known as AND LANGUAGE OF TONGA. 147 Polynesia Pi'oper, extending from the Friendly Islands in the South, to the Sandwich Islands in the North Pacific, is radically the same. Many dialects are spoken : but these are very similar in structure and idiom. The language of the Friendly Islands is one branch of this fruitful parent stock. Its leading characteristics are softness and harmony ; but it is not deficient in fullness and force. Vowel sounds pre- dominate ; indeed every word and every syllable in the language ends in a vowel. Double consonants never occur. This, of course, renders the language sweet and flowing ; but, when foreign words are intro- duced, which is frequently the case, they have to be so much altered that it is often difficult to recognise them. The names of some of the Missionaries, if written according to the native mode of spelling, would be a complete puzzle to their friends at home. Mr. "Waterhouse, for instance, they call UateJiousi. One of the Missionaries, in learning the language, came to a new and hard word, and asked its meaning of a native. " AVhy, don't you know your own lan- guage ? " said the man. It was an English word rendered unintelligible by the introduction of vowels. The Tonguese alphabet consists of seventeen letters. In arranging the alphabet, the vowels are always placed first. The sounds of the letters are as under : — a, sounded as in father. e, sounded as a in dai/. l2 148 EELiaiON, SOCIAL STATE, GOVERNMENT, i. sounded as i in machine. 0, „ in mole. ^h 5> 00 in cool. b, ,, ha in hark. f, 5J > in father. g, ]) gn in signal, divided thus, si-gual. h, )> ha in hand. J. J5 ch in cheese. k, )J Jca in kalendar, and sometimes almost like the hard g. 1, „ la in lard. m, „ ma in mark. n, )> na in nag. s, )> sa in sand. t, )) ta in tar. V, va in varnish. There are slight variations of sound, snch as are fully known only to those who learn the language. Tou will observe that there is no p in the language. The h sound is something between that of h and p, sometimes approaching more nearly to the one and sometimes to the other sound. Thus we see the name of the centre group of Islands sometimes spelt Haapai and sometimes Haabai. If you make yourself fami- liar with the Tougan alphabet as given above, you will not find much difficulty in pronuncing correctly the many Tonguese names that occur in these pages. It will, I think, enable you to form some idea of the structure of the language, to give the Lord's prayer, with as literal a translation as can be made. It is not possible to render into English, all the Tonguese particles. For this prayer and its translation, and for the substance of the foregoing remarks on tlie Ian- AND LANGUAGE OF TONGA. 149 guage, I am indebted to the Eev. George Kevern, for eight years a Missionary in the Islands. Ko e mail tamai oku i he lagi. Ive tabiiha Our Fatlier (loMcli) art in the heaven. Be Messed ho huafa. Ke hoko mai hoo bule. Ke fai thy name. Let come thy reign. Be done ho finagalo i mamani o hage i he lagi thy will in earth even as in the heaven. Ke foaki mai he aho ni haa mau mea kai. Be given the day this our food. Bea fakamolemole e mau agahala o hage ko e mau And forgive our sins even as we fakamolemolea akiuautolu kuo fai agahala kiate forgive them (loho) commit sin against kimautolu. Bea oua naa tuku akimautolu ki us. And do not deliver us to he ahiahi, kae fakamoui akimautolu mei he the temptation hut save us from the kovi : He oku oou ae bule, moe malohi moe naunau, evil : For is thine the reign, a7id power, and glory, o taegata bea taegata. Emeni. for ever and ever. Amen. " Ko e at the commencement of the Lord's prayer is construed with the following word mau, which is a pronoun of the first person plural ; e is a particle used as a sign of the possessive case ; ho, an idiomatic prefix used at the commencement of a sentence in this connection. Koe, as one word, is either the 150 BELIGIOK, SOCIAL STATE, GOTEENMENT, definite article, or a pronoun of the second person singular, according to its relation to other words pre- ceding or following." The Tonguese in their native state, might be called a polite people ; that is, they were observant of many- kinds of etiquette. If two friends met in the public road, they would accost one another ; " Whence comest thou ? Whither art thou going ?" or, more slightly, " My love to you." Should a visitor enter a house during a repast, etiquette requires that a portion be handed to the stranger ; and if other visitors should follow, the first would dinde his small piece into still smaller portions, and hand them to the new-comers. Were this rule neglected, it woidd be called, kai vale, or foolish eating. If one in a family were to receive a nice present of food and eat it alone, without telling the rest, it would be called Jcai ho, or, eating in the dark. Chiefs alone may use a mosquito brush. The common people must rid themselves of their annoyers by a small branch of a tree. But the most striking instance of the national politeness occurs in their use of language. The words used when the chiefs of the highest rank are addressed, differ from those in common use. While the head of a common man would be called ulu, the head of a chief would be Fofof/a. This is called reverential lan- guage. The INIissionaries have availed themselves of such distinctions in teaching sacred truths. Speak- ^'fTo, ToiKJi 'nil /^r? J^'EW pleasant months of improving fellowship K were spent by the Missionaries at JSTiikualofa. ^'C They had the satisfaction of seeing the gradual )\^ spread of religious knowledge, and the steady ^ improvement of most of the new converts. Know- ^ ing that the first impulse of the heart that God has touched is to seek the salvation of others, they held a monthly Missionary prayer-meeting for the natives, and there related how the Sandwich Islanders had welcomed the " good tidings of great joy." The first love-feast was held in Tonga, about this time. A hundred and fifty attended ; and about forty-six spoke in a very simple and affecting way of their conversion from heathenism to Chi-istianity ; and from the practice of sin to the love and service of the Lord Jesus. A bystander would have found it difficult to believe that these humble and reverent men, confessing sin with sorrow, yet confident because SUCCESS AND TRIALS. 201 redeemed and restored, were the very same who, a few years before were crouching in dread at idol-shrines, or indulging in the license of heathen dances beneath the moonlit groves of Tonga. On the 20th of December, twenty-six men and fifty-eight women were baptised. Some of these were venerable with age. These showed their regard for the ancient worthies by adopting their names. One man, with white hair, chose Isaac for his name. Jacob, Adam, and Enoch were also chosen. On the 18th January, 1830, the King Tubuo, was received into Christ's church by baptism. Mr. Thomas, says, " I read the 6th chapter of Joshua, to a large assembly in the chapel, and made some remarks by way of illustration. After this, Tubou, the chief of this place and governor of Tonga, stood up in order to give a public proof of his having renounced the Tonga gods, and embraced the true religion. He is a very fine looking man, and was neatly dressed in native cloth. He stood up in front of the pulpit ; his wife and children being on his left hand. He called the attention of the people there assembled, and then openly and firmly renounced the gods of Tonga, declaring them to be all vanity and lies. He then assured the people and the INIis- sionaries, that he had cast away everything he knew to be sinful, and that Jehovah was his God, and Jesus Christ his only Saviour ; that he made an off'ering of himself, his wife, and children that day unto the Lord, that He might dispose of him and his as He thought good. He exhorted his people to attend to the things 202 SUCCESS AND TRIALS. of God, and to follow his example in being baptised in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ. He then turned round, kneeled down, and the sacred ordinance was administered by brother Turner, The king's name was chosen some time before, and is Josiah. After the king was baptised, he presented four children ; these were next baptised. In the afternoon, three adults and four children were baptised. One of the adults was a man who had been a magician, or a kind of god, and of so high rank that Tubou used to pray to him ; so that we have baptised in one day both the king and his god." Many strangers from the Haabai and Vavau groups came over to Tonga, declaring their wish to hear and see " what this lotu is." Overflowing crowds thronged the chapel on the Sabbath, and more than once the Missionaries went out to the sea-side and preached the gospel in the open air, amid the encampments of the temporary visitors. Here it was that the Tui-Haabai and his people heard the word of life, gained passing refreshment for their hungry and thirsty souls, and became all the more lu-gent in their cries for spiritual food. The time now came for Mr. and Mrs. Thomas to embark on their new enterprise. They had been waiting for letters from home ; but finding the chief of the Haabais anxious for a teacher, and judging him to be sincere, Peter, a native convert, steady, zealous, and pious, was sent to commence the work in those islands. He was able to read the writing of the SUCCESS AND TIIIALS. 203 Missionaries witli tolerable fluency, aud had been a great help to them in acquiring the language. Con- sidering the short time he had been under instruction, he had a very correct knowledge of the leading truths of the Bible, and his heart burned with desire to make known the Saviour to his countrymen. Not a fortnight had elapsed after Peter's arrival at the Haabais, before he sent gratifying tidings. The chief on I'eaching Lifuka, his own home, took to pieces a large canoe ; long laid up as sacred to his gods. He then pubUcly declared his intention of attending thenceforth to the instructions of Jehovah's book, and exhorted his people to do the same, adding, " Jehovah is the only Lord." He commenced learn- ing to read forthwith, and worked hard at his lessons night and day. Mr. Thomas would have followed immediately ; but , can you guess what this hut means ? It is a but that has fallen sadly upon the ear of many a Missionary, when he has seen an open door, and heard the voices of hundreds of heathen, crying, " Come over and help us." But letters from England complained of the want of money, and without money how could more men be sent out to carry on the work ? The lack of funds at home, checked many a well-laid plan for more extensive usefulness. It caused grief at heart to the Missionaries at Tonga, who had been so pressingly urged to go to the Haabais, and who had given a kind of pledge to the the king of those islands. While waiting anxiously, 204 SUCCESS AND TRIALS. not daring to add to the difficulties of the society by further outlay, a small bos or packet was washed on shore and brought to Mr. Turner. It was found to contain a letter that set their minds at rest. Things at home were not so bad after all. A Mission- ary might go to Haabai. The vessel that bore that letter, a schooner from Sydney, had foundered oft' New Zealand, and all on board had perished. Neither the vessel, nor any of her crew, nor any of the goods, with which slie had been freighted, was ever heard of again. That letter alone, the messenger of mercy to a people, waiting for the law of the Lord, guided by Him " whom winds and seas obey," escaped the general ruin, and was cast on the right shore at the right time. Mr. Thomas reached the Haabai Islands, on the 30th January, 1830, after a stormy and dangerous passage. The next day was the Sabbath, and about three hundred natives assembled in a large room that had been used for important meetings. The subject of the sermon was Isaiah Iv. 6, 7. A large company met again in the afternoon, and from that day the number of hearers increased gradually. Two days after reaching this new station, Mr. Thomas opened a school for the men and boys, and IVIrs. Thomas another for the women and girls. About a hundred scholars attended each school. Mr. Thomas was surprised to find that the change was greater than he had been led to expect. Out of eigfhteen inhabited islands, all but three had embraced SUCCESS AKU TIUALS. 205 Christianity. The mauy houses formerly sacred to the Tonga gods were either used as common dwellings, or set apart for the worship of the " one Lord." The king took five of his wooden idols, and lumg them up by the neck in one of these houses, in order that the people might see that they were " all dead." Tou will see, at once, that where the change from heathenism was so general, a Missiouaiy's work would become very heavy. The people were utterly ignorant. All that they knew was that tliey were wrong, and that there was one among them who could set them right. "What was one "among so many?" Sunday School teachers know how small a portion of know- ledge can be communicated to even an attentive learner in an hour, and how the one lesson oft repeated, and as it seemed thoroughly driven into the memory, is forgotten. A week passes, and they go to their class, hoping for a ready answer to a clear question respecting last Sunday's instruction. There is the same willing listener, all eye and ear ; but the question put in half-a-dozen forms, fails to bring a response, and they find that they must " begin at the beginning " again. At Haabai there was one Mission- ary, through whose speaking lips and W'riting fingers, every particle of truth conveyed to thousands of minds must pass. A siugle utterance on one subject was not enough. If at home "line upon line" is needful, how much more needful was it there ? No wonder that ceaseless toil in the pulpit and in the school, in writing and translating, in visiting tlie sick. 206 SUCCESS AND TRIALS. and in conversing from bouse to house, at last brought on serious illness. Mrs. Thomas's good nursing, with the blessing of God, was successful ; but though Mr, Thomas's life was spared, it was some time before he was again strong to labour. Yet the needs of the people were ever on the increase. There was so mucli darkness and wretchedness, with so strong a desire for teaching and books, that all the Missionaries could do seemed as nothing. A few extracts from Mr. Thomas's journal will give some idea of the work in the Haabais : — " Septemler 1, 1830. — I have been slowly recover- ing the last few days from my late affliction. To God be all the praise ! I have been able to write for the people the 19th chapter of Exodus, the 17th of Acts, and a short catechism. " September 4. — Such a field of labour opens before me, that I hardly know how to meet the wants of the people, so as to allow myself time for private reading and prayer. " September 7th. —I have been very busy yesterday and to day ; have been able to meet my two classes, and have felt encouraged. I have translated the 4th and 5th chapters of St. Matthew's gospel to-day. The chief has promised to allow me the labours of Peter three days each week, to assist me in trans- lating the language. " September 15. — I have been engaged in copying yesterday's translation, and afterwards I prepared SUCCESS AND TRIALS. 207 some questions and answers, to be studied and learned by those under instruction for baptism. I finished also a small book for the chief. It contains a transla- tion of the first catechism, the Lord's Prayer, the Creed, and the Ten Commandments. " September 24. — Peter being on a visit to one of the islands, I have given him a sermon to read to the people. By the assistance of the young chief, Taoni, I have translated the 2nd and 3rd chapters of Exodus. " Sei)temher 25. — Translated the parable of the prodigal son. Faoni was my assistant. He is a very intelligent native, and has left Vavau, his native place, his friends, and wife, rather than desist from praying to Jehovah. " October 16.— This evening from twenty-five to thirty persons received books at our gate ; these will be read by from fifty to one hundred people. " October 18. — I finished a book for the chief, on the names of the days, the number of weeks and months in the year. It is a kind of almanack, and contains the numerals in figures up to one hundred thousand. At three o'clock I met my class. Richard Haley, an Englishman, came to join himself to us. He was a poor, wicked sailor, who wished to become a heathen ; but now heathens are becoming Christians, and he learns of them to fear the Lord. " October 23. — This morning I finished my trans- lation of St. Matthew's gospel. I have likewise proceeded as far as Exodus xiv. in the Old Testament. 208 SUCCESS AND TfilALS. " November 19. — To day a number of little girls came to our gate with mauy baskets of fruits, called here oliji ; we use it to feed our pigs ; they wished to buy some cards, or alphabets ; and upon enquiry, we found they had been gathering this fruit, in order to obtain means of instruction for their aged parents, ■who were anxious to learn to read. We were glad to be able to gratify these dear children with a few books for their parents ; they received them joyfully, and returned home like those who rejoice when they have found great spoil. " November 20. — We are brought safe through another week. I have been worn down every day. AYe have upwards of one hundred persons in the classes. Twenty-seven have joined us this week, and they are all under my care at present. We have had an increase in both the schools. I have had to form new classes, and to write many new school-books." This boil was not without its reward. Day by day, old and resolute heathens w^ere found yielding before the power of divine truth, and many not only became Chx'istians in name, but in heart also. The decision and firmness of the chief (King George), were of great use to the Missionary. " In opposing wickedness," says Mr. Thomas, " our people are with- out fear, and especially our chief. He is most hearty in the cause of Christ, and longs to see idolatry banished out of all these islands." Before a year had passed away, a hundred and fifty had been joined in SUCCESS AND TRIALS. 209 cliurcli-fellowslnp, the chief being one of the number ; a large chapel had been erected, aud at its opening from two to three thousand were present ; " the king and his people, from the infant to the old grey-headed chief," all bowing before Jehovah aud owning his sovereignty. Here, as in Tonga, the testimony of some of the new converts was very pleasing. One of the natives, the day after his baptism, said that his mind was very happy, that yesterday was a good Sabbath to him, and he was so happy when he laid down at night that he could not sleep. He said lie loved the Lord Jesus Christ very much ; he knew that he had no strength of his own, but that he believed in Christ as his strength. " Once," said he, " we were astray, but now God has sent us His good word, and I very much love God, and hate the devil, and all his evil ways." Mr. Thomas's work being too much for his strength, a second Missionary was sent to the Haabais in the spring of 1831, the Eev. Peter Turner, who with the Eev. Messrs. Watkin and Woon, had recently arrived from England. Mr. Turner has been labouring in the Friendly Islands from that day to this. These three Missionaries were hailed with peculiar joy by their brethren, who were nearly worn out in their Master's service. No sooner, however, did they gain fellow-helpers, than they were anxious to break up new ground. Beyond the Haabais is another group of Islands. Three years before, Einau, the chief, or King of p 210 SUCCESS AND TRIALS. Vavau, had written for a Missionary. Since then he had returned to his idolatries, and been a persecutor of the new way. Mr. Thomas had frequently con- versed with Finau, and had been led to hope that by and by, he might find a willing people at Vavau. But it was permitted to some of the new converts at the Haabais to awaken the spirit of earnest enquiry among their island neighbours. In April, 1831, King George visited Vavau, with twenty-four sail of canoes. He and his people went on worldly business ; but their hearts were warm with their first love, and they were bent on doing spiritual good. Peter, their own faithful Christian teacher, was with them. He carried a present and a letter to Einau, from Messrs. Turner and Thomas, and their prayers followed the expedition. Finau opened his mind fully to his brother-chief, and made many objections to the great change proposed. The King of the Haabais, finding dLfficidties in the way, wrote down the substance of Fiuau's remarks, and travelled back to Mr. Thomas for advice. On again reaching Vavau, he was able to promise a Missionary in the course of a few months, if Finau would renounce the lying spirits, and turn to the true God. Many of his doubts were resolved, and his guest pleaded so efiectually, that at last Finau exclaimed, " Well, I will ; and I will spend the next Lord's day with you in worshipping your God." Two of his wives, many of his servants, another great chief, and his sister, Halaevu, — who, at Hihifo, had once helped to cool down Ata's anger, — and numbers SUCCESS AND TKIALS. 211 more, joined the Christians from Haabai in singing and prayer on the next Saabbth, Nor was this all. Monday came, and the king gave orders, that seven of the principal idols should be placed in a row. He then addressed them in language like this : " I have brought you here to prove you ; and I tell you beforehand what I am about to do, that you may be without excuse." Then, commencing with the first, he said, " If you are a god, run away, or you shall be burned in the fire which I have prepared !" The god made no attempt to escape. He then spoke to the next in the same way, and so on till he came to the last. As none of them ran, the king gave orders that the sacred houses should be set on fire. His commands were promptly obeyed. Eighteen temples, with their gods, were burned down. The weather was damp, and it took three days to complete the work of destruction. Though many joined with their whole heart, yet hundreds were grievously troubled at their king's impious conduct, and sat trembling and silent to watch the result, looking for no less than some awful calamity. As no harm happened to the doers of the daring deed, they came to the conclusion, that their gods must be liars after all, and they too joined the praying people. Soon the whole time of the visitors was taken up in teaching the new disciples. All ordinary work was laid aside. Their constant cry was, " We can do our work when you are gone. Let us learn first to serve Grod while you are with us." And company after p2 212 SUCCESS AND TEIALS. company, athirst for the water of life, resorted to the Christians. One of these said, " I was four nights and did not sleep. I was talking with the people, reading, praying, and singing." They returned home earnestly praying that a Missionary, or at least, a native teacher might be sent immediately to Vavau. Two pious and devoted natives were sent in answer to this appeal. They soon reported that they had larger congregations than they had ever seen at Lifuka, and .that " the reign of the devil at Vavau was broken." This wonderful work did not proceed without opposition. A chief, who was a relative of Finau, headed a war-party, and talked of fighting rather than submitting to the new doctrine. The King of Vavau bore this trial well. He was meek and patient ; he said that the anger of his friend would soon be over ; but that as for himself having found the true Grod, he was determined to live and die to Him, and never more to serve the Tonga gods. The issue of this affair is thus stated by Mr. Thomas. " After the King of Vavau embraced Christianity, a part of his people rose and opposed him. They were headed by a great chief, who returned to Vavau from the Fiji Islands a few years before. He had a strong party on his side, and they proceeded to ravage and plunder different houses and villages for some time. The king did not interfere with them, for two reasons ; first, the head of the party was a brother ; second, he did not wish to go to war, knowing it to be contrary to true religion and the love of God. At length, the SUCCESS AKD TRIALS. 213 opposing party settled on an island, near tlie Haabias, called Odea, where they built a battery, or as they call it, a kola, and thus declared open war against their king. Finau sent for our king, George, who went to Yavau, with his people to endeavour to recon- cile the two parties. When many fruitless attempts had been made to bring the offending chief to a better mind, the Lord our God undertook to defend His own cause. He gave the rebels a trembling heart. They betrayed a want of courage to fight, and became more humble. Our people, who were on the watch, seized the favourable moment, entered the enemy's fortification, brought the people outside, set the w^hole on fire and burned it to the ground. The offending chief was sent away from the island ; other chiefs who bad joined him, submitted, and were ordered to remain at Vavau ; and many of the common people were brought to Lifuka as prisoners of war. In a few days, our king and his people returned to this island. Not one was missing. It is quite a new thing in these islands, that such an aflair should terminate without bloodshed, and the people are constrained to acknowledge that it is the Lord's doing." At the next meeting of all the Missionaries, it was agreed that Mr. Cross should proceed to Vavau, and that Mr. Watkin should join Mr. P. Turner at Haabai, while Mr. Thomas should return to Tonga. Mr. N. Turner had been compelled, by failing health, to leave the islands ; and Mr. Thomas being now the senior Missionary, his presence at the principal 214 SUCCESS AND TEIALS. station was desirable. Before leaving Lifuka, he reviewed the change that had taken place there during his two years' residence. He says, " I have entered an account of the society in a book, for the beneiit of my colleague. I find that we have 149 members of society ; 146 who are on trial as members ; and 262 who are on trial for baptism ; making a total of persons who meet in society, of 557 ; being an increase of 452 in the last year. Some are added almost every day. The schools at this station, which are now six in number, contain 1,037 scholars, chiefly adults ; being an increase in the past year of 717. Of this number, 236 have been added to the female school at Lifuka, under the care of Mrs. Thomas and Mrs. Turner. I judge that not less than one thousand have turned from darkness to light, from Satan to Grod, in the past year." Mr. Thomas had a painful parting with the people of Haabai, whom he regarded as his spiritual children ; but a joyful greeting awaited him at Nukualofa, where the Missionaries and their wives, with scores of the natives, were standing on the beach, eager to catch the first glimpse of the canoe that brought him back. The tide was low, and the boat could not get close in land ; but the ready natives plunged into the water, carrying a plank, on which they bore him and Mrs, Thomas to the shore. Here they first saw the new Missionaries, with whom they gladly enough ex- changed Christian congratulations. Here also were SUCCESS AND TRIALS. 215 some from Ililiifo, who rejoiced to welcome their first teachers. We must now briefly review the progress of the work at Nukualofa. The testimony of the new Missionaries, in writing home to the committee was. " All that you have heard respecting the work of God in this place, which many thought too highly-coloured, we will not merely say is true, but is much below the reality. We cannot move any way for several miles, but we hear the people singing the praises of God, and engaged in other devotional exercises." Mr. Watkin says : " A few evenings ago, in one of our walks to visit the sick, we came into the neighbour- hood of some idol-gods' houses, and took the opportu- nity of inspecting these relics of heathenism. There was enough of daylight to make the scene interesting. The houses, or temples, are situated in a grove, and have been built in their very best style, and, before the introduction of Christianity, had sacred attention paid to them ; but now they are going rapidly to ruin ; weeds flourish round them, the grass has overgrown the paths that led to them, and the area upon which the worshippers used to sit, in expectation of a propitious answer. The beetle has eaten, or the weather has worn through the roof ; so that now they would scarcely serve as houses for goats, much less for gods. The chief has appropriated part of the materials of one of these houses to the erection of a common house. And the ground that surrounded 216 SUCCESS AND TEIALS. these temples, and was deemed sacred, has been reclaimed, and is now producing fruit ' good for food.' " Oh, when shall we be able to say the same of the temples of India, and the Joss-houses of China ! Their day of ruin will come, and is now hastening. " The gods that have not made the heavens and the earth, even they shall perish from the earth, and from under these heavens." Jeremiah x. 11. Mr. Woon had brought with him a printing press and materials. Between the month of April, 1831, and February, 1832, he had printed the following books. 2,500 copies of a first-lesson book ; 3,000 of book No. 2, containing lessons from the Old and New Testaments ; 1,500 hymn-books, sixty-four pages each, for public and private worship ; 2,000 of another Scripture lesson-book ; and 4,000 catechisms. These books were most eagerly sought for, and were of great use in the homes of the people, as well as in the daily schools. The demand increased so fast -that in the course of nine months, 17,000 books had been printed, and the supply of paper furnished from England was nearly exhausted. The numbers of members in church-fellowship stood thus, in February, 1832, including the three groups of islands: — In society, 516; on trial 528; total meeting in class, 1,014. Increase during the year, 598. All the schools were large and flourishing. In Tonga, there were 77 teachers and 953 scholars. In the Haabais, 74 teachers and 1,037 scholars. Total in the two groups, 151 teachers and 1,990 scholars. SUCCESS AND TRIALS. 217 The Missionaries at Nukualofa, had been cheered and stimulated in their labour of love, by the visits of Christian brethren of other churches. The Rev. Messrs. Williams and Barff, of the London Missionary Society, and the Eev. "William Tate, of the Church Mission, had spent some days with them. Mr. Yate passed a Sabbath on the islands. In the morning of that day, Mr. Turner preached to the natives ; and aftervpards, Mr. Tate preached to the Missionaries and the English from the words, " All things are of Grod, who hath reconciled us to Himself by Jesus Christ." In tlie afternoon, he gave a second sermon for the benefit of his own New Zealanders. The Tonguese Christians came to hear, and although they did not understand the language, they joined in the worship. Mr. Turner enjoyed greatly this visit of an honoured Christian brother. Mr. Tate's converse and counsels refreshed and strengthened him in the Lord. Mr. Tate had heard much of the change at Tonga, before he left New Zealand, and he was disposed to regard part at least, as too strange and too good to be true. He therefore went much among the people, observing their domestic habits and their attention to religious duties, and he assured Mr. Turner, that what he saw exceeded all that he had heard. He carried away specimens of handwriting of both boys and girls, written in his own presence, that, on his return, he might convince the gainsayers, and urge the New Zealanders to more diligence. Two events that occurred about this time, were 218 SUCCESS AND TRIALS. trying to the faith of the Missionaries and of the new Christians. The first of these was the removal from the islands of the Eev. Nathaniel Turner. His health had long been in a declining state ; yet still he lingered, unwilling to part from the people, who were now beginning to repay him for years of anxious and depressing toil. "When at last it was deemed essential that he should seek change of climate and medical help, he yielded to his brethren's advice. Though pained to go, he yet found matter for praise in having been used by God to do a great work. He felt " consoled," that he left "the mission in a prosperous state, with every prospect of still greater success." He had seen the arrival of the printing press. Some books had been printed before he sailed, a few copies of which he carried away with him ; and holding in his hand specimens of the first books that the sons of Tonga had ever read, he felt that " a work had been done there which could never be undone." A new power had been put into the hands of the Tonguese, and a new step in civilisation taken. He had found them sitting down, with folded hands, in contented ignorance ; he left them, with stretched arms and straining eye, feeling their way towards all the light of knowledge with which earth and heaven are fuU. The last morning spent by Mr. Turner at Tonga was one of keen trial. " None but the Searcher of hearts," says he, "can tell the sorrow of mine." The people crowded round the Missionary's home, weeping while they said "Farewell." Many sur- SUCCESS AND TRIALS. 219 rounded him and bis family as they moved towards the beach, and when they reached the boat, there was another large company waiting with new tears, and new prayers and blessings. Nor would they part then. Many got into the boat, and others followed in canoes, still telling Mr. Turner of their love, and adding to his grief by showing their own. He was ready, like St. Paxil, to exclaim, " "What mean ye to weep, and to break my heart ? " Children have quick sympathies, and Mr. Turner's little ones wept too, and implored their father to remain in the home where they had always been so happy. But after the bitter- ness of this parting had passed away, Mr. Turner's heart retained the joy of him who knows that when he appears at the great gathering-day, it will be bringing his sheaves with him. A few months after Mr. Turner left Tonga, a more serious'affliction befel the mission party, in the death, by shipwreck, of Mrs. Cross. You remember that Mr. Cross was appointed to take charge of the new mission at Vavau. He and his wife left Nukualofa on the 7th January, 1832, after having waited some days for a favourable wind. A large boat was lent to them by their chief, Josiah Tubou. They set sail early in the morning, after an affectionate parting from the natives, with whom they had lived for four years. Besides the Missionary, his wife, and about seventy natives, all Mr. Cross's books, ciothes, and other private property were on board, with many mission goods taken for the purpose of barter in the erection 220 SUCCESS AND TRIALS. of buildings on the new station. The voyage was long and they proposed staying at Nomuka that evening, and spending the Sabbath there. For a few hours the vrind continued fair and moderate, though there was a heavy swell. This increased as the wind grew stronger. About noon the yard broke, and soon after the mast. The large sail was instantly taken down, and a very small one set. Towards evening the storm increased, and they felt themselves to be in perilous circumstances. The sailors looked out anxiously for land, hoping that they were near Nomuka. No land appeared in sight, and the whole party, in their frail canoe, were driven hither and thither till break of day. The danger of such a position is greatly increased in those seas, by the number of small islands and hidden reefs. About an hour after sunrise the weary and alarmed travellers descried land. Not a man in the boat had any correct idea of where they were. Some said that they had got back to Tonga ; others that they were nearing Fiji ; but reaching the island at noon, they found it to be Huga Tonga, one of the small islands on which no man dwells. If you look at the map of the islands you will see how far wrong in their calcu- lations the guides of this voyage had strayed. Huga, that promised so fairly did not prove a friend. Its sides were rocky and steep, and the swell of the sea was so great that the party could not land. What was to be done ? On consultation it was thought best to try to get back to Tonga. The mast, part of SUCCESS AND TRIALS. 221- the yard, and all else that could be spared, were cast into the sea, and the lightened canoe, urged by a favourable wind, made way hopefully. They now partook of some refreshment, which they much needed. Mr. Cross had eaten no food for thirty hours, and Mrs. Cross had tasted nothing but a little cocoa-nut milk. Towards sunset the little isle of Atata, near Tonga, appeared in sight. They hoped to reach it in a very short time, to spend the night there, and to get back the next morning to Nukualofa, only seven miles off. But when within two or three miles of Atata, the wind changed from north to east, and blew tremendously. The men took the sails down with all speed ; but almost before they could get to their paddles, the canoe struck upon a reef, and began to break up. To add to the horror of the moment, they were in darkness, the moon having just gone down. It has often been said that persons out at sea cannot but be struck with the thought that an inch or two of wood is the only sepa- ration between them and eternity. What then must be the feelings of those who perceive that this thin partition is giving way ? One of the native teachers said, " Misa Kolosi, lie maloi lio tau lotu Jcilie Atua, he Tcuo tau matey " Mr. Cross, be strong our minds towards God, for we are all dead." There was a short pause, in which they committed their bodies and spirits into the Lord's hands, and then all were washed off the canoe into the sea, and the canoe was dashed in pieces. 222 SUCCESS AND TRIALS. Mr. Cross held his wife with his right arm, and they rose and sank repeatedly. With his left hand he caught at broken pieces of the canoe that floated past, and resting on these, they took breath occasionally. The water was only six or seven feet deep, but the rough waves were dashing and foaming in surf over the low reef. Mrs. Cross spoke no word of complaint or of fear : but from time to time, she called on the Lord for help. Her husband said, " Look to the Lord ; we are both going to heaven together." A few more seconds, and the buffetings of the waves conquered her feeble frame. The spirit left its shattered tabernacle. Mr. Cross's faithful riglit arm still clasped the lifeless body. Soon after he found himself near a few boards, part of the deck of the canoe. His own strength was well-nigh gone : but just then a Fiji man, a member of the church at Tonga, found him out, and calling to another native for help, they lifted their minister on to the boards, and lashed Mrs. Cross's body to the planks that bore up her husband. The natives now managed to form a raft, by tying together several of the broken pieces of the canoe, and more than twenty persons having seated them- selves upon it, they were drifted they knew not whither. In about two hours, by the good providence of God, the raft was driven against a small island, called Tokeloke. There was no good landing-place here. The island was girded by sharp rocks on which the angry waves kept dashing and breaking. How- ever, the men took notice of a tree that overhung the SrCCESS AND TEIALS, 223 sea, and its branches proved a means of escape for them. They eagerly caught at them, and having tied the raft to the tree, climbed up and helped othei's up, till all on the raft had been safely landed. Those who had thus escaped felt very anxious about their friends, many of whom, had not been seen since the breaking up of the boat. They rejoiced greatly, as one after another, a large number reached the island, some by the help of a paddle, or board, and two or three by means of a gate that Mr. Cross was taking for his new house at Vavau. Tokeloke was an uninhabited island, and the men who accompanied Mr. Cross, had some difficulty in lighting a fire and preparing a scanty meal. They succeeded at last, and the fire thus kindled served as a guide to their companions out at sea. They also made a small shed with the branches of the cocoa-nut tree and a mat. Mr. Cross was becoming very weak from long exposure to cold and from want of food, and he urged the natives to construct another raft, thinking that a second night on the island would kill him ; but the wind blew a gale, and the people, all worn and weary, would not venture out. Towards noon the wind fell, and a canoe arrived from Hihifo. Some floating pieces of wood had told the natives of that place what had liappened, and they had come out to see if they could find any survivors from the wreck. Mr. Cross was conveyed on shore and set down about four miles from the mission premises. He managed to reach his brethren; but 224 SUCCESS AND TRIALS, SO faint and so mucli bruised, that they " were almost broken-hearted on seeing him," though thankful to God for his spared life. ^Fourteen men, one woman, and five children were lost on this sad occasion ; and no portion of the goods was recovered. Mr. Cross missed the body of his wife, when the landing at Tokeloke was effected. The violence of the waves had separated the board to which it was fastened from the others, and it had been drifted away. But on his sad walk homewards, a messenger from Atata overtook him, vdth the news that the body had been cast ashore at Hihifo. A number of men brought it to the mission-premises, and Mr. Cross had the sorrowful satisfaction of attending his wife's remains to their Christian burial. Mrs. Cross was a woman of devoted heart and pious life. Her health was delicate, and that delicacy had been increased by the rough treatment of the ignorant and unloving natives on her first arrival in the islands. Two of them undertook to carry her to land, as the tide had fallen and the vessel could not reach the shore ; but after carrying her half way, they set her down in the water and left her there, fancying that it was laziness, and not fear of getting wet, that pre- vented her from wading, in native fashion. She caught a violent cold, and never recovered from its effects. This lasting trial she bore with Christian patience ; and, as far as her lessened strength perinitted, she strove to do good to the people, teaching the women reading and needlework, and spending leisure hours at STTCCESS AND TEIALS. 225 liome in making articles of European clothing for their use. The whole mission party mourned her loss. Her husband, by this stroke, was stripped of all earthly good. Everything that he had called his own was gone ; but he felt most deeply the death of her who had been his companion for thirteen years, the last of which, he said, had been the happiest of the whole. Of her happiness, however, he felt assured, and he had also good hope of several of the natives who, while strug- gling with the waves that proved too strong for them, called ceaselessly on the name of the Lord. One of the survivors said, " I was much afraid of dying with- out having worshipped God in sincerity with all my heart, and I long to get home that I may worship Grod truly." On the Sabbath following this solemn event, addresses on the subject were delivered to crowded congregations of English and natives, and the next day was set apart for fasting and prayer. The chief, and the greater part of his people attended at five in the morning, and at three in the afternoon ; and many of these native Christians joined their pastors in humble confession, and earnest pleadings. The Missionaries were exposed to perils by land, as well as to " perils in the sea." Storms and earth- quakes are of frequent occurrence in some of the islands, and volcanic eruptions are not uncommon. A very severe storm took place at Yavau on the 24th January, 1833. There had been much rain and wind during the day, so that it was with difficulty that Mr. 226 SUCCESS AND TEIALS. P. Turner went through the Sabbath services. After coming from chapel in the evening, the wind con- tinued to rise till midnight, when its damaging effects began to be felt. The fences and out-houses were blown down, and the house itself began to give way, one of the main posts breaking at the top, and another close to the groiuid. The mission family rose in haste, and fled for their lives. Mrs. Turner was hurried out by her husband, just as the house was falling. They found partial shelter in a small house near at hand, made only of the leaves of the cocoa- nut tree. Some of these leaves were carried away by the wind, and the rain poured in torrents through the gap. Several of the leaders came to their assistance, and saved them from further danger, by " holding the house " all night. Mr. Turner seems to speak of holding a house as we do of holding an umbrella down, or keeping a cloak on. These leafy tents, which, in more ways than one, must have reminded their English owners of their pilgrim state, were not only apt to stray in a storm, but in calm weather were sometimes lifted by men from one place, and set down in another, according to pleasure. When Mr. Turner ventured out on the Monday morning, it was to see a terrible wreck. His house was beaten to pieces, quite past repair ; many of his goods, including books, were spoiled ; not a fence was left standing ; most of the neighbouring houses were blown down ; and but few bananas, bread-fruit trees, and cocoa-nut trees had escaped the general ruiu. The leaves of the few trees SUCCESS AXB TRIALS. 227 that still stood, looked as though they had been scorched with fire. By this storm half the houses in the island were destroyed, and many were lifted out of their place. Its effects on the inhabitants were serious. Scarcity of food followed ; and though the people set about building, clearing the ground, and planting, yet it was long before the desolate island was again covered with a luxuriant growtli of trees. In one of Mr. Watkius's letters, he names having just felt two distinct shocks of earthquake. The house vibrated very sensibly, and he was afraid that it might fall ; but after rocking like a cradle for several seconds, it settled into quietness, and he ate his dinner under his own roof of thatch. As soon as the first shock was felt, the usual lovid cry — that cry that was supposed to recal old Maui to a sense of his responsible position — was raised ; but the people checked themselves, remembering that they had turned "from these vanities." There is a small island, N.AV. of the Friendly Islands, that is peculiarly liable to earthquakes and volcanic eruptions. Indeed, it is said to contain thirty volcanic craters. Mr. Lawry speaks of it in his first journal, i^age 45. In spite of the danger of residing on this island, Niua Foou, 1,200 Wesleyan Methodists continue to inhabit it ; so strong is their love to their native rocks, and to the place where their fathers lived and died. The last volcanic eruption took place in June, 1853, and is thus spoken of by a native teacher : — Q 2 228 SUCCESS AND TEIALS. " I now make known what has happened to this land. A great burning has happened to Niua. An awful thing ! God did it ; yea, to this land ! On the 24th June last, three dreadful earthquakes shook the island in the night ; and the earth opened and swallowed up a village. Twenty-five persons were consumed in the burning gulf, together with dwelling-houses and chapel ; but eighteen escaped to the mountains. A great part of the land is destroyed." This teacher, Elisha, visited the native training school, at Nukualofa, some months after the catas- trophe, and spoke for an hour, giving a description of the scenes that he had witnessed. Part of his account is as follows : — " The large crater which first opened and engulphed the village, is two miles from the sea. The width of the stream of lava was nearly a mile ; and the whole of that tract of land is one mass of scoria, eight feet thick. The lake in the centre of the island boiled like one vast cauldron. The fire which the earth vomited, was a blood-red colour. Its glare was lurid, and, at night, the glowing light cast against the sky, made darkness visible. In the course of the lava to the ocean, it was sometimes wavy and turbulent, like one sea of fire ; and at irregular distances, other craters shot up columns of red flame, through the liquid fire, until it licked the sky ; like unto a water-spout, which SUCCESS AND TRIALS. 229 a whirlwind carries up from the ocean's surface. Great was the dismay of the inhabitants." A noble-minded native Missionary, John Latu, went to the scene of the overthrown village, and standing near the largest volcano then in action, preached to the survivors on, " For we know that if our earthly house of this tabernacle were dissolved, we have a building of God, an house not made with hands, eternal in the heavens."* The two years that followed INIr. Turner's removal and Mrs. Cross's death were marked by the steady progress of divine knowledge in the three groups of islands. Several young men had been received as exhorters, or local preachers. At Lifuka there were twenty-two such agents. JN^ine of these resided on different islands, where they conducted public worship, met the classes, managed the schools, and watched over the people. Others went out each Sabbath to separate stations, nearer or more remote. So that though there were only two Missionaries at the Haabais, the word of God was preached at twelve places, twice every Sabbath day. Some cheering instances occurred of zeal for God on the part of these exhorters, and of their willingness to render sacrifice as well as pleasant service. One young man, just appointed to a distant island, looked at what he was leaving, and, after counting the cost, said to Mr. * "NVesleyan Missionary Notices. October, 1854. 230 SUCCESS AND TRIALS. "Watkins, " It is true I possess a house aud a large field, but I will leave them immediately, if I can do the work of the Lord." The Leaders, too, shewed the same spii-it. At some distance from Mr. Watkins' s house there lived a poor leper. From the days of Moses until now, such men have lived apart. Their loathsome and in- fectious complaint warns away every fellow-man. "Without hope of cure in this life, and without the comfort of human society, their lot is sad indeed. But He who cured many with a word only, "touched " the leper who came to Him for healing ; and His followers, copying His example, do not shrink from carrying a blessing to the most diseased body, nor to the vilest soul. The outcast of Lifuka desired earn- estly to meet in class. This could not be allowed; but one of the class-leaders, a zealous young man, visited him frequently, and told him much of the love of Jesus. That " all restormg name Is music in a sinner's ear." It told the leper of a fountain " for sin and for un- cleanness," and of a heaven where " the inhabitant shall not say I am sick," opened to all believers ; and, finding the Saviour, he was no more lonely and sor- rowful. There was an English class at Lifuka, and among its members William Singleton was numbered. When Mr. Lawry was at Tonga, this man resisted his earnest SUCCESS AND TRIALS. 231 and powerful appeals, and deliberately chose to pursue the same course as the heathens around him. In the later years of his life, he saw his sin and sought Christian communion. The Missionaries visited him and prayed with him frequently. He suffered from distressing pain ; but his concern for his soul made him forget the anguish of his body. Some of the natives watched by his dying bed, and told the Mis- sionaries what his last words were, " hiio u tui mai Jcia Jesu Kalaisi,^'' " I believe firmly in Christ." It is to be hoped that he was " a brand plucked from the burning." The people, lately brought to a knowledge of the truth, did not limit their desires for the good of others to their own near neighbourhood, nor even to the Friendly Islands. They began to feel a " yearning pity for mankind " at large. In prayer they were accustomed to remember all Christian people, all Ministers and Missionaries, and the world that " lieth in wickedness." These were familiar words and feel- ings to at least fifteen hundred people, who, three years before, were living in rank idolatry. At the monthly Missionary prayer-meetings, Mr. Watkins sometimes gave an outline of the introduction of Christianity into the islands, the opposition of the people to it, and reminded them of the benefit that they had reaped by its coming among them. An opposer of the new way once stated his firm belief that had not Christianity been introduced the whole race would have been almost extinct through war and 232 SUCCESS AND TRIALS. its attendant evils. This opinion was confirmed by the condition of some of the islands that bore distinct traces of having been once far more fertile, and far more numerously peopled. Before the close of 1834, the reign of idolatry in the whole of the Haabai group was over. An event that tended greatly to hasten this result was the con- version of the Tamaha. She came to Lifuka, accom- panied by about a hundred of her people who had long doubted her divinity, but who had waited for her decision before they left their fathers' gods and cus- toms. Thirteen canoes brought the party to Lifuka. They were gladly welcomed by the Christians, and became their fellow-worshippers on the following Sabbath. At Vavau, the progress of the work was equally satisfactory. A new chapel was built that would seat 800 persons. It was the best chapel that had been erected there ; but was still too small for the crowds that attended regularly. On the day of the opening, 3,000 came together to join in the services. In one week, six places, mostly the houses of chiefs, were opened for preaching. In the course of three months, 1,200 began to meet in class. .From the remote island of Niua Foou, good news came. The people there had cast away their idols, and were waiting anxiously for a teacher. A Vavau man had undertaken to teU them what he had been taught of the way to heaven. The story of the introduction of Christianity into this island, is very SUCCESS AND TRIALS. 233 interesting. A large number of Vavauans liad accompanied their king, Tinau, on a visit to Niua. On their return homewards, the four large canoes in which they sailed, were driven out of their course by- adverse winds. One was lost, and all on board, sixty or seventy in number, perished. Another, having on board the chief of Niua, was driven to the Fiji group ; the third, having on board INIr. Cross, and the king of Vavau, reached Vavau after a dangerous passage ; while the fourth, after being driven hither and thither for many days, at last reached Niua Foou. The joy felt at sight of land, was checked by the knowledge the Vavauans had of the character of the people living there. The Niua Foouans had acquired a painful notoriety for unfriendliness and cruelty. As the worn-out mariners neared the shore, they saw the natives drawn up, armed, to oppose their landing. They considered what was their best course. To put to sea in their enfeebled state, would be to throw life away ; so they determined on landing at all risks. They had many muskets, and a good quantity of ammixnition on board, by which they considered them- selves to be more than a match for their foes. Charging their pieces with powder only, they walked on shore boldly, and fired into the air. To see the flash, and to hear the report was enough for the Niua Foouans ; they all fled. The Vavauans made no improper use of their bloodless victory. Their alarmed foes returned after a time, bringing offerings and sueing for forgive- ness. This was instantly granted ; and while showing 234 SUCCESS AND TRIALS. mercy to those who deserved harsher treatment, the Vavauans spoke of the pardon that ' God is ready to bestow upon His enemies. They told the people all that they knew about the true religion. The people of Niua Foou hearing this wonderful news, and find- ing how great a change was wrought in the character and conduct of their neighbours from Vavau, became thoughtful and enquii'ing. Soon the chief man on the island declared in favour of Christianity ; many followed his example, till, at last, the majority of the inhabitants embraced the lotu. While the Vavauans stayed, they prayed and sung at all suitable oppor- tunities. When they left for their own home, one who was rather in advance of the others as to know- ledge, was deputed to remain. All the books that they could spare were left with Samuel, who agreed to stay at Niua Foou, till a Missionary could be sent to teach them " the way of Grod more perfectly." Samuel waited for many months, but there seemed to be no prospect of an exchange. AU the Missionaries in the Friendly Islands were occupied on other stations. He wrote to Yavau, earnestly entreating for more teachers and more books. He intended to plead his own cause, and embarked one morning for the pur- pose ; but just as he was about to put off, the people, who could not bear to lose him, crowded into his boat, so that she was in danger of sinking. " Why is this ? " asked Samuel. "Tou are going," they replied; "you are our only teacher, and we will go too ; for who will teach us when you are gone ? Will the trees preach SUCCESS AND TRIALS. 235 to US ? or, will the lioixse in whicli we meet instruct us ? " Samuel could not resist this appeal. He got out of the canoe, and went on shore again, surrounded by his loving disciples ; while the canoe proceeded on her vojage, bearing his written request for further aid. One of the Niua, or Keppel's Islands, too, pre- sented a favourable opening for Christian teaching. It was seen that it would be easy, were more Mission- aries supplied, to carry the gospel still further, to the Saraoas and the Tijis. In 1833, Finau, king of Vavau, died. It was his dying request that King Greorge, of Haabai, should be his successor in the government. This request was agreeable to the wishes of his friends ; and, accordingly, George became possessor of the united kingdoms of Haabai and Vavau. This step was favourable to the temporal and spiritual welfare of the islands. " Union is strength ;" and King Greorge, the point of union, was a man of firm will, and wise head. "We have seen that he was a zealous friend to the Missionaries, and to their doctrines. Finau's subjects showed their love to him, by their approval of his choice, and by another proof of regard which an English monarch would scarcely relish. Even before he died, they began to prepare a tomb, and a handsome house to cover it. The Haabai people helped them by cutting stone. It was a toil- some business. They cut large flat stones, or flags, from the coral rocks that bound the island, with no other tools than felling axes, common chisels, hatchets, 236 SUCCESS AND TEIALS. and sucli like instruments. Three hundred men were engaged for a fortnight in cutting, dressing, and placing these stones. And the work was thought to be completed in a wonderfully short space of time. Tonga, the largest and the most important of all the islands was, as I have said before, the least ready to embrace the Grospel. Tet, even there, success was granted. Besides the many Christians of Nukualofa, there were a few in the districts of Bea, Mua, Houma, and even of Hihifo. Ata's continued opposition gave rise to some noble specimens of self-denial for conscience sake. Ata's sons and many others were as firmly resolved to remain. Christians, as their father was to allow no Christian worship under his own eye. So, after suffering much from persecution, they removed to an uninhabited part of the land, about three miles from Hihifo, cleared away the bush, and built temporary houses. Ata's son, Vihala, seems to have been the ruling spirit in the movement, and to have managed the Christian settlement. Tubou gave him the land that he occupied. He and his little company soon brought it into good cultivation. They made several plantations of sugar-canes, bananas, and yams. All who found themselves persecuted at Hihifo joined this young chief. Though exiled they were not unhappy. They had given up all for Christ's sake, and they were " satisfied with favour, and full with the blessing of the Lord." "Wheii Mr. Thomas paid them his first visit, he preached to them fi'om Mat- SUCCESS AND TRIALS, 237 tbew V. 10 — 12 : Christ's blessing on those who are persecuted for righteousness sake ; and he rejoiced to find them, in their half-finished houses, happy wit- nesses of the Saviour's faithfulness to His word of promise. Eeviewing the work in all the islands, Mr. Thomas states, that the number of persons, who, in six years, had embraced Christianity, amounted to more than eight thousand. Towards the close of 1833, the mission was re- inforced by the arrival of the E.ev. Messrs. Charles Tucker and David Cargill.* Mr. Cargill was soon removed to the Fijis to commence a mission there with Mr. Cross. Mr. Tucker and his wife — a helpmeet — laboured diligently in the islands for ten years. Mr. Tucker's testimony, on his first arrival, was most favourable to the labourers already there, and to the fruit of their toil. "We have abundant cause for devout thanksgiving and praise to the God of all grace for the good He is doing among this interesting people. The ordinances of His house are generally seasons of refreshing ; and the people give evidence, by their regular and prayerful attendance on all the means of grace, that they love the habitation of God's house and the place where His honour dwelleth. Their upright walk and conversation evince the reality * Mr Woon having set some good leaven to work in Tonga, in the form of thirty thousand books, left the mission; and thus lost the pleasure of watching the result. He was aftei-wards employed as a Missionary in New Zealand. 238 SUCCESS AND TRIALS. of the change wrought in them. I never saw the Sabbath kept so holy as it is here ; and I never heard half so much singing and praying in any part of the world. To Grod be all praise, for He alone the work hath wrought !" The people were very fond of singing ; and it was a source of no less pleasure to the Missionaries to hear them. The people soon learned many of the tunes sung in the public worship of England. They sang Devizes, Irish, SJiirland, Job, Portugal New, and others. "With a leader, they succeeded very well ; but when by themselves, tunes composed in the major key were put into the minor, so that their hymns sounded like solemn dirges. You must not however suppose, that all difficulty was at an end. The wicked conduct of many English settlers, who defied Grod's laws and did all they could to check the progress of religion, was a constant source of trial. Some went so far as to tell the natives, that the Missionaries' religion was " a lie." Then the native character, though very susceptible of impression, was not remarkable for stability, and many who seemed to be awakened under the truth, returned to their former ways. Their goodness was as " a morning cloud," and as " the early dew ;" refreshing, but transient. The crews of English vessels, and the determined heathens, six thousand of whom were to be found in Tonga alone, did all they could to shake the stedfastness of the native converts. SUCCESS AND TKIALS. 239 Besides this, the Missionaries were concerned to knew that hundreds, nay thousands of those who professed Christianity were only in a state of hopeful prepara- tion for genuine conversion. They were like many in our own land, who have yielded the assent of their judgment to Christian truth, who sometimes feel almost persuaded to give their hearts to God ; but who have not yet brought forth " fruits meet for repentance," or received " the adoption of sons." Looking at the wonders already wrought by God's grace, at the needs-be for a still deeper and wider work, and at the word on which He who sent them caused them to hope, the feelings of the Missionaries might have been well expressed ia the words of Charles Wesley. "•Saw ye not the cloud arise, Little as a liumau hand ? Now it spreads along the skies, Hangs o'er all the thh'sty land : Lo ! the promise of a shower Drops already from above ; But tlie Lord will shortly pour, All the Spirit of His love !" THE CHURCHES MULTIPLIED. )l9/j|f^° HE progress of Christianity lias been often ■/^j^j^yj- marked by times of signal spiritual influence ; jgj^ times when the Spirit has been " poured from ^ "^ on high," till "the wilderness" has become " a fruitful field, and the fruitful field " has been ■counted for a forest." Such seasons have usually, perhaps always, been ushered in by the prayers and faith of a church in earnest, or of a few devout souls in the midst of a formal church. Before the first baptism of the Holy Grhost, the church in Jerusalem " continued with one accord in prayer and supplica- tion," waiting for "the promise of the Father; " and ever since then, those who have longed for the coming of the same Spirit to awaken a sleeping world, or to revive a dying church, have sought the blessing in the same way. So it was in the Friendly Isles before as remark- able an outpouring of the Holy Spirit as we find recorded in the history of the Church of Christ since iii'iv . 'f'i^^av THE CnUECHES MULTIPLIED. 2-11 the day of Pentecost, At A^avau, it was agreed to hold prayer-meetings in several places on the island for the special purpose of asking God to vouchsafe the higher and saving operations of His Spirit, so that the thousands Viho had come out of Pagan idolatry, and had forsaken their immoral practices, might be fully converted to God. These meetings were crowned hy God's blessing. The piety of the church members became deeper, and the spirit of grace and of suppli- cation was granted to them. A day came of great interest to the leaders of the classes. They had built a house, free of any expense to the mission, in wliich they might assemble for religious meetings. They met to set this building apart for church purposes. A prayer-meeting was held in the morning, and a lovefeast in the afternoon. The presence of the great Head of the Church made this day memorable. All hearts were touched. The constraining influence of divine love was felt, exciting gracious desires and prompting to renewed exertions. Messrs. Turner and Cargill, with a little band of praying and believing leaders, resolved that they would give themselves to more earnest intercession for a copious shower of heavenly blessings. Each promised the rest that he would enter into his own closet every day at noon, to plead for "this one thing." They had faith in Christ's promises : " If two of you shall agree on earth as touching anything that they shall ask, it shall be done for them of My Father which is in heaven." " If ye, being evil, know s 242 THE CHTJECHES MULTIPLIED. how to give good gifts unto your children, how much more shall your heavenly Pather give the Holy Spirit to them that ask Him ? " These prayers were soon and suddenly answered. A native local preacher was preaching at a village called, Utui, on the 23rd July, 1834, on Christ's compassion towards Jerusalem. The word came with power to the hearts of the whole congregation. All confessed themselves to be sinners, and many cried aloud in the agony of their souls. They would not leave the place, but remained together most of the night, seeking God's pardoning mercy; and many, before morning, found " the forgive- ness of sins." They had heard no new doctrine. Justification through faith in the merits of Christ's atoning death, had been often preached to them before, and they had listened unmoved ; but now the " wonderful things" of God's law, and the more wonderful things of His love, were " revealed " unto them by that Spirit who " searcheth all things, yea, the deep things of God," and whose office it is to " testify" of Christ. It was on a Tuesday, that these signs followed the preaching of the truth. The next Sabbath day at another village, the same results followed the ordinary service. Five hundred persons, the whole of the inhabitants of the place from the least to the greatest, joined in earnestly seeking salvation. Those who had been praying for an abundant blessing were amazed. They had asked largely ; but God gave more than they had asked or hoped; and they were yet to "see THE CHUBCHES MULTIPLIED. 243 greater things than these." The work spread from village to village, from island to island, till the whole of the people seemed to be moved by one impulse. In a single day, there was reason to believe, that more than one thousand persons were truly converted to God, The change was not now from damb idols merely ; but from sin to righteousness, from " the power of Satan unto God." Such was the spirit of enquiry, and such the pressing claims of those whose heart was set on obtaining a present salvation, that it was found necessary to give up the schools for a week or two, and to hold sis prayer-meetings every day. As soon as the Missionaries, or local preachers, (their efficient assistants) began to speak, the people were melted into tears, and multitudes fell on their faces, " calling on the name of the Lord." Many exclaimed, " Praise the Lord ! I never knew Jesus until now ! Now I do know Him ; He has taken away all my sins. I love Jesu Kalaisi!" Some were so filled with joy, that they cried out for hearts to praise the Lord. The whole island bowed before the power of God. The society soon increased to 3,066, of which number as many as 2,262, were the fruit of this extraordinary visitation from on high. The King and Queen, then staying at Vavau, were among those who experienced a saving change. The}^ joined hundreds of their people in penitent confessions of sin, kneeling with them to weep and pray. It was not, however, in the throng that they found the blessing they sought. They retired to their own house, and con- e2 244 a?nE chueches MrLTiPLiED. tinued together in earnest supplication till midnight •, when, like Banyan's pilgrim, they lost their burden at the foot of the cross, and had a new song put into their mouth. The king wrote to Mr, "Watkin, at Haabai, telling him " how great things Jesus had done unto him." Before the news from Vavau had reached Lifuka, that island was visited by some tokens of special good. Several persons were made partakers of divine grace. On the 9th August, the spirit of conviction was given abundantly. As at A'^avau an earnest of what would take place preceded the general blessing. The Missionaries and leaders met together, and felt that they had power with God, and prevailed. They adjourned to the chapel, where four or five hundred men, women, and children, "were pricked in their hearts," and began to cry, " Men and brethren, what shall we do ? " Some wept aloud, others smote upon their breasts Hke the publican, and breathed forth his plea, " God be merciful to me a sinner." The Missionaries went from one penitent to another, pointing their guilty and anxious spirits to " the Lamb of God who taketh away the sins of the world," praying with them, and teaching them how to pray. God is not " slack concerning His promise," and many found that He had heard them in "an acceptable time." Their souls were gladdened by His gracious smile, and " the spirit of bondage again to fear " became "the spirit of adoption." About one hundred that night laid hold of Christ as a Saviom*, and found THE CnUECHES MULTIPLIED. 245 "redemption through His blood, the forgiveness of sins, according to the riches of his grace," Many remained on their knees throughout the evening, and could scarcely be persuaded to separate as night drew on, though with the promise of meeting at day-break. Many went home with a bleeding heart, deeply wounded by the sword of the Spirit. These did not sleep, but spent the night in wrestling with the Angel of the Covenant — like Jacob, in energy and faith, and like him in success. The next morning, as soon as it was light, the chapel and the chapel-yard were crowded with people, all in earnest about their souls. " As soon as the service began," says Mr. Tucker, "the cries of the people began. They were melted into tears on every hand, and many of them cried aloud by reason of the disquietude of their souls. O, what a solemn, but joyful sight ! One thousand, or more, individuals bowed before the Lord, weeping at the feet of Jesus, and praying in an agony of soul. I never saw such distress ; never heard such cries for mercy, or such confession of sin before. These things were universal, from the greatest chiefs in the land to the meanest of the people. The Lord heard the sighing of the prisoners ; He bound up many a broken-hearted sin- ner in that meeting, and proclaimed liberty to many a captive. We were filled with wonder and gratitude, and lost in praise, on witnessing the Lord making bare His arm so gloriously in the sight of the heathen. We met again about nine o'clock, and had a similar scene ; hundreds wept aloud, and many trembled from 246 THE CHUECHES MULTIPLIED. head to foot, as though they were about to be judged at the bar of God. We were engaged the whole day iu this blessed work. I attended five services, and saw hundreds of precious souls made happy by a sense of the Saviour's love. There never was such a Sabbath in Haabai before ; it was, indeed, one of the days of the Son of Man. Many will remember it with pleasure throughout eternity, as the day of their adoption into the heavenly family. During the follow- ing week the concern of the people was so great, that they laid aside their work. "We had service twice every day but one : the chapel was always fuU. It was a week of Sabbaths, and of much prayer and praise. Not a day, or a night passed, but several were dis- burthened of their load of guilt and fear, by believing with their hearts unto righteousness." On the 24th August, a society-meeting was held at Lifuka, when one thousand persons were present ; and many gave a clear account of their conversion to God, of their enjoyment of the peace that passeth understanding, and of their blessed hope of being for ever with the Lord. This gracious work was not confined to Lifuka alone. It spread to the neighbouring islands, tiU the whole group felt its power. Mr. Tucker visited a small island not far ofi", where he found all the adult inhabitants, not one excepted, meeting in class ; and after administering the ordinance of baptism to forty- nine persons, he was able to add, all baptised into Christ's name. During the preceding fortnight, four THE CHUECHES MULTIPLIED. 247 huudred and fifty of these had been made happy in the assurance that Grod's anger was turned away from them, and that they were His adopted sons and daughters. At the little island of Foa, two-thirds of the people witnessed the same " good confession." Some of those who looked on during these seasons of religious awakening were, at first, greatly surprised and frightened. It seemed to them as though a new and fearful disease had broken out, from which there was no escaping ; and they ran from the chapel lest they should take the complaint and die. But they soon found out that all this weeping and praying was the utterance of sick souls that longed for a cure ; they began to know their own nature's disease, and sought and found healing beneath the hand of the Good Physician. In the Haabai Islands more than two thousand conversions took place in the course of a fortnight. Nor did this work stop here. PoUowing exactly the opposite direction to that of the first spread of Christianity in the islands, it reached Tonga last. On the 6th October, a canoe arrived there from Lifuka, having on board a local preacher, named Joel Maples. He brought an account of the wondrous work at Vavau and the Haabai group. At a prayer- meeting held the same day in the chapel, many persons became deeply affected by a painful conviction of their sin and danger. From that day the Christian natives assembled more frequently for prayer. Mr. Thomas persuaded the chief to set apart a day for 248 THE CHUECHES MULTIPLIED. special devotional exercises. At the time appointed, the people met, and the spirit of prayer was poured ont in an extraordinary degree. All present engaged in earnest pleading with God, while many, unable to to restrain their feelings, wept abundantly. The people held prayer-meetings in their own houses ; and, on some nights, the village of Nukualofa was heard to ring for hours with the voice of praise and prayer. The numbers brought to a saving knowledge of the truth were not so great at Tonga as in the other islands ; but they were sufficient to fill the hearts of the Missionaries with thanksgiving and hope, and to lead them to exclaim, " Praise the Lord ! Let all the people praise Him who only doeth wondrous things, and let the whole earth be filled with His glory ! Amen, and amen." The great work, of which this is but a faint out- line, included cases of many diff"erent kinds. Not only persons of all ages, but persons in very varied states of feeling were affected by it. Those who had resisted all attempt to move them, who seemed like dead trees, " marked to fall," suddenly showed signs of spiritual life, and brought " forth fruits meet for repentance." Backsliders who had wandered afar off" were again " made nigh by the blood of Christ," while the company of believers were filled with holy love, and were enabled to show forth more freely the praises of Him vfho had called them " out of darkness into His marvellous light." Mr. Thomas tells a remarkable story of the change THE ClIUECHES MULTIPLIED. 249 wrought on the mind of an Englishman, the accidental witness of these revival scenes. An English vessel touched at an islet, thirty miles from Vavau. The captain sent some of his men ashore for water, or firewood. One became separated from the rest, and when, after a few hours, he returned to the shore, he found that his companions had left him behind them, and that the ship was speeding on her homeward course. He was alone among a people speaking a strange language. There was no Missionary there ; the only teacher being a native. The Englishman wished to make himself friendly ; but he soon thought the people as strange as their tongue. Let him move where he might, he found nothing going on but singing and praying. At home, as well as at chapel, they knelt, and wept, and pleaded. He could not understand a single word, but he knew well what they were doing. He saw that their hearts were engaged in seeking salvation. Forgotten words came back to his memory, — words learned in a Sunday school, or at a mother's knee. He knew that he, too, had been a sinner, and he knew that Jesus Christ was the Saviour from sin. His hard heart was melted. The English sailor knelt down among the Islanders of the Pacific, and calling on the Father of the spirits of all flesh, through Him who died for all, he became another witness of Christ's power " to save to the uttermost." The depth of this work of grace was equal to its extent and to its rapid progress. The change in 250 THE CHTJECHES MULTIPLIED. the new converts was not " so apparent in their rap- turous joy as in the deep implantation in their minds of all Christian graces." They manifested in an eminent degree the mind that was in Christ Jesus. What was said of Stephen was true of many of the new leaders and local preachers, — they were " full of faith and of the Holy Ghost." They were of one heart and soul, each esteeming other better than himself. Warmly attached to their ministers, and very zealous in doing the work assigned them, happy in God's service, and most anxious for the good of souls, they were a source of much joy to the Mis- sionaries, and they carried a blessing with them among the people. The Sabbath was kept holy in the most extensive and literal sense. All worldly business was laid aside, and the whole day was employed in public or private devotion. None was known to spend its hallowed hours in idleness or in amusement ; and every day was marked by religious remembrance. With the daAvn of the morning, the incense from each family altar rose towards heaven; and the last act, before retiring to rest, was to unite in singing and prayer ; while stated times were set apart each day for closet retirement, and communion with God. Their prayers were simple in expression, powerful, and prevailing. They had learned the secret of successful pleading, — "praying in the Holy Ghost." The people did not imagine that feeling constitutes the whole of religion. They set themselves to work THE CnUEClIES MULTIPLIED. 251 more diligently. They built better houses and paid more attention to the improvement of their land. Mr. Turner sums up his remarks on the great work at Vavau in these words : — " AVe may say that this people are becoming more civilised, industrious, economical, and obedient. They are wishful to imitate Europeans in everything excellent ; but they are afraid of evil." Happy they, and safe too, whose abounding love and joy are thus guarded by holy fear. From this time the mission history of Yavau and Haabai is the history of a Christian church, while at Tonga we have to mark the struggles of a small body of devout Christians against the formidable opposition of a strong heathen party. More Mission- aries from England were earnestly requested. They were needed to watcli over the new converts, who, though sincere and posessing the germ of all Christian excellence, were but partially instructed. Their love did not yet abound " in all knowledge." A nation had been born in a day ; and the new-born souls were earnestly desiring " the sincere milk of the word," that they might "grow thereby." But as little children need parental care for many years that they may grow up strong and healthy, active and useful, so did these young Christians need guidance and training, and wholesome discipline too, that their piety might become mature and vigorous. Mr. Tucker says of Haabai : " I shall soon be left here, with more than 3,500 members in society, 161 class leaders, and 252 THE CUIJECHES MULTIPLIED. upwards of 70 local preachers, under my care, with but a slight knowledge of the language." Missionaries were needed too, to carry the Gospel to the islands beyond, many of which had already sent messengers to ask for spiritual help. Fiji and Samoa, Nina (Keppel's Island), and Niua Fooua, were all anxious to receive teachers. It will not be possible to trace in minute detail the progress of Christianity in the Friendly Islands from the year 1834. We can but glance over the whole, resting now and then on events that may seem to be specially worthy of note. We will, if you please, first look at the work, for the next five or six years, in Haabai ; then in Vavau ; and then in the more remote islands ; reserving Tonga, and its very different story, for another chapter. Haabai. — Not long after the blessed change in the Bang and Queen of Haabai and Vavau, they were both made class leaders. They fulfilled the duties of their ofiice with Christian diligence, watching over the souls committed to their trust, and setting them an example of personal devotedness to God. The King soon became a local preacher. He did not presume upon his high civil dignity ; but conducted himself in the Church of God with becoming humility. He took his turn as a local preacher in common with the others, and has been known to set off on a Saturday morning to fulfil his Sunday appointment at an island fifty miles oft". Mr. Tucker heard him preach one of THE CHURCHES MULTIPLIED. 253 his first sermons. The great court house, more than seventy feet long, would not contain the people who thronged to hear their King. Every chief on the island, and all the local preachers were present. The King led the singing. He preached with great plain- ness and simplicity, and in strict accordance with the teaching of God's word ; dwelling on the humility and love of the Saviour, the cleansing efl&cacy of His atoning blood, and the obligations under which we are laid to serve and glorify Him. But a few years before, part of this very congregation might have been seen in the same house preparing guns, spears, and clubs in order to slay their fellow men ; and waiting to be led forth to battle by the great warrior who was now the royal preacher. On the 21st August, 1835, Mr. Tucker had a long conversation with the King, on the subject of slavery. He told what had been done in England towards the destruction of the system, and how the West Indian slaves had been set at liberty. It was after this con- versation and on the very same day, that King George, caUed all his own slaves together, and gave them their freedom, as has been stated in a former chapter. The King, whose mind was always busy, devising some good thing for his people, resolved on building a new chapel at Lifuka. The foundation stone was laid in July, 1835, on the site of the old chapel ; and the erection of the new structure occupied about two months. It was the largest and most elegant build- ing that had ever been erected in the Friendly Islands ; 254 THE CnUECHES MULTIPLIED, one hundred and ten feet by forty-five inside. All the chiefs from the neighbouring islands met together to help forward the work, attended by about one thousand people. Most of the chiefs and Matabulis engaged in plaiting sinnet, while the common people did the heavier work. The pillars and timber used in the framework were brought from other islands. The labour was equally divided among the inhabitants of the whole group ; and among these there was a pleasant rivalry, each party trying to do their work the best. J^ails are not used in building by the natives ; but the timbers are fastened together with Icafa. Kafa is made of the fibres of the cocoa-nut- husk, dyed black and red and plaited together. The different colours are interwoven with great nicety and have a pretty effect. The large body of people drawn together on this occasion worked hard during the day, happy in each others society; and at night, instead of employing themselves in folly or sin, they regularly attended the class and prayer-meetings. One morning, Mr. Tucker went to the chapel, to consult with the King about the size and arrangement of the communion place, when he found that George had a scheme of his own. He brought out several handsomely-carved spears, spears that had often been used in war, and that had come to him as an heir-loom from his ancestors. These be converted into rails for the communion-place ; while two clubs of beautiful manufacture, formerly worshipped as gods, were fixed at the bottom of the pulpit-stairs. TUE CIIUECHES MULTIPLIED. 255 It bad been tbougbt tbat tbe new, large cbapel would bold as many people as would ever attend at one time. Not so. Tbe morning of tbe 9tb Sep- tember dawned. Tbe sky was fair, and no sign of storm kept timid people at borne. Canoes from all tbe neigbbouring islands were borne ligbtly over a quiet sea, and unexpected crowds tbronged towards tbe new cbapel. Only tbe aged and tbe sick re- mained bebind. "Witbin tbe buUding tbey literally sat upon one anotber, and yet tbere were as many outside as witbin. Tbe King preacbed in tbe morning from 1 Kings, viii., Solomon's prayer at tbe dedication of tbe Temple. During tbe first prayer, bundreds of tbe people were in tears, and Mr. Tucker wept too, for joy, on account of wbat be saw and beard. His heart could sing — " Our conquering Lord Hath prosjjered His word, Hatli made it prevail, And mightily shaken the kingdom of hell. His arm he hath bared, And a people prepared His glory to show, And witness the power of His passion below." At tbe close of tbe King's sermon, Mr. Tucker baptised twenty adults. And now be could say, tbat in tbe whole group of islands tbere was only one unbap- tised grown person. He was detained at home by illness. In tbe afternoon, Mr. Tucker preached to the largest congregation he had ever addressed. He took their thoughts from the happy present to the 256 THE CHTJECHES MULTIPLIED. still happier future ; and spoke of the roomier man- sions and the better place that Christ had gone to prepare for His followers. No collection was made, for the chapel was out of debt. All the materials and the labour had been presented a free-will offering to the Lord. On the 15th August, 1836, Mr. Tucker held a meeting in grateful remembrance of the glorious outpouring of the Spirit which took place two years before. Such visitations are ever memo- rable. The Church of Scotland still has a thanks- giving service on the day following her Communion Sabbath, in acknowledgment of the awakening and revival at Cambuslang. The chapel at Lifuka was full ; and, while thanking God for past mercies and pleading for another baptism from heaven, many received a fresh supply of the Spirit of Jesus Christ. It was a time of holy joy, and of fervent prayer, mingled with songs of praise. The schools improved and prospered. Mr. Tucker remodelled them, placing the people in classes ac- cording to their advancement in knowledge. At the beginning of the year, 1836, many were in the alphabet class who profited so much by this new arrangement that, in the course of a few months, they were able to, read with fluency. Many aged people conquered the difficulty of learning to read by dint of perseverance, and rejoiced greatly when they found that they could, by themselves, make out the meaning of the Scriptures. The schools were always opened THE CHURCHES MULTIPLIED. 2o7 ■with singing and prayer. Mr. Tucker made a point of catechising the congregation once every Sabbath- day, and he had a question-meeting every Monday evening. Native books were in great request. The people, at first, would give away their books to their friends, after reading them ; but it soon became their aim to collect a complete set of all tliat had been printed, and to sew them together. These books were their chief treasure. They generally took their little libraries with them when setting out on a journey or voyage. Altogether there were 55 schools ; 51-0 teachers, and 2,989 scholars. Besides these, there was another school of fifty scholars, established by Mrs. Tucker. She had been the only European lady m the whole group of islands for more than sixteen months. But though so long without the comfort of an English sister's company, converse, and sympathy, lack of which no other kind of friendship can fully supply, she was too busy to be dull. In her school she taught the natives writing, the first rules of arithmetic, and the principles of geography. In the place of globes, she drew out several maps, and taught four of the natives to copy them. A class of six of the more intelligent learned the English language. The King and Queen were among the scholars, and so were several local preachers and leaders. Sometimes the local preachers would go to Mrs. Tucker's house, and ask her to help them to make their sermons ; and I have heard that they generally went away well contented. Mrs. Tucker did not neglect more womanly 258 THE CHURCHES MULTIPLIED. accomplishments. Some of the natives began to shew a wish to be dressed in English costume on their " high days and holidays." Mrs. Tucker taught the women to plait and make up bonnets ; and one fine Sunday morning, twelve of the female class-leaders, including Queen Charlotte, made their appearance at chapel in the first bonnets ever worn by the ladies of the Friendly Islands. They looked very neat, and some- what gay, with their pretty plaits and trimmings of glazed calico. Many more would have been made, but print and calico ran short, and so did needles and thread. They regretted this, not merely for their own dress, but because they could not make sufficient covers for their dearly prized books. In September, 1836, Mr. Tucker received the following gratifying letter from a teacher in charge of the people of Tongu: — " Mr. Tucker, — I, Lot, your son in the gospel of Jesus Christ, make known to you the love of Grod which has come to this land. The Holy Spirit has been poured out upon the men, women, and children. On the 11th day of August, after I returned from Lifuka, we met together for prayer ; it was to commemorate the great revival which took place two years ago ; and we immediately received the blessing of the Lord. On Friday, we again assembled for worship, when the love of God was manifested in abundance to all the people. I thank the Lord for imparting to us the good thing, for the famine is great to the flesh, but our souls are greatly enriched, and I earnestly desire it may be thus for ever and ever. THE CHUECUES MULTIPLIED. 250 Amen. My love to you and Mrs. Tucker is great ; and this is the end of the writing of your son in the gospel of Jesus Christ." The famine of which Lot speaks, was the conse- quence of two awful storms. The second was a perfect hurricane. Nearly all the fruits of the earth were destroyed. The once fertile islands were made desolate, and the natives were reduced to eating the roots of the trees in order to sustain life. The scarcity of food, and the bad quality of such as could be procured, brought on diseases of A^arious kinds and death. Many whose constitution was sickly were carried off; and the survivors suffered great privations. This season of severe trial, tested the graces of those whose life in Christ was new ; and the hearts of the Missionaries were cheered by the evidence given in the conduct of the natives of the depth and reality of their Christian principles. If a famine like this had occurred in their heathen state, they would have plundered each other of anything to be seen in the shape of food ; quarrels Avould have followed and many lives been sacrificed. Now they showed Chris- tian resignation and patience. As many as a hundred and ten were removed by death ; among whom were two local preachers, and three female class leaders. They died in faith, and in sure and certain hope of a resurrection to eternal life. Mr. Tucker visited numbers on their deathbed, and rejoiced to hear their simple and clear testimony to the truth of God's s 2 260 THE CHUKCHES MULTIPLIED. promise, and the preciousness of Christ's blood. " There are three ■words," said a dying saint in Anglesey, an exemplary Christian, whose life had been spent in doing good, " There are three words in the Epistle to the Hebrews that cheer me now — promise ; hlood; oath.'''' Tes ; "the precious promise of the gospel ; the atoning blood of the Mediator ; the unchanging oath of Jehovah;" these alone can enable a soul to pass joyfully through the closing scene ! whether he have spent a long life in intelligent and active service ; or whether, like the Haabai converts, he have but just opened his eyes on a Saviour and then closed them in death. This famine led to the removal of many chui'ch members to Vavau — that Island furnishing a good supply of food. A second hurricane visited the Haabai Islands some time after, stripping them of their beautifid. and usefvd verdure, and throwing down the mission chapel, among other ruined buildings. Two or three attacks of epidemic disease were added to the afflictions of these people. God's children must have chastisement ; but it is for their profit that they " might be partakers of His holiness." The church at Haabai grew in piety. Vavatt. — Here, in 1835, we find our old friend, Mr. Thomas, located, caring for the interests of a large and prosperous infant church. Mr. Thomas taught the Vavauans a new lesson ; that they ought to do something towards supporting the cause of God. As they had not gold or silver, he asked for a portion THE CnURCHES MULTIPLIED. 2G1 of their time. He gave them seeds, aud they fouud laud, and planted from six to eight hundred j-ams. These the people were to dress, and when ripe, dig up and take to Mr. Thomas, who would use them as articles of barter, and so save the funds of the society. "With the same view of increasing and directing their Christian charity, a Missionary meeting was held at Vavau, on the 2nd May, 1836, the date of the anni- versary of the parent society. The people flocked from all the islands in the group to attend it. The first resolution expressed their gratitude to Almighty God, for sending His only Son to save them from sin and death. This was proposed by King George, who addressed the meeting in a lively and moving strain. Some other natives, all local preachers, spoke on the occasion. No collection was made at the first meeting ; but an " Auxiliary Wesleyan Methodist ^Missionary Society " was formed.* Two years after we find the people making handsome presents of native produce and manufacture ; cloth mats, fish hooks, baskets, fowls, hogs, yams, shells, &c. Pre- paratory sermons were preached. The King took the chair on the day of the meeting, and native addresses were delivered. The assembly consisted, besides the Vavauans, of people from Tonga, Haabai, Fiji, * In October of the same year, a branch Missionary society was formed at Haabai. The list of subscriptions was very long. It contained 683 names, and in most cases a name stood for a family. Heathen gods, sacred clubs, whales' teeth, formerly objects of worship, were among the things contributed. The amount realised by the articles sold by auction was £23 3s. 2d. 262 THE CHUKCHES MULTIPLIED. Keppel's Island, Niua Eoou, Wallis's Island, Tahiti and Savage Island. All were delighted with the meeting, which lasted six hours. In October, 1837, Mr. Thomas left his station to attend the district meeting at Lifuka. On returning home, he was told that more Missionai-ies had arrived. His joy at the pleasant intelligence was soon checked, when he learned ' that the new Missionaries were a Homan Catholic Bishop, and his companions, sent out from a Missionary Institution in France. These gentlemen had already had an interview with the King, (who was at that time residing at Vavau) and had asked permission to leave two or three of their party on the island. The King asked for what purpose they came, adding, " I and my people have all turned to God." His lordship told the King, that his own religion was the old and true faith, and that the religion taught by the Methodist Missionaries, was one that had lately sprung up. The King said, " We know but of one God, to whom we have all turned ; and to His Son Jesus Christ our Lord." He then advised the bishop to wait until the return of the Missionaries from Lifuka. The bishop, with five others, three of whom were priests, accordingly waited upon Mr. Thomas and his colleague, who, on hearing their wish to leave Missionaries on the island, observed that that matter must be settled between themselves and the King ; that King George, not the Missionaries, governed the islands. The bishop most politely assured Mr. Thomas, that he did not wish to interfere THE CHUBCirES MULTIPLIED. 263 Avitli the instructiou of the natives ; he merely wished to leave two or three of his people to learn the language. He afterwards repeated this statement to the King, limiting the time of the priests' stay to two or three months. The King saw through this artifice, and doubting whether the priests would learn much of Tonguese in so short a time, asked in reply, " If they were to go away in two or three months, why cannot you as well take them away in the ship that brought them ?" On being pressed to consent, the King said, " It is not my mind that they should stay." Unwilling to give up his scheme for the religious improvement of Vavau, the bishop once more urged the King to take time, to consult the Missionaries, and then to give his answer. But King George saw no need for study or for consultation, and an emphatic " No " settled the question. The bishop then bowed to the King, who was sitting on his mat, shook hands with him and with Queen Charlotte, and took his leave, Mr. Thomas suggested, that he shoidd go to some island as yet unvisited by Christian teachers ; and he took care to say, that the Methodists had taken Missionary possession of Fiji, Navigators' Islands, Keppel's and Boscawen's Islands, and of Niua Poou : adding, that Rotumah and Wallis's Island were not forgotten by them. Before his ship left the harbour, the bishop was furnished with a few copies of books printed in the language of Tonga, and of some prepared for Piji and Samoa. INIr. Thomas was not sorry to hear 264 THE CHURCHES MULTIPLIED. the bishop say, that he and his party had been repulsed wherever they had called. This incident showed the necessity for an increase of Protestant Missionaries to watch over the infant churches. Exposed as they were to the attacks of so wily a foe as Popery has ever proved itself, the young converts were not safe unless they added to their "faith, knowledge." Towards the close of 1838, an untoward affair happened. The principal chapel, ninety-six feet long by forty-five wide, a beautiful specimen of Tonguese workmanship, was burned down, not by accident but by design. This grievous offence was committed by the son of an Englishman and a Tahitian woman. The people were put to great inconvenience, as they had not another building large enough for their con- gregations. It was a national calamity ; for the erection of so large a chapel taxes the strength of the whole people. King Grcorge was desirous of governing his people with wisdom as well as with kindness. He found that great evils arose from chiefs and private persons taking the law into their own hands. He wished that impartial justice should be dealt out to the poor as well as to the rich, to the servant as well as the master. In March, 1839, he determined on giving his people a written code of laws. He appointed four of his chiefs as Judges and Magistrates. They were to sit once a month to hear and decide all cases of complaint that might arise. In the presence of THE CHUECHES MULTIPLIED. 265 .i3seinbled thousands of his people, he I'ead and com- mented upon his code of laws, a copy of which he gave to each of the governing chiefs for the guidance of himself and those under his authority. All appeared to be satisfied with this arrangement. Though this first code of laws did not meet all the cases that were brought before the Judges, yet it was a great help to their decisions, and it served to establish principles of order and justice. Founded on a Christian basis, it aided the Missionaries in their eff'orts to enforce a pure morality. Many alterations and additions have been made within the last fifteen years, and still further improvements are likely to take place soon. The laws, as written at first, referred to open acts of crime ; to the worship of God on the Sabbath ; to the chiefs' rule over their people ; to industry and the cultivation of land ; to the conduct of Englishmen and foreigners on shore ; and to other matters of minor importance. Tou may, perhaps, feel interested in reading King George's preamble to his first code of laws. " These are the names of the King and the chiefs at Vavau, Haafuluhao : — George, the King. Johe SoaTcai, Steward or Governor. Asaiasi Veikune, Chief Judge or magistrate. Eliesa Kijihiji, Judge. Jiqfilosi Kaianuanu, Judge. I, George, make known this n\y mind to the chiefs of the diff"erent parts of Haafuluhao, also to all my 266 THE CHUBOHES MULTIPLIED. people. May j^ou be very liappy ! It is of the God of heaven and earth that I have been appointed to speak to you. He is King of kings and Lord of lords. He doeth whatsoever He pleaseth. He lifteth up one, and putteth down another. He is righteous in all His works. We are all the work of His hands, and the sheep of His pasture ; and His will towards us is, that we should be happy. Therefore it is that I make known to you all, to the Chiefs, and gover- nors, and people, as well as the different strangers and foreigners that live with me, " That the laws of this our land prohibit" , &c. One or two specimens may be given of the laws that foUow : — " My mind is this : That each chief or head of a people shall govern his own people, and them only : and it is my mind that you each shew love to the people you have under you : also, that you require of them to be industrious in labouring to support the government, and in their duties to you their chief; and that you divide to each one of them land for their own use, that each one may have means of living, of supporting his family, of procuring necessaries, and of contributing to the cause of God." " And it is my mind : That the land should be brought into cultivation and be planted. Hence, I inform you, it is unlawful for you to turn your hogs outside the fence or sty. In case of a pig being found eating the yams, or destroying the produce of the THE CHURCnES MULTIPLIED. 267 earth, the owner of the pig shall be apprised directly of it, that he may shut his pig up ; also he shall make amends for the mischief done. In case the owner pays not attention to his pig, either to confine it or to recompense the damage done, and the pig is again found eating the plantation, it shall then be lawful to kill the pig, and the person owning the plantation shall claim it." " In case of a person retailing ardent spirits, he shall pay a fine to the king of twenty-five dollars, and be liable to have the spirits taken from him." " In case a man leaves his wife and escapes, she shall claim two plantations, and whatever other pro- perty he may have left." " In case a woman forsakes her husband, she shall be brought back again to him ; and in case she will not remain with him, it shall not be lawful for her to marry any other man while her husband lives." The last code consists of forty-three sections, with numerous subdivisions. It includes some items very chafing to lazy people. " XXXVI. — Tlic law referring to men. Tou shall work and persevere in labouring for the support of your family, as well as yourself, and in order to trade and contribute to the cause of God, and the chief of the land ; and each man shall seek his piece of land to cultivate. Any man not willing to work, he shall neither be fed nor assisted ; all such persons being 268 THE CHUKCHES MULTIPLIED. useless to tlie land and its iuhabitants, and unprofit- able to their friends. "XXXVII. — Tlie law referring to women. You must work, women, and persevere in labouring to clothe your husbands and children. Unmarried women shall be useful to their relatives and parents. If they do not work, they shall not be fed or assisted ; for one assisting the indolent, is supporting that which is an evil."* Before the close of 1839, welcome news came from England. The Rev. John Waterhouse, an experi- enced and highly-valued minister, who had for many years laboured acceptably in English circuits, had consented to remove, with his family, to Australia, to take the general superintendence of the missions there, and in Polynesia. And to this was added, that a vessel, the Triton, had been purchased and fitted out, by the Wesleyan Missionary Committee, with special reference to the peculiar circumstances of the South Sea Mission. Such a vessel had long been needed, to convey the Missionaries from one station to another, and thus lessen the risk attending voyages in those dangerous seas ; as well as to bring regular * A copy of the first code of laws may be seen in the Report of the "Wesleyan Missionary Society for the year ISiO ; Appendix A., page 129. And a copy of the present laws, with the latest improvements, is to be found at page 434 of " The Southern World," recently pubhshed by the Kev. Robert Young ; a book that contains much interesting information respecting the present state of the Friendly Islanders. THE CnUECnES MULTIPLIED, 269 supplies at stated times, sucli as would ensure some degree of domestic comfort. The Triton on her first IMissionary voyage, brought two colleagues to aid tlie devoted men already engaged in the Friendly Islands ; Messrs. Francis Wilson, and Kevern. She was laden with goods, partly intended for the houses of the Missionaries, which were almost destitute of articles of earthenware, tinware, and ironmongery ; and partly to be used in barter with the natives. JSTiUA-ToBUTABU ; OR, Keppel's Islanj). — In the early part of the year 1835, the Missionaries decided on commencing a mission at the Samoa, or Navigator's Islands ; and the Eev. Peter Turner was chosen for that purpose. He was to call at Niua on his way, and remain there a few weeks. That island had been taught only by natives from Vavau. Mr. and Mrs. Tvirner, with a few native teachers, embarked in a small vessel, built by a sailor at the Fijis. They had a stormy passage, meeting some of the heavy gales so common in those latitudes. For seven days and nights they were tossed to and fro, without regular food or rest. At last, by God's kind providence, they sighted Nina, where a longing people were on the look-out for them. Squalls and contrary winds still held their little vessel back. As soon, however, as it was descried from shore, the teacher and some of the people came ofi' in a small boat. The sea was rough, and the little canoe, tilted on the top of the waves, or pitched into the deep furrows below, was every moment in danger of an 270 THE CHURCHES MULTIPLIED. upset. They succeeded in reaching the vessel, and seeing a Missionary on board, they would not remain more than a few minutes ; but hastened back to tell the joyful news. The mission party could not land. Another anxious night passed, and it was witli the greatest diflB.culty that they were kept from drifting out to sea. There was only one practicable landing-place ; and even there were fearfal reefs with tremendous breakers rolling over them. About forty men waited in tlie water — some up to the waist, some up to the neck, some swimming about. Those managing the canoe that brought the mission party from the vessel to the landing-place, watched till a sea came rolhug in, and then put forth all their strength to paddle, so as to be carried along with it ; while the party on watch caught the canoe to prevent its being dashed to pieces on the rocks. After the natives had landed, Mr. and Mrs. Turner ventured to follow in the same mode, and got safe to shore, with only a little wetting. The next day, the weather being calmer, the vessel that had brought them came to an anchorage. The Island of Niua is about six miles long, and one mile and a half broad. It is very low, and is surrounded by a coral reef that extends, in some places, half-a-mile from the beach. There were about 600 men, women, and children, living here. The population had been decreasing for some time owing to the repeated loss of canoes in their rough seas. Several had been drifted to Samoa THE CnURCUES MULTIPLIED. 271 and Fiji, while others had foundered on their passage. Two years before, the king of the place had prepared two canoes for a voyage to Niua Poou. One hun- dred and fifty persons embarked. A teacher sent from Vavau, David Tokiilo, was of the party. They were out at sea six days, and though they sighted land, yet they could not reach it. At last the wind became stronger, and the sea heavier. One of the canoes filled with water, and sank. Seventy persons were drowned. Among these were the teacher and his wife. He was a quiet, sensible, pious man. He had given up all for Christ's sake, and his life's aim was to do good. His body was found afterwards. His books of Scripture, tightly grasped in his hand, were washed on shore with him. " He died," says Mr. Turner, " with the word of life in his hand, and I have no doubt with the spirit of life in his heart." Mr. Turner soon found that he had much to do at Niua. The thi'ee native teachers were going on well, and instructing the people in all that they them- selves knew ; but, like Apollos, they needed to learn the way of God more perfectly. They did not clearly see the way of a sinner's approach to God through faith in Jesus, " the end of the law for righteousness." The distinct teaching of this and kindred doc- trines soon produced the same mighty changes here as had been wrought in the other islands. Many began to say " Sir, we would see Jesus." The King, Gogo, though he meant to be a Cliristian, had a hard struggle before he could part with all for Christ's sake. 272 THE CHUECHES MrLTIPLIED. It seemed to liim impossible to give up his wives. Mr. Turner had not been many days on the island before he did his best to persuade him to take this decisive step. He acknowledged that Mr. Turner was right ; but still he lingered. However, among those who were under concern for their souls were two of the King's wives. They were willing to sacrifice all earthly good, so that they might find " treasure in heaven." Day by day the King's sense of duty gained strength ; and, on the 25th March, much to the surprise and delight of his people, he repaired to Mr. Turner's house, saying that he was determined to do the will of God, and to retain only one wife. The next day he came again, accompanied by one of his former wives, her to whom his heart clave most closely, and requested Mr. Turner to marry them in due form. While this struggle was going on in the King's mind, the Spirit of God was working wonders among his people. Many became earnest seekers of salva- tion. Mourning for sin was followed by the peace of God. One of the teachers and his wife stood up among the people, and declared that something new had come to them, that their hearts were filled with divine love, and that they felt willing to do anything for God. The same baptism of the Holy Ghost fell upon the other teachers, and all joined in urging the people to seek to be made partakers of a like blessing. In the course of a few weeks more than 500 people were enabled to testify, humbly yet surely, that God, for Christ's sake, had blotted out all their sins. TUE CHUECEES MULTIPLIED. 273 The King gave orders for tlie erection of two chapels, and the people made all haste to get them finished dui-ing Mr. Turner's stay. One of them was opened on the 12th of April. No sooner had the service commenced than a hallowing influence pervaded the place, and all seemed to bow before the Lord with deep solemnity of feeling. Two days after, the second chapel, in another part of tlie island, was set apart for divine worship. Here a love-feast was held, and many of the new converts spoke clearly as to their justifi- cation by faith. The King and Queen spoke well. The King said, " I stand up to make known my mind unto you. I have been a very wicked and bad man ; I think the very worst of men. I think on the good- ness of the Lord to me while wicked, in saving me from the sea when I was shipwrecked. Many were lost on that occasion ; but I am saved. "When first the lotu came to the laud, I worshipped deceitfully before the Lord. I continued to do my old ways, and followed my old mind. Even when the Missionary came, my mind was hard and my life wicked ; but, I praise the Lord, He has had mercy upon my soul. I obtained this great love on Friday last, when in my class ; and now I love the Lord Jehovah." • Soon after, both he and the Queen were baptised ; and on the 21st May, the King preached his first sermon. He was a man of considerable talents ; he read very well, wrote a good hand, had a pleasing enunciation and an eloquent tongue. His sermons surpassed those of any of his people. His heart was T 274 THE CHUECHES MULTIPLIED. now fully set on carrying on tlie work of God at home and abroad. He said, on one occasion, " I know that I love the Lord, and that He loves me. I desire very much to do something for Him. I am pained for others who are still ignorant ; and I wish to tell them of the Lord Jesus : I much desire that a ship should come in, that I might take some teachers to Uvea, (Wallis's Island). When I think of my own past wickedness, I am much ashamed before the Lord and the people. I hate all these old things. I do pray unto the Lord, and will pray." The people of Niua improved rapidly. They began to build a better kind of house for themselves, and they were abundant in offerings of such things as they had towards the support of the Missionary and the Christian teachers. Their eagerness for spiritual food was very great. It was pleasing to see them after hearing a sermon, retire to their own homes to talk it over. Mr. Turner says, that they would sometimes remember and repeat nearly the whole of a sermon. This habit helped to fix what they heard in their memory. It is a good plan ; and will answer in England quite as well as at Niua. Mr. Turner left Niua early in June, rejoicing that he had prolonged his stay among the people prepared of the Lord. He had been, by God's blessing, the means of leading the greater part of the inhabitants to a more perfect knowledge of the truth. Eeligion had produced a great change in a short time. The people had become industrious, happy, and liberal. THE CHURCHES MULTIPLIED. 275 There had been scarcely any instances of backsliding among them ; ver^^ few irregularities. A look had suflficed to check any impropriety of conduct. Tlie following is a schedule of the state of the society at Niua, when Mr. Turner left the island. TOTAL. Persons Meeting in Class — Males, 239 ; Females, 275 . 514 ,, Baptised— Adults, 514 ; Children, 200 . . . 714 „ Married 240 Schools, 4. Scholars, 512. Teachers, 45. Chapels, 2. Exhorters, 12. Leaders, 24. Mr. Turner's removal was not followed by any decrease in the King's missionary ardour. He was resolved to carry the good news of salvation to those whose hearts had not yet been gladdened by its coming. Not many months passed by before he set out for Uvea, accompanied with about forty-five of his men. The King of Uvea, a relative of Gogo, would not receive his sayings. He thought the people of Niua too young in religion themselves to be fit teachers of others ; and, in the pride of his heart, he scorned the message and the messengers. He pro- mised Gogo to take care of him, till he could return to his own home ; but this pledge was broken. In some way or other, the praying party gave ofience to the heathens, and these resolved to go to war. They were ui-ged on by a chief from Tonga, who had left Vavau a year before rather than turn to God, and whose hatred to the truth was ever on the increase. The afiair ended in the destruction of King Gogo and most of his party, besides t2 276 THE chtjeches multiplied. thirteen of the natives of Uvea. The zeal of the Niua Christians may not have been tempered with discretion ; but we must admire the self-sacrificing love to souls that led them to run so great a risk. " He that loseth his life for My sake, shall keep it unto life eternal." " I saw under the altar the souls of them that were slain for the word of God, and for the testimony which they held. And they cried with a loud voice, saying. How long, O Lord, holy and true, dost thou not judge and avenge our blood on them that dwell on the earth ? And white robes were given unto every one of them ; and it was said unto them, that they should rest yet for a little season, until their fellow-servants also, and their brethren, that should be killed as they were, should be fulfilled." — Eev. vi.9, 10, 11. At the time when the men from Niua were killed, all the women of the party were saved alive. Among the desolate most desolate, was Eliza Ann, the married wife of the slain King. She was a fine- looking young woman ; and it is said, that before the dispute that ended in her husband's death, she had been much admired by the King of Uvea. He now told her that she was to come and live with him. Eliza Ann had not forgotten poor Gogo ; besides she could not bear the thought of becoming one of the many wives of a heathen chief. Her heart answered, " How can I do this great wickedness, and sin against God ?" She made up her mind that it was better to THE CnUKCHES MULTIPLIED. 277 die, than to obey the chief. So she rau away into the bush. There she lived for two months, picking fruit and pulling up such roots as she could find, in order to keep herself alive. Poor living, solitude, and sorrow, wasted her strength, and when at last her hiding-place was found out by a Tonga man, she seemed to be very near death. He took her to his own house, and she began to make arrangements for her burial. The King of Uvea heard that she had been brought back, went to the house where she was, and ordered the people at hand to hold her up that he might look at her. He then commanded her to eat some food, saying, that if she did not eat instantly, she should be fastened to a piece of wood and thrown into the sea. Food was given to her, and after a time she began to recover. The King visited her again in the course of a few days, found her looking much better, and ordered her to go to his house. Eliza Ann positively refused to do so. He went a second time on the same errand ; but she remained firm. He then left her, expecting that she would alter her mind by and by. But her tears and prayers had been marked by One, who, in every temptation, makes a way for the escape of His own people. A canoe belonging to King George was drifted as far as Niua. The Christians made frequent short excursions in this vessel, returning in good time, so as not to excite the fears of the heathen, whose prey they seemed to be. One day, they set sail as before, with Eliza Ann on board. The wind was favourable ; they seized the 278 THE CHUECHES MULTIPLIED. happy moment, and bore away to Fortuma, at nearly a hundred miles' distance. Five nights of hard toiling followed, and then Eliza Ann was landed safely on her own loved island. Samoa. — When the Wesleyan Methodist Mission- aries entered Samoa, it was at the earnest request of large numbers of the people, and with the sanction of the committee at home. The Eev. Peter Turner landed at Manono in June, 1835, and met with a hearty welcome. Mr. Turner had studied the Samoan language at Tonga and at Niua, and was in part pre- pared to enter upon his labo ars. It was not long before hundreds, nay thousands, of the Samoans embraced the lotu. Mr. Turner's delightful accounts of the work of God among these people induced the Mission- aries of the Friendly Islands to send another of their number, the Rev. Matthew Wilson, to assist Mr. Turner. About the time that the Wesleyan Missionaries occupied Samoa, the London Society began a mission there. The Eev. Mr. Piatt landed in August 1835, two months after Mr. Turner. Native teachers belonging to that society, Earotongans, had been employed at Samoa for some time previously. The Islands are large and thickly-peopled, and there seemed to be plenty of room and plenty of work for both societies. Meantime, an arrangement was entered into by the directors of the London Society and the committee of the Wesleyan Methodist Missionary Society, by which the Samoan group was to be given THE CIIDECUES MULTIPLIED. 279 up to the sole occupaucy of the Loudou Missionaries, while the Methodists were to have the entire charge of the Fiji group. The motive of this arrangement was praiseworthy. It was thought likely to promote brotherly love and the spread of religion. Samoa and Fiji were both regarded as fallow ground, equally needing Christian teaching ; and the arrangement entered into seemed just, equitable, and kind. Those at home who decided on the case were not in posses- sion of facts that might have changed their judgment. The voice of the converted Methodist Samoans was not heard in the matter ; and they viere, not intention- ally, but actually, treated as though they were children, to be turned this way or that, at the will of another. When the news of this arrangement reached Samoa the new converts strongly demurred ; they were sure that there was some mistake. The Missionaries were of the same opinion ; so they agreed to defer their removal till they could lay the . state of the mission before their fathers and brethren at home, and hear again from them on the subject. The committee felt themselves bound by honour and by Christian feeling to adhere to their former decision. Their word had passed, and they could not recal it. They accordingly came to the following resolution : — " Dec. eth, 1837.— That Mr. P. Turner, and col- league or colleagues who may have subsequently joined him, are affectionately, but positively, required 280 THE CHUECHES MULTIPLIED. to relinquisli forthwitli their operations in the Navi- gator's Islands." As soon as the Missionaries received this direction, they prepared to tear themselves away from a loving, weeping people. They took the greatest pains to induce them to join the London Missionaries. Mr. Turner broke up the schools and the societies, and took away the class-papers from the leaders. In the month of June, 1839, the Missionaries left Samoa, by the Camden, and returned to the Friendly Islands. As the result of their untiring labours, they left at Samoa 80 chapels, 197 schools, 487 teachers, 6,354 scholars, more than 3,000 members, with 13,000 other persons under the influence of the Methodist Missionaries; and some of these were great chiefs, heads of tribes and districts. Ton may well imagine that the London Society pursued its work at a great disadvantage. Instead of having an open field, here was a large number of people disinclined to receive its teaching ; sorely smarting under the infliction of what they looked on as a grievous wrong. It seems clear that the arrangement should have been made earlier, or not at all. Christian uniformity could not now be secured. Christian union of heart, and friendly co-operation were not impossible, though they might be difiicult of attainment. The first church was formed by the London Mis- sionaries in 1837. Since that time the little one has THE CHURCHES MULTIPLIED. 281 become a tbousaud ; aud our brethren of that society can now rejoice over a large and flourishing mission. Side by side with them, unguarded and unguided by Missionary teaching, and ahnost destitute of church ordinances, a society of Methodists has struggled on through years of anxiety and disappointment. As soon as Messrs. Turner and Wilson left Samoa, the people met together and re-formed the society. They resolved to retain the chapel, and to employ their local preachers as before. It was not only that they had formed a strong attachment to Mr. Turner, and to Methodist usages, but they had long had political relations with Tonga, and they chose to be of the same religion as King Greorge. They said, "Are we not one people ? Yes, we are. And we were one people before the lotu came. And shall we be separated by the lotu, or by our lotu friends in England ? No, no ; never let it be thus. But what do we know of Tahiti ? "What communications had the Tahitians with us, or with Tonga ? We only heard of Tahiti last night." " It is not right that the good people should take away our Missionary whom we cleave to, and make us unite with those whom we do not want, and whom we do not love. Our friends do not know how difficult Samoa is. We have not our King, but we aU do what we please. Are there not many different sects in England ? Then why should the people of England wish us to have only one here ? " It would be easy to fill pages with the arguments and wailings of these distressed people. But it will 282 THE CHUECHES MULTIPLIED. be better to tell you what has really been done for them. After waitmg a year, they wrote the fol- lowing letter, and sent it to the Friendly Islands in the charge of several chiefs. "Saluagata Samoa, May 5th, 1840. To Mr. Thomas, and Mr. Turner, and all the Missionaries at Tonga, and the King, — We, the teachers at Atua and Tuamasanga, and Manono, and Savaii, and all this Samoa, belonging to the same religious sect as Mr. Turner, write to make known, that we cannot turn to the sect from Tahiti ; but are endeavouring to stand firm to our principles. Therefore we make known our minds to you all, and beg of you to have love to us, and send us a Missionary after our own heart to this Samoa. "We have hitherto conducted worship after that manner which our hearts approve, and which was taught us by Mr. Turner. The day of worship is still observed, (week day preaching) in the difierent places at Savaii. The teachers make known their minds on the day of meeting. We meet our classes, and send teachers to the people who are in want of them. We are still standing fast. We observe the day of the birth, (Christmas day) and the day of the death (Good Friday). We give thanks unto God, that we still stand fast in His work, and that He is still causing it to spring up and to prosper in this Samoa. Therefore we still tarry and wait for the will of God, and to know the mind of your ministers. Do have love to us and send us a Mission- THE CnUECnES MULTIPLIED. 283 ary. Print an abundance of the sacred books and send to us. " To the King. King G-eorge Taufaahau, — If the ministers have cast us away in Samoa, will you select some Tonga teachers. Por indeed we cannot turn. Our cause stands firm in Samoa. Some of the people join one sect and some another. "We have love to Mr. Thomas and Mr. Turner, and all the Mission- aries ; and also to the King of Tonga and the Tonga teachers; and do you have love to us and hasten the teachers to this Samoa. " This is the end of our writing to the King and the ]\Iissionaries of God. Signed, — We of Samoa." The ]\iissionaries could not reply to this letter ; and the King, though sympathising with the Samoans, did not like to interfere. So the^ messenger-chiefs remained at the Friendly Islands till many months had rolled by. They would not return without teachers ; and their repeated prayers were at last successful. King G-eorge consented to send out some native teachers, headed by Benjamin Latuselu, a man of great worth and promise. He has now been for some years an assistant Missionary. Just as the canoe was about to sail, the Triton arrived, having on board the General Superintendent of the AVesleyan Missions in the South Seas. He was soon told of the difficulty in which the Kings had been placed. He saw the deputation from Samoa, questioned them closely, and, though formerly on the Committee in 284 THE CHUECHES MULTIPLIED. London tliat required the "n-ithdrawal of the Mission- aries from Samoa, he did not think it right to check the King's thoughts and acts of kindness. The party sailed in Feburary, 1841. King Greorge gave them directions to the following eifect. " Benjamin, — The chiefs from Samoa have been here a long time ; and perhaps, since they left, our people may have joined the London Missionary Society. If you find it so, upon you arrival, do not disturb them ; but turn your canoe, and sail again for Tonga. But if they have not united with them, you may remain and teach them." Favourable accounts reached Yavau of the recep- tion that Benjamin and his companions met with ; and in July, 1842, King George resolved to pay them a visit. He selected ten more teachers, and with their families they sailed from Vavau. Several chiefs went with them, ^who did not wish that their King shotdd risk his life in so perilous a voyage alone. King Greorge paid a long visit to Samoa ; he opened new chapels at three places, and saw much of the anxiety and distress of the Methodists there, "the whole weight whereof," as Benjamin said, " he had not known before." On his return, he wrote a letter to the Wesleyan Missionary Committee. The letter, translated by Mr. Thomas, is as follows : — " Tonga, January 6th, 1843. Dear Friends, — I, George, having just returned from Samoa, think proper to inform you of the reason of my voyage there, and the cause of my interfering with the people THE CnURCnES MULTIPLIED. 285 of Samoa. The relationship of Tonga and Samoa people has been of old. From thence (Samoa) sprang our progenitors, the governing families of Tonga, as the family of Tui-Tonga, and Tui-Kanokubolu, the latter being the family of Tubou, King of Tonga, and of G-eorge, King of Vavau and Haabai, which is the same with the Chief, Mumui. They are still as their children, and one with them. " "We at Tonga first received the lotu from you, and were pleased with it. We made it known to our relatives at Samoa, some of whom embraced it directly and were well pleased with it ; and in a short time it was greatly increased at Samoa, and was called the lotu of Tonga. " Several other religions sprang up, likewise, at Samoa — Jovelites, Tahitians, and some other parties — but with those we had nothing to do. In Samoa, each chief does that in his own chiefdom which he and his people approve of, it not being the custom in Samoa for any chief to exercise supreme power, as in Tonga. Their union and oneness consists in allowing each chief and his people to do that which he and his people think proper for their good. " It was whilst our Samoa /riends were thus happy, and while true religion was prospering among them by means of the two Missionaries and teachers sent from Tonga to assist them, that orders came from the fathers in England that the two INIissionaries of our Society at Samoa were to remove thence, in order that the whole of Samoa may be one religion, viz., the 286 THE CHUECHES MULTIPLIED. TaMtian religion. This was very grievous and dis- tressing to our relations at Samoa, whicli led them to cry much to God, It also gave us much pain at Tonga, it being a new thing to us, and very surprising ; and as we were not allowed to prevent the removal of the Missionaries, they were brought back to us with the native teachers. But as societies had been formed at Samoa, the chiefs, leaders, and people began again, and carried on the religious service in the same manner as when the Missionaries were with them ; though the Missionaries had, in the most urgent manner, entreated them to join the other lotu. " After going on as they were able for a long time, the chiefs of Samoa sent off some of their friends at different times, by ships that touched there, to visit Tonga in search of Missionaries and native teachers. Some who were thus sent died on their way, and others were taken away by wicked captains (who were paid in produce), who took them on board, but never landed them at Tonga. Still the people con- tinued firm, and held their meetings as usual. " At last three of the governing chiefs who had been fixed upon by the other chiefs to visit Tonga, arrived. Their object v^as to wait upon our Mission- aries here to beg that one might be sent to them. But as the Missionai'ies were prohibited by you to send any to Samoa, they applied to Tubou and myself, asking us to send them some of their and our relatives to assist them, that their souls may live. "We were much affected by their earnest entreaties for us to help THE CHUECHES MULTIPLIED. 287 them ; and, as we did not consider it a sin in the sight of Grod to do so in their distress, so I first sent a canoe to Samoa, and three Tonga teachers ; this being the mind of Tubou, as well as the mind of the Tonga friends. Our Samoan friends begged in the most earnest manner, saying ; ' If it be the mind of our fathers who govern the society in England to deliver us over to the Tahitian lotu in Samoa, this is not our mind ; but we cleave fast to the Tonga lotu, and of the Tonga people, for they are our true relatives.' Now, as the head chiefs of Samoa have in council agreed to send over some of their party to let us know their minds, that they cannot turn to the other society, but that they will continue in that society to which Tonga belongs, and as they are our near relatives, we are not able to cast them away. " Hence originated my visit to Samoa. It was on account of their souls. I sailed from Vavau in the month of July, 1842. Next day I reached Niua, where I remained four nights. I then sailed for Samoa. After being out three nights at sea, we saw land, and arrived at Upolu ; the next day I reached Manono, where very many people assembled and saluted us. Many were the thanks they offered to God, and very great was their joy that we had visited them ; and the expressions of their love to us were many. " I remained six Sabbaths at Samoa, during which time I had an opportunity of seeing the state of things there, and of hearing many things that were said. Hm THE CHURCHES MULTIPLIED. Also, I see clearly how mucli they staud in need of Missionaries. " A general meeting of the chiefs and people was held at Manono, which occupied many hours. They ga- thered together from different parts of the island. I judge ill case the inhabitants of Tonga and Haabai and Vavau were together, they would not be equal to the number who belong to our lotu in Samoa. While I was there some heathens embraced, and many of the Jovelites (from Jovel, a sailor) joined our people, and some from the Tahitian lotu likewise. At Manono, Savaii, and Kubolu, alone, we have 123 chapels. I do not know the number of chapels that we have at Tutuila, Manua, and other places, as I was not able to visit them. Keither can I speak as to the number of chiefs who belong to us, but they are very many. " At the general meeting, the chief of Manono, named Bea, as well as several chiefs belonging to the Tahitian lotu, were present. All was peace. The meeting continued eight hours. The different chiefs appointed to address the meeting spoke with earnest- ness and spirit-stirring eloquence, as is the manner of Samoa when telling their minds. The chiefs and people of Savaii had sat in silence while others spoke their minds. At the close, the chief of the place stood up, and said, ' We shall not tell you oiu' minds. Are our minds changed, then, or are they wavering, to render it necessary we should say what our minds are ? There is nothing of the kind.' " The grand object of the meeting was to make THE CHURCHES MULTIPLIED. 289 known tlieir minds to me, which they did as with one voice. It was to entreat me to write to you, and to beg of you to send them some Missionaries- " I can only write you a very little of what they said. It was very paiafal to me, for at a signal being given, they all lifted up their hands and vowed in the presence of Grod, that our religion should be supported in Samoa ; thus solemnly pledging themselves to Grod, and to each other, as well as to relatives and the Tonga chiefs. " Our people have had to endure persecution from the Tahitian religion ; but their attachment to us is rather strengthened by it than otherwise There are many painful things said about us and done to us ; but I have no wish to write about them, and our friends are patient to bear them. " And now I must earnestly beg and beseech you, dear fathers, whom we greatly love, that you will, at length, untie the words that you have spoken, ai^d again send your Missionaries to Samoa; since you certainly could not have known the manners and customs of these lands. The friends in England are not able to change the minds of the people of Samoa or Tonga, as to what religion they shall be of. It is true that by the teaching of your Missionaries, you have caused us to know, and to become worshippers of, the true Grod : with this we are well pleased, and have no wish to get any other. And it is exactly the same with Samoa. Continue then your love to us, and to our children ; u 290 THE CHUECHES MCLTIPLIED. and if there is anything wrong in this, fathers, I beg you to forgive it. I remain, " Your son in the Gospel, " Geoege Taufauhaii. " To the Governors of the true Eeligion, at Tonga." It was not possible for the committee to read King George's letter without having their hearts stirred to sympathy ; but their pledge had been given ; and a sense of duty placed a curb on feeling. Two parties had entered into a covenant, and both must agree before that covenant could be set aside. The London Society still hoped to overcome the scruples of the Sam cans. Eleven years have passed since that letter was written, and fifteen years since the Methodist Mis- sionaries quitted Samoa. During that time many of the people have fallen away from religion, and turned back to their heathen customs ; and many have embraced Eomanism : but some thousands are still united in our church fellowship, and are walking in love. These " waiters upon Providence " do not give up hoping that a happy change may yet take place. It has been said by those who have paid brief visits to Samoa that the Methodists there are a small and troublesome faction, giving much annoyance to the London Missionaries and their converts. Suppose that it be so . All the more do they need to be guided by men of sounder judgment and a higher tone of TUE CIIUECnES MULTIPLIED. 291 piety than their own. It is not needful to laud them as martyrs of religious constancy. Much political feeling is acknowledged as existing, mingled with their Christian preferences. Perhaps had they had better teaching and more elevated piety, they would have seen the advantage of religious uniformity and admired the self-sacrifice of the Missionaries who forsook them for the sake of brotherly union and Christian honour. Yet is this certain ? If we want to judge truly of the conduct of others towards us, and of our own conduct towards them, I know no better plan than to imagine the relative position of both changed. If I were in their place, and they in mine, what then ? Now suppose that for good — undeniably good reasons — eighty Independent congregations in England were to be told that before next Sunday their beloved pastors would be removed from them, and sent out to evan- gelise another part of the world, and that their places would be filled by clergymen of the Church of England, who would introduce and maintain their Church's doctrine and discipline ; and suppose further, that eighty societies of Wesleyan Methodists were treated in the same manner, and commanded to receive as pastors eighty Independent ministers, or else to go without Christian teaching ; — should we see instant and passive submission ? Would no stir be made about the matter ? Why, all England would be startled by the cry of liberty, right of private judgment, and non-intrusion ! Would there be no ill-will and angry feeling in enlightened England? u 2 292 THE CHUECHES MULTIPLIED. How much more in uneducated, strongly-prejudiced Samoa ! The Samoans live a long way off; they are dwellers in small, insignificant islets ; they are darker in complexion than we ; they are ignorant and only half civilised But " For a' that, an' a' that, A man's a man, for a' that." His free heart and his free will cannot be coerced. Is it not possible to " untie the words " that were spoken, on a partial view of the case, fifteen years ago ? Why not ? (I{k|?ti[r MM. WAR IN TONGA. KNOW thy works, and where thou dwellest, ^-even where Satan's seat is." Such was the opening of Christ's message to the church at Pergamos ; and wliat was said of Pergamos ^might have been said of Tonga. Here the great enemy of God's truth entrenched himself when one outpost after another had been wrested from him ; and here, though exposed to terrors and per- secutions, the believing few held fast the name of Christ, and refused to deny His faith. The aged chiefs of Tonga, and the Priests, who saw their craft in danger, were the most earnest opposers of Christianity. They bore an intense hatred to its doctrines and its followers, and did all in their power to vex those who had joined the lotu and to hinder others from leaving their father's gods. Many of the young men were fully convinced that their religion was a system of lies ; they either treated its ceremonies with contempt, or regarded them with 294 WAR IN TONaA. utter indifference. Some of them showed a desire to become Christians : but the fear of worldly loss and of the anger of those who dealt out threatenings kept them back. Yet wherever Christianity was brought fairly into contact with heathenism it was obvious which would, in the end, prove the stronger. He who was van- quished by a stronger than himself in the wilderness, and on the cross, knew this well ; and so much the more did he stir up the heathens to rage furiously. A new opening presented itself during the year 1835, at Houma, a populous part of the island which^ till that time, had been hostile ; it was the same at Folaha ; and Ata, the successor of Mr. Thomas's Ata, permitted the return of those who had been banished by the late chief. On the 20th August a new chapel was opened at Eeka. Heathens as well as Christians assembled, and more persons embraced Christianity on that occasion than ever previously at Tonga. A chief, named Tui- vakano, resumed his Christian profession. He had returned to heathenism some time before, not because of any misgivings as to the truth of Christianity, but from motives of worldly policy. He had too much light to be happy in wrong-doing, and confessing his error, he again asked admission into the Church. He came to the house of God, — the act by which the Tonguese always indicate that they renounce heathen- ism, — accompanied by his brother, a young man ot great influence, and- a number of chiefs. He seemed WAR TN TONGA. 295 to be hearty in bis intention of serving God and becoming a cbampion of the truth. The services of the day were most delightful, and the Christians were filled with hope. The circumstance that raised their spirits was a great blow to the heathen party, and they did not allow it to pass by in quietness. That very night Tuivakano was surprised in his o^vn kolo, or fortress, by a party of heathens who made him their prisoner. The persecuting chiefs then assembled, in strong force, at Nukunuko, and agreed to depose Tui- vakano and drive him away from his own district. This was done in due form, and a man after their own heart was appointed to succeed him. He told them that it was an easy matter to part with his dignity ; but that he was resolved, at all hazards to save his soul. The heathens then commanded him and his people to leave the place instantly. They were eager to set about the work of plunder which, with many, was the chief reason for attacking the fortress. As it was dark, Tuivakano refused to go tUl morning, and thus showed himself equal to braving their rage ; but as soon as the light of the nest day broke, he left quietly, accompanied by his friends, choosing to suffer the loss of all things rather than go to war. Many of the Christians to whom Tuivakano re- paired, were moved with indignation at the base conduct of the heathen, and could, with difficulty, be restrained from attacking them. For the next few days all Tonga was moved ; and such were the threats and malignity of the heathen 296 WAR I>' TOSGA. partj, tbat the Christians thought it right to put themselves upon the defensive. The only hill in Tonga, the little mount of JS'ukualofa, on which the chapel stands, was chosen as the citadel. A kolo was built, surrounded by a stockade and ditch. It was reported that the heathen meant to depose King Josiah. His power had been waning for some time ; and his natural character did not fit him for great emergencies. The unsettled state of Tonga, and the prospect of being shut up in JSTukualofa, with a strong, heathen war-party all around, induced Mr. Watkin to remove his own family, and that of his colleague, to Vavau, After placing them in safety, he returned to fetch away the furniture of the mission-houses and the press. It was thought advisable to carry on the printing operations at Yavau, as that was the more central station, now that the sphere of the South Sea Mission included Fiji and Samoa. On Mr. Watkin' s retui-n to Tonga, he found that a terrible hurricane had just occurred, attended, in some cases, with loss of life. The mission premises had suffered, part having been blown down. He now remained at Tonga, a solitary Missionary on a difficult station. StiU there was cheering news. The King had had an interview with the opposing chiefs, and afiairs were looking better. There was no immediate fear of war or bloodshed. But none would have felt surprise had a speedy change for the worse taken place. However, through the year 1836, the crisis was WAE IN TONGA. 297 delayed. Mrs. Watkin and her family returned home and Mr. AVatkiu continued his labours, rejoicing now and then in new opportunities of preaching the gospel, in villages occupied by the heathens. At Bea, a fortress of much importance, long-closed against the Missionaries, preaching was commenced ; and it was hoped that this would prove a stepping-stone to many other places. Early in the year 1837, the storm that had been long gathering, burst upon Tonga with awful violence. The heathen party set themselves to the task of uprooting Christianity. They engaged in war for the express purpose of destroying their King, whom they hated on account of his religion, and of slaughtering all his Christian subjects. They were an army of rebels, fighting against their earthly and their heavenly sovereign. This view is confirmed by the following extracts from " A Eefutation of Chevalier Dillon's attacks on the "VYesleyan Missionaries in the Priendly Islands, by the Eev. David CargiU, A.M.":— " The Christians did not take up arms either to propagate their religion, or establish heathenism. Their design was to sup- press rebellion, maintain the authority to their legal monarch, to defend their rights and pr-.vileges, and to preserve their lives. Nor did they betake themselves to such an expedient, until every other means which their humanity and ingenuity could prompt, and their power compass had proved unsviccessful. They did not betake themselves to it without repeated overtures 298 WAE IN TOKGA. of peace, pardon and reconciliation to the rebels ; and even after they were prepared to act on the defensive, they lingered in unwillingness to engage in war, striving by manly and honourable means, to avert such a calamity ; until their hopes were cut off, and their apprehensions realised by the commencement of hostilities on the part of the insurgents. The subjects of King George were merely auxiliaries of those of Tubou, and George was appointed commander of the united forces, not by assumption, but by the wish of the chiefs, because Tubou's age disqualified him for such an ofiice. George's rank would doubtless deter- mine the council of chiefs in the selection of him as their leader . . . The rebels conceived the idea of making an attack on the loyalists on the Sabbath, during the time of divine service ; and expected an easy victory, from the supposition that it was unlawful for the Christians to defend even their own lives on the Sabbath ; and that, if lawful, they would be unprepared to defend themselves whilst assembled in the house of their God. Accordingly, a large body of insurgents, under the command of several inveterate enemies of Tubou, advanced towards Nukualofa, with the expectation of surprising Tubou and many of his faithful subjects, while engaged in devotional exercises, and with the design of putting them to death. But their approach had been detected by sentinels who guarded the entrance to Nukualofa. A company of loyalists assembled to meet and repel the aggressors. The failure of their plan ; the cool intrepidity, as well AVAE IN TONGA, 299 as the superior discipline of those whom the rebels expected to surprise and destroy, filled them with "trepidation ; so that they were easily discomfited and put to flight." "War, civil war especially, is always an evil ; and here, in a small island where each knew each, it is frightful to think of the scenes that occurred during the months of January, February, and part of March ; parents in arms against children, and children against parents. The heathen party was larger than the other, and for a time the issue of the war seemed doubtful ; but King Josiah sought help of his relative and neighbour. King George, renowned in war as in peace ; and the Christian party triumphed. His name long after, struck terror into the hearts of the heathen, and held them back from persecuting. The efiects of a long season of dread and a brief time of sharp conflict, were not favourable to the growth of piety, nor to the spread of civilisation. Numbers had been crowded together into fortresses for safety ; their lands had run to waste and their houses had been exposed to the enemy. Eamine followed. Nor was this all. The morals of the people suffered. It became the painful duty of the Missionaries to sever many, whose walk had been disorderly, from church communion ; while others were in danger of making shipwreck of the faith and of a good conscience. Even after the diu of war had ceased, and peace had been proclaimed, the Christians dared not for 300 WAR IN TONGA. some time venture from their fortresses, lest their enemies should lie in wait, and seizing the opportu- nity, murder them as they passed along. Such had been the uniform practice, after the proclamation of peace, in the heathen days of the Friendly Islands. Nukualofa, in particular, "was crowded with people from all parts of the island ; so that, for a time, preaching was confined to very few places. By degrees, the Christians ventured forth, sought their former houses, and finding that the heathens did not molest them, they repaired their losses, trimmed their houses and gardens, and made their chapels ready for the visits of the Missionaries. It was found that the late success of the Chris- tians, had led many among the heathen party to own the power of the true God. One of the heathen chiefs of the Bea, embraced Christianity and built a small chapel ; while at Hihifo, Ata permitted the Missionaries to re-occupy their former premises that had now been forsaken for more than eight years. Through all the trials that preceded the war, and that lasted for months after it was over, King Josiah, and the Christian chiefs generally, assisted the Missionaries in their work, and supported their plans. There was a marked improvement, too, in their religious character and daily conduct. In October, 1837, the church members amounted to 1,056, being an increase of 80 during the year; there were 120 on trial. Seventy removals had taken WAR IN TONGA. 301 place, and 80 bad been lost by deatb : among tbese were two local preacbers, wbo fell in tbe war. Number of schools, 15 ; of teacbers, 173 ; and of scholars, 1,067. From the journals of tbe Missionaries stationed at Tonga, Messrs. Eabone and Tucker, we may gather some interesting particulars respecting tbe progress of the missions, from the close of the war in 1837, to tbe commencement of a still fiercer conflict in 1840. The Rev. Stephen Eabone was appointed to renew tbe long-suspended mission at Hibifo. This was the only district in the island of Tonga, now wholly under heathen influence. Ata was modest, quiet, and unassuming in manner ; but as thorough an enemy to rehgion as his predecessor. Still, like him, be had intervals of kinder thought towards tbe Missionaries. The converted natives, about two hundred in number, lived in a separate fortress, a mile from A.ta's home. But Mr. and Mrs. Eabone, in hope of doing good to those wbo most needed their efforts, and wiUing to please Ata in every lawful way, took up their abode in tbe chief's own heathen fortress. Tbe house that Mr. Thomas had occupied for three years, was still standing. It had been exposed to wind, rain, and sun, for eight years ; yet it was not injured beyond repair. Tbe change from a Christian station was soon felt. It was, in fact, beginning the work over again. Lying, stealing, and swearing, were common sins ; and 302 WAE IN TONGA. the people seemed to have no scruple as to the means used to gain any purpose on which their hearts were set. Before the fences and gates of the mission premises were put in order, the people pushed their way in crowds into Mr. Eabone's house, asking questions and making remarks, as though there were none to dispute their right. The few Christians living near Hihifo, had grown in grace in the midst of their trials. They welcomed a Missionary among them with unfeigned delight. The local preachers had been wont to travel to Nukualofa every week, for several years, that they might have their work pointed out to them. As they went and returned, they were subjected to the insiilts of the persecuting heathens. They had borne this annoyance vrith Christian charity. Now they had a pleasant respite, having one close at hand to whom they could appeal on all church matters. One of the terms on which peace had been made was, that no one should be persecuted on account of his religion. Ata soon broke faith. He heard that an old chief, on the little island of Atata, was about to embrace Christianity, and he gave orders to some of his people to bring the old man away from the island. The King, and his relative TJlakai, heard of the affair, and made a journey to Hihifo, in order to stop such a wicked proceeding. They found that the Christians, worn out by a series of insults and injuries, were more than half inclined to go to war. The King begged them to endure a little longer, and Mr. Eabone WAE IN TONGA. 303 joined in recommending peace. A conversation fol- lowed between the two parties ; and again the heathen confessed that they had done wrong. At the kava- ring the King exhorted all parties to live in peace. He said, " Previous to the late war, I told Lavaka and his people, that if they did continue to persecute the Christians, they certainly would be punished ; soon after this the war broke out, and now their bones are dry on the earth. I tell you the same ; so look to it." Those grave words of the King were regarded by the heathen in the light of a prediction. So once more they were led, by fear, to restrain their deadly malice. From Hihifo, the King and TJlakai preceded to the Bea. There, certain old heathen chiefs, offended with Moiaki for embracing Christianity, were bent on driving him out of his own home. He made a stout resistance, and for a time maintained his ground. The result showed that those who gave up all for Christ's sake, chose the better course for themselves, while yet " weak in the faith." Not many months after, Moiaki grieved his Christian friends, and gave a triumph to the heathen party by returning to his old customs. Mr. Eabone had not been labouring long at Hihifo, before many of the heathens, in small com- panies, forsook their gods, and bowed their knees to Jehovah. Among the new converts was one whose change was regarded as an event of great import- ance. Aho Mi was a chief of repute. He had long 304 WAE IN TONGA. been a listener to the gospel message ; and while on a visit at Yavau, he was led to decision. As soon as he reached home, he called upon Atac; told him that he had become a Christian ; and added, " If it be your mind to chastise me, here I am. It will be very good." The next day he went to see Mr. E-abone. In his heathen days he often called upon the Missionary. Now the feeUngs of both were changed ; they met and talked as brethren in Christ. The next Sunday morning, Aho Mi went to the house of God, where was a larger congregation than usual; and in the afternoon, Mr. Eabone preached for the first time in the chief's own house, at his earnest request. Aho Mi soon called at the mission house again. After conversing a little, he said, "Now I will attend to my book," and taking it up, he began to read the alphabet. All his spare time was spent in this way. In his own house he would sit attentively reading, in the midst of a large circle of friends and followers. Mr. Eabone was much affected at the sight of a man, forty-five years of age, doing so diligently the work of a little child; particularly as he knew that a few weeks before, Aho Mi would have scorned to touch a book. The conversion of Aho Mi was such a blow as Satan's kingdom in Tonga had never before received ; and his recovery was "life from the dead" to many more. Tet still there were thousands in Tonga who "knew not the dav of their visitation." WAB IX TONGA. 305 The two next years were marked by very trying events ; while every now and then there seemed to be a promise of better days coming. A brief extract from Mr. Rabone's journal will convey a good idea of the regular labours of the Tonga Missionaries, and of the hopes that often rose above their fears. " Wednesday, July 28th, 1838. Yesterday morn- ing, Mr. Tucker and I left Nukualofa for Hihifo ; we arrived in the afternoon and made preparations for the baptisms. Early this morning, Mr. Tucker preached ; we then married several couples ; after which, we prayed. This ended, we catechised the candidates for baptism ; and were well pleased with the manner in which they answered the questions in the presence of all the congregation ; they then knelt down, and we proceeeded to baptise them in the name of the Father, Son, and Holy Ghost. The first to whom this rite was administered was the old chief who embraced Christianity a few months back, instrumentally through King Greorge, who was, at that time, on a visit to Ata. There were twenty or more at this place, and it was a most interesting occasion. After takiag a little food, we came on to Teikiu, where there was another group in waiting. Being very many more than their small chapel would contain, and the day being fine, I spoke to them outside the chapel enclosure. I endeavoured to explain the nature and necessity of baptism in order to their receiving the Holy Ghost, so fnlly and graciously promised to them and their X 306 WAR IN TONGA. children, and all that are afar off. After sermon, we married seven or eight couples, and then catechised the candidates ; after which, they all knelt down beneath the "spacious firmament" to receive the initiating rite, in the name of the ever-blessed Trinity. More than seventy have been baptised to-day, including children and young persons. "We walked, in our return home, several miles through the tide, knee- deep, and the wind blowing very strong ; so that it was only our upper garments that were at all dry. But praised be the Lord who has called us to our high and holy work. Oh, may we be found faithful I " At Eua, a change took place that was very cheer- ing to the Missionaries. That island was altogether heathen. It had been for many years a rendezvous for whalers ; and constant intercourse with ungodly seamen had made the people worse than they would have been if left to themselves. Wickedness of many kinds abounded. Eua might have been called the arsenal, or armoury of Tonga, as well as its granary. To this place the heathen of Tonga resorted when they wanted guns, knives, axes, and powder. Being well supplied with food and ammunition, the heathens of Tonga regarded it as a good place to which to repair in case Christianity should over-spread the whole of their own island. But there was a turn in affairs. The word of the Lord found its way to Eua ; and Kaulauo, the principal chief — a daring man, who had wrested the government from its rightful WAB IN TONGA. 307 owner by force of arms — with many of bis followers, like him, haters of tlie truth, forsook Eua, and sought refuge among congenial heathens at Hibifo. "While we are resting on pleasant pages of Tongan story, it may not be amiss to give an account of a royal wedding, that took place in May, ] 839. It shall be in Mr. Tucker's own words : — " On Tuesday, the 14th instant, there was a royal wedding celebrated here. The bridegroom is a chief of the very highest rank. His title is Tuibelebaki. He is a local preacher. He spent several years of his life at Fiji, and returned to this place near four months ago. But, prior to his coming, he had heard of the charms of the Princess Charlotte, of Vavau, King George's only daughter ; and, no sooner did he see her, than he determined to pay his addresses to her. He wrote ; and, according to the custom of the Priendly Islands, soon obtained a direct answer, which was in the affirmative. "No sooner was the affair made known, than Josiah Tubou, and the other chiefs here, requested King G-eorge to bring his daughter to Tonga to be married. He acceded to their request, and they immediately began to make preparations for the event on an extensive scale. All the heathen chiefs, as well as Christian, contributed to it. Great quanti- ties of yams, and of native cloth, were brought from the different fortresses to Nukualofa. On the 11th instant, about noon, the fleet from Vavau and Haabai X 2 308 "WAE I>' TO>'GA. was discovered oif this place. It consisted of twenty- six double canoes. A sort of drum was immediately beat to collect our people together, to prepare kava and food for the reception of the guests. The place was soon in a bustle — men, women, and children, running to see the canoes, some of which were drawing near to shore. " The King's canoe, in which were the Queen and the bride, was first — she having outsailed the rest. The scene was lively and, to us, interesting in the extreme. The numbers of people on board were immense ; there were a hundred and thirty persons in one canoe. As soon as the principal part of the chiefs and men came on shore, they proceeded with King George to Tubou's residence, to drink kava. The ladies formed another party. The old King sat in the centre of his house, and the chiefs, according to their name of office, took their stations on each side of him, while the bulk of the people sat opposite. In the evening we had a great many visitors ; and, the next day being the Sabbath, we divided the congregations, which were immense. King George preached in the large chapel, in the evening, a very useful and excellent sermon. " On Monday, the preparations were made on a magnificent scale. We reckoned sixty -two baked pigs, besides two hundred baskets of other kinds of food. Tuesday was the day fixed for performing the grand ceremony. The reeding which formed the sides of the chapel, and the outside fence, was taken away, in order to accommodate the multitude who would assemble to WAE IS TOIfGA. 309 witness the scene. Soon after daylight, the people began to collect in great numbers, Christian and heathen. The chief women, meantime, were engaged in adorning the bride and bridegroom. A little before ten o'clock the lali, or drum, was struck, to give notice that all was ready. "We went to the chapel, where was such a mixed multitude assembled, inside and outside, as I never saw there before. Every one was dressed in his best apparel. " After waiting a short time, the bride and bride- groom made their appearance, the former walking first, as is the custom here on such occasions, both in going to and returning from the place of worship on the day of marriage. "VVe began the service by singing and prayer ; the congregation then chanted the Te Deum ; after which Mr. Eabone delivered a short address on the duties of husbands and wives. I then performed the office of marriage, spoke a few words of exhortation, and concluded with singing and prayer. Thus ended one of the most interesting marriage ceremonies I have ever witnessed in the Friendly Islands. There were two Kings and two Queens present, the Tamaha, all the chiefs of Haabai and Vavau, with many belonging to Tongatabu. " The bride is a very fine person, quite the image of her father. They are devotedly attached to each other. On Thursday King George, Queen Charlotte, and the newly-married pair, dined with us. The King preached in the evening, and again on Simday. We 310 WAE IN TONGA, had an abimdance of religious services. I should think that there were upwards of one hundred local preachers here from Haabai and Yavau. " The visitors conducted themselves with the great- est propriety ; and I believe great good will result from this marriage having taken place at Tonga. Patu and Maafu, two of the principal heathen chiefs, as well as several others of minor importance, have been here near a fortnight at the Katoaga, or feast. This is a very pleasing indication that Satan's kingdom is divided against itself here. Oh that it may speedily faU, and the kingdom of the [Redeemer everywhere prevail ! " The heathens could enjoy a gala; and some of them might even be impressed by the superior dig- nity and comfort of Christian meetings and habits of life; but there was a deep rooted principle within them, that led them to resist Gospel truth. "The carnal mind is enmity against God." Again and again this enmity showed itself in secret annoyance, or open persecution. During the year 1839, a plot was formed to take away the life of Tubou, which was providentaUy found out, and frustrated. The Christians, too, were once more driven from their dwellings, and obliged to seek shelter with friendly chiefs. There was one hope which often bore xip the depressed spirits of the Christians, and lightened their load of anxiety. Their chief persecutor, Ata, was not WAE IN TONGA. 311 in good healtli ; and should he be taken away, the heir to his authority was Shadrach Vihala, the pious son of the former Ata, whose story has been already told in part. Were he once in power, a bright path- way would open before the tried followers of the lotu. But the providence that we should choose for ourselves, is often very different from the Providence of Grod's appointing ; and in this case, the little Christian party had a new grief, and a severe test of their faith, in the removal of their beloved leader. In the early days of tlie Tonga mission, Shadrach Vihala was led to enquire about the truth, and he formed a strong and lasting attachment to Mr. Thomas, Light from above continued to pour into his [mind, and he became " a disciple of Christ, but secretly for fear " of grieving his heathen relatives and Mends. How long he might have remained in the difficult position of one who puts his light " under a bushel," loves the Saviour without owning Him, and is governed by a law to which the world around does not know that he is subject, we cannot tell. Eor soon there came a day that changed his course, and fixed his choice. The Christians were banished. He had kept aloof from them in prosperity, but when they left Hihifo a poor and suffering people, he felt that his heart was as their heart, and he resolved to share their exUe. Like Moses he chose " rather to suffer affliction with the people of God, than to enjoy the pleasures of sin for a season." From the day that Shadrach Vihala avouched the 312 WAE IN TONGA. Lord to be his God, his own cup of spiritual blessing was filled with choicer gifts. He stood firm in the midst of abounding trials, and was " an example of the believers in word, in conversation, in charity, in spirit, in faith, in purity." Though he had lately left the darkness and corruption of heathenism, yet so watchful was he over his walk and words that he never needed reproof, " except in the most gentle way, and on some trivial matter." He became a class leader and local preacher, and fulfilled the duties of both positions with credit to himself, and with profit to the people of his charge. As he advanced in religious knowledge and faith, his natural timidity was ex- changed for a spirit of courage and fortitude, that enabled him to pass through " a great fight of afflic- tions " without flinching. His heroism inspired those around him with confidence. With him to head them they were proof against the assaults of the heathen, and the more painful provocations of half- hearted professors. Thus strong to do, and patient to sufier God's will, Shadrach Vihala was found ready for an early summons to his reward. His health failing, he removed to Haabai, where he placed himself imdcr Mr. Lyth's medical care. Human skill could not restore him ; but his sick-bed was cheered by Mr. Lyth's constant and aifeetionate kindness. His death bore witness to the power of Christ over the last enemy ; and to the enduring strength of Christian love. He often said : " Nothing in this world follows ■WAE IN TONGA. 313 me but my love to the cliurcb, and my desire to preach the gospel to the people. If it he the 'nill of God that my work in this world be finished, I will praise Him. If He again raises me up, I will praise Him." When near his end he said, " I have a resting-place in Jesus. I have waited my appointed time ; now the Lord calls me, and I answer, here I am." He died as he liad lived in the true spirit of a Christian confessor. To his wife, who had told him, in reply to one of his questions, that she intended to return with their children, after his death, to Tonga, he emphatically said, " And such is my mind also. Yes; let them go again to the people, with whom, and for whom we have suffered ; and if called, let them suffer with Grod's people, as I have done." In the absence of his own friends, his funeral was attended by those who loved him in the Lord, King George and the chiefs of Haabai being of the number. About three months after A^ihala's death, the Tonga mission suffered another heavy loss in the death of William Ulakai. He was one of the earliest and best friends of the Missionaries ; a true lover of his country, and a warm supporter of the work of God. His death was a public loss. It was especially felt by King Josiah, who had leaned upon him for counsel and for aid in his government. As soon as Ulakai felt that his illness would be unto death, he expressed an earnest desire to see his reputed son. King George. The canoe that should have fetched him from Vavau was detained by contrary winds ; and when the dying 314 WAE IN TONGA. man found how long the delay was likely to be, he spoke to his friends in these affecting words ; " Go and inform him. Why do you delay ? Do you wish him to come and look at the sand ? " Alluding to the custom of gathering sand from the sea-beach, and heaping it up over the grave of a buried chief. "When Greorge reached Tonga, after a stormy and dangerous voyage, he did, indeed, see the sand only; for his father's funeral had taken place that very morning. King Josiah, his brother Abraham, and other chiefs, earnestly begged King George not to forsake them now that he had one motive less for visiting Tonga. It is worth while to notice this request of the Tongan King and chiefs, because some of those who love to detract from the excellence of King George's character, have said that his after interference in the aflfairs of Tonga was uncalled-for, and the result of his own ambition alone. Whether the loss of two such men as Vihala and TJkalai, had any thing to do with the disturbance that speedily followed, is not recorded in the journals of the Missionaries ; but it is not imlikely that the death of those champions of the truth, was regarded by the heathen party as strengthening their hands by weaken- ing the Christian cause. However that may be, the island became, in 1840, the scene of another and a more deadly strife. In January, King Josiah paid a visit to Ata. His object in going, was to try to create a kindlier feeling between his Christian and heathen subjects ; and if WAE IN TONGA. 315 possible, to persuade Ata to embrace religion. During this visit, a few of Ata's people, from Hibifo, suddenly attacked a party of Christians engaged about their ordinary work, in their own village ; murdered four of them, and left another, — a poor, defenceless, little girl, for dead. This was the highest insult that they could offer to their King, himself a Christian, on an embassy of peace, and Ata's guest. Abraham, his brother on hearing of this outrage, gathered his friends together, ■went to Hihifo, and brought the King home. Attempts to pacify the heathen were of no avail. They seemed like tigers that, having tasted blood, thirst for more. They flew to arms against the people of Foui, a neighbouring Christian fortress, and were joined by aU the other heathen chiefs and their adhe- rents. The storming of Foui might soon be followed by an attack on Nukualofa. King Josiah felt so much alarmed that he sent for his staunch friend, King George, whose strong arm had been of use to him in former perils. On his arrival, the two Kings sent a message to the rebellious chief, proposing to meet him, and to try to make up the breach between the two parties. Ata refused to send a direct answer. "With praiseworthy forbearance, the Kings sent message after message. At last Ata consented to receive the proffered visit. It was then agreed that King George should go to Hihifo on the following morning, and meet the chiefs from the Christian and heathen for- tresses. The messengers hastened back to Ata carrying these tidings. 316 WAR IN TOKGA. By dayliglit, next morning, King George with five or sis hundred warriors reached Poui. A young man was soon brought to him, the son of Christian parents living at Vavau, who had escaped from the heathen fortress during the dark hours of the night. He said, that on the previous evening, after the return of the messengers from Nukualofa, he had overheard a conversation about a plot for taking away King George's life. The men who were to shoot him were chosen ; and the rebels were busily preparing to execute their horrid deed of treachery and blood. King George, though grateful for the warning, did not like to believe the statement of a deserter. He sent a message to Ata, telling him what he had heard, and asking whether it was true. After a good deal of shufiling, Ata confessed that they had " consulted about killing King George as soon as he should come into the fortress." The King thought it best to return to Nukualofa, taking with him most of his people. There it was arranged between the two Kings that the Ata and Vahai* then acting should be deposed, and that two j^ouiig Christian chiefs, should be appointed to succeed them. Taking these young men with him, and followed by his army, King George returned to Hihifo. He offered terms to the rebels ; but they were determined not to yield without a struggle. King George, finding that peaceful measures would not answer, addressed himself to the task of subduing * Both names of office. WA.E i:S TONGA. 317 the rebels. He ordered his soldiers to set fire to their spirit-houses, which were soon bui'ned to ashes. He then surrounded the place for nearly a fortnight, guarding every avenue of approach. He hoped in this way to secure his end without such a sacrifice of life, as would result from storming the fortress. Every second or third day he sent messengers, begging the rebels to lay down their arms. At length it was plain, that their courage began to fail ; he had succeeded in alarming their fears. Seeing how things were, King George harangued his soldiers one evening, directing them to invite their friends within the fortress to come out, while they still kept watch all around. Part of the King's harangue ran as follows : " Our late war with the heathen, three years ago, was by the mercy of Grod, a victorious one. But, though we got the victory, in some things we went astray. "We fought not as Christians should fight. Our object then was not to save, but to destroy. But you all now present, hear from me, that we do not so fight again. If, as may be expected, the enemy shoidd come out of their fortress to-morrow morning, let every man endeavour to seize and save his man, and not one to shoot or strike, but in case of life and death." Before day- light, the King and his army were in possession of the fortress, and the rebels were secured. Five hundred men thus came into the power of the Christians, all of whom King George pardoned. Some of the ring- leaders were sent off to Haabai and A^avau. The taking of Hihifo, a fortress so strong that it 31S WAE IN TONGA. had resisted many a previous attack, struck terror into tlie hearts of the heathen party, while they mar- velled at the unwonted clemency of so great a warrior as King George. At the request of Josiah Tubou and his chiefs, 'King George consented to take up his abode at Tonga. Nine hundred men, with their families, accompanied him. So strong a guard of friendly soldiers was hailed with gratitude by the Christians, who lived in fear of an attack on Nukualofa. The Kings resolved to try the effect of mild measures. After the taking of Hihifo, they did not proceed to the attack of any other heathen fortresses ; and they tried again and again to bring the opposing party to terms of peace. But not so was the plague of war to be stayed. On the 20th AprU, a messenger brought the alarming news to Nukualofa, that a little company of Christians had been met, at a short dis- tance, by a party of heathens stronger than themselves. The Christians had gone out to search for food. They had been suddenly surprised by a number of warriors from the Bea, and five had been carried oif to their enemies' fortress. This was the signal for renewed war. King George and his soldiers made ready. Just at this crisis, two of the vessels belonging to the United States' Exploring Expedition, reached Tonga. The Missionaries applied to Commodore Wilkes, suggesting that his interference might even yet be the means of averting the evils of war. But it seems that the time for successful interference had passed by. While Messrs. Tucker and Eabone were WAK IN TONGA. 319 making this effort for peace, the heathens of Houma were guilty of a grievous act of treachery. While conversing with the Christians at Hihifo, they sud- denly fired and wounded five or six people, a chief among the rest. A sharp skirmish ensued, and the Christians triumphed, though their number was smaller than that of the enemy. Each party distrusted the other ; and it became evident to the Missionaries, as well as to the Kings, that the blessings of peace must be regained at the price of a victorious battle. Commodore "Wilkes, who seems to have had a strange prejudice in favour of man in his savage state, thought that he could easily bring the heathen to terms, if the Christians could be persuaded to forego their fondness for fighting. He proposed a meeting between the parties, and suggested that ten chiefs should be selected on each side to attend the conference. The Kings accepted his mediation, and chose their men. The messenger who conveyed the proposal to the heathens, brought word that they declined coming. They sent, however, a white man — a runaway convict, and a notorious evil-doer — as a pleader of their cause. An old blind chief, and the wife of Fatu (chief of Mua) also came ; but the principal aggressors stayed at home. The Commodore, nothing daunted, sent a second message, and appointed the next morning as the time of meeting. He set up a tent on shore, and sent a supply of biscuits, beef, rice, molasses, and other good things to the place of rendezvous. 320 WAE IN TONGA. The Christian delegates went, and " made a fine ap- pearance on approaching the ship," sailing in a double canoe, 100 feet in length. They found that the old, blind chief, Fatu's wife, and their attendants had decamped, taking with them the whole of the pro- visions kindly furnished by Commodore Wilkes for the entertainment of both parties. The reason for going off was said to be the fear of reprisals from the Christians, as they had just heard that the people of the Bea had made another attack upon the yam- grounds of the Christian party. All hope of reconciliation died out. "What could be done with men who, during a truce, and at the very moment that a conference respecting terms of peace was being held, broke out into open hostility ? The chiefs and people whom Commodore "Wilkes saw were all belonging to Mua. Eatu, their chief had not openly joined the lovers of war, and for some time afterwards he professed to remain neutral. Yet on the strength of his conversations with a neutral party. Commodore "Wilkes concluded, to his own satisfaction, that the heathen party was desirous of peace, and that it was the fault of King George, and of the Missionaries, that the war continued to rage. Men who spend only eight days in a place ought .to be careful how they express an opinion regarding the causes of the things that meet their eye. "We will believe them when they describe the general aspect of a country ; when they speak of trees and fruit, or of houses a]id furniture ; when they tell us how the WAB IN TONGA. 321 people look, and dress, and speak. But when they judge motives and settle points of dispute, we feel inclined to turn from these guests of a day, and listen to those who have lived for years among the people, who know their tempers and hahits, and who can speak their language as well as they can speak English. The Missionaries, who knew the men of Mua well, regarded Fatu as one of the most treacherous and subtle among all the heathens of Tonga ; and had good reason to believe that, though professing neutrality, he was secretly prompting and strengthening the war party. For some time after the failure of this attempt at peace-making, the Christians continued to go about their work in scattered parties. A few of them were fired upon, on the 12th May, by a company of heathens, lying in ambush. To spring out from a hiding-place, fall suddenly upon unarmed people, and either kill or carry them ofi", was the favourite practice of these cruel and cowardly foes. Not many days after. King George and some of his attendants went to a distance from Nukualofa. They had to cross a creek in returning. The King and nearly aU his people had crossed in safety. A few remained behind, waiting for the return of the canoes. Upon these few, a large party of JFatu's people suddenly rushed. Had the Christians turned and taken to the water, their death would have been certain. But, though the odds were so much against them, they boldly faced the enemy, seized the weapons they had at command, and returned their fire. A few Y 322 WAS IK TONGA. were killed, and otliers were wounded. King George hastily gathered together such warriors as he could collect, and returned to the spot; but the skirmish was over, and the enemy had fled. After this, the whole island was soon in arms. Day by day tidings of one affray after another reached the mission premises. On the 6th, several canoes suiTounded one returning from Eua, and exchanged shots with a small party of Christians, who defended themselves as they best could, and got away with trifling loss. The position of the Missionaries became increas- ingly perilous. When King George and his army were away from Nukualofa, they were exposed to the rage of two heathen forts. The people would come out into the plantations of the Christians, carry off" large quantities of food, cut down what they could not remove, destroy the bananas, and smash the yams to pieces. They would chase and kill any of the Christians with whom they might chance to meet. On the 18th, they fell in with four old people, killed them, and carried away their heads as trophies. On the 21st, an English vessel, H.M.S. Favourite, Captain Croker, was seen in the offing. The Cap- tain was soon on shore, and was hailed as a friend in a time of utmost need. He soon learned the painful state of the mission and the island. The length of the war, and the consequent presence of many hun- dreds more than the island usually contained, had WAR IN TONGA. 323 produced desolating effects. The natives, congregated together for safety, could no longer cultivate their land. Eruitful plantations were laid bare, and a scarcity of food was threatened. The Missionaries had passed six months of anxiety and terror ; had been obliged to leave their own pleasant home, and to seek refuge in a Christian fort ; and they were beginning to think that their wisest course would be to quit Tonga for a season, and carry their peaceful message to those that had leisure to listen to it. They asked Captain Croker to help them ; stating their wish for peace, and not at all suggesting what measures he ought to adopt. Captain Croker entered readily upon the task of trying to put a stop to the war. He set about it with the promptitude, energy, and spirit of a British officer ; but his knowledge of the native character, and of the means of resistance in a heathen fortress was defective. He seems to have expected that the first shot, should he fail in bringing the rebels to terms, would frighten them into an immediate sur- render. He was, however, wishful to avoid bloodshed ; and in an interview with the two Kings, Josiali Tuboii and George, be submitted to them the terms of peace, which he proposed to offer to the rebels. They agreed to these terms, and the management of the whole affair was left in bis hands, as peace-maker between the two parties. Captain Croker, according to the arrangement, proceeded to the principal fortress of the rebels, at Bea ; takkig with him a number of volunteers from his t2 324 WAK IN TONGA. vessel. These carried -with them three carronades, besides their small arms and ammimition. You will like to know what sort of a fort there was at the Bea. It was nearly a mile in circumference. The wall was more than twenty feet high, and several feet in thickness. It was formed of the butts of cocoa- nut trees placed perpendicularly. Above this high wall was a kind of network of cane or bamboo to increase the difficulty of scaling the fortification ; and at certain distances were loopholes with the guns so placed as to command the approaches. Outside of the barricade was a deep trench or moat, about forty feet wide, filled with water. The only entrance to the fortress was barricaded by cocoa-nut trees, laid horizontally ; a carronade was placed in the entrance, pointing towards the invaders. The whole was skil- fully planned, and seemed to be almost impregnable. Two Europeans were taking an active part in the business, one of whom had been an armourer. By the Captain's orders, the carronades were brought within a hundred and six yards of the forti- fication, within the range of the enemy's musketry. A native was then sent with a flag of truce, conveying Captain Croker's wish that they should surrender, and come to amicable terms with the Christians. A similar flag was shewn from the fortress, and the European, Jemmy, presented himself on the barricade. Captain Croker expressed his gratification that they should be willing to come to terms, and told him what were the conditions of peace ; the two principal being that WAR IN TONGA. 325 all the fortifications on the island, Christian and heathen should be levelled, and that the natives should return to their old employment and friendly inter- course. The European spoke to his own party ; and the result was, that Captain Croker was asked to join in conference with the chiefs. He proceeded within the fortress, accompanied by the second Lieutenant and two or three others, bearing a flag of truce, and a British flag. Things looked so warlike within, and many of the heathens assumed such menacing attitudes that," at first, the English questioned their own safety. They were, however, treated with courtesy ; and, after a parley of three-quarters-of-an-hour, they returned to their companions. The captain granted the rebels half-an-hour in order to consult with their friends at the neighbour- ing forts ; but before the time had expired, they sent to say that they were willing to come to terms, but could not hold intercourse with their enemies, the Christians. The reply was, "The terms proposed must be observed." As soon as the time had expired, the command was given to make the attack ; the captain leading the way. The serjeant of marines was ordered to scale the barricade and to fire. The attack was soon answered by the cannon at the entrance, and by a volley of musketry ; and the captain and several of his men were wounded. Notwithstanding his wound. Captain Croker exerted himself to the utmost to enter the stockade ; but failing in the attempt, and becoming B26 WAE IN TONGA. faint from the loss of blood, lie retired to a little distance ; and while leaning against a tree for support, •was shot through the heart and dropped lifeless, on the ground ! His men continued the attack ; but at a great disadvantage. The enemy were screened by their defences, while the English, on the open ground, were exposed to the hot fire of the enemy. This sad affair ended in the death of two officers, besides the captain. The first lieutenant and nineteen men were dangerously wounded. It was with great difficulty that the survivors contrived to carry off their dead and wounded. When they embarked on board their vessel, they took with them the two Missionaries, Messrs. Tucker and Eabone, with their families. The captain was buried at Tonga, in a spot which he had pointed out before the affray, as one that he should like for his grave, were he to die there. When a calamity like this becomes known, some who are startled and grieved by the tidings, seem to find a degree of relief in blaming those who were near the spot, but who were not among the sufferers ; and so Captain Croker's death was said to have been caused by the imprudent, or selfish counsels of the Missionaries. Eumours of this kind were circulated in Kew South Wales ; and some of the public prints, unfriendly to Missionary enterprise, availed them- selves of the opportunity thus afforded, to cast another slur on the character of godly and peace- loving men. The Eev. Messrs. Orton and M'Kenny, ■WAE IN TONGA. 327 of Sydney, waited upon the Governor, Sir George Gipps, who stated in the plainest terms, that the Missionaries were free from all blame ; that the officers of the Favourite, who knew the whole circum- stances, considered that they had acted as became Christian ministers. All that remained was the deep and lasting regret that Captain Croker, who so generously undertook the cause of the Missionaries and the Christians, had not gone about his work more warily. It is not doubted that a little more time given to negotiating terms of peace would have been well-spent. "When the Missionaries left Tonga, their chief motive was to lodge their families in a place of safety. They had no idea of giving up the mission, and leaving Satan to triumph in the success of his schemes. They knew that the heathen party were but tools in the hand of the great enemy of God and man ; and that the contest in which his agents were engaged, was one of error against truth, darkness against light, Belial against Christ. They knew that in their own closets, and in the Tonguese pulpits, they were carrying on the same conflict, on other ground, that was taxing the strength and energy of King George and his Christian warriors. Though Satan's sharpest contests, most boasted triumphs, and sorest defeats are wholly spiritual, yet he does not think the earthly part of man beneath his notice, and war suits well Apollyon, the destroyer. Having left the ladies and children with Christian 328 WAR IN TONGA. friends at Vavau, Mr. Tucker returned to Tonga, accompanied by Mr. Thomas, now the senior Mis- sionary, and chairman of the district. Messrs. Thomas and Tucker then visited the rebel fortresses. The chiefs were willing to listen to their old friend, and were persuaded to abstain from open hostilities. Peace was not settled on a permanent basis ; for the rebel chiefs still refused to submit to their King : but a sort of armed truce was the residt. Though not all that was desired it was more than had been granted for many weary, anxious months, and Mr. Turner returned, with a thankful heart, to his own sphere of labour. Mrs. Tucker rejoined her husband ; the mission was resumed; and its displaced machinery was set right, and worked on smoothly. djha^t^ir HU. PEACE AND PROGR ESS. ,v I HE war of 1840 was damaging in its effects, not only on Tonga, but also on the other V friendly Islands. JN^umbers of the people had to voyage backwards and forwards between their own dwelling-places and the seat of war ; and they were thus exposed to sore temptations. Other evils, too, hurricanes, and scarcity of food, marked the year as one of unwonted trials. The faith of many failed, and the number of church-members was lessened. Yet there was a goodly proportion who stood the test, and who came forth from the refining fire of affiction, purified as gold and silver. They learned new lessons. They knew now, not merely by the hearing of the ear, but by the stronger and sweeter assurance of the heart, that " the eye of the Lord is upon them that fear Him, upon them that hope in His mercy ; to deliver their souls from death, and to keep them alive in famine." The schools were thrown into much disorder, owing to the absence of many of the teachers. This 330 PEACE AND PROOEESS. was greatly to be regretted at a time when the scholars were giving proof of rapid progress. Com- modore Wilkes speaks well of what he saw at Tonga, in regard to mental training; and his testimony is valuable, as it is clear from many of his remarks, that he was by no means predisposed to flatter or to favour Wesleyan Missionaries. " Mrs. Tucker, whom we found exceedingly intelligent, gave us a kind wel- come. She has been for some time, the principal instructress of both old and young. I can myself vouch for the unexpected proficiency of some of her scholars in speaking English Shadrach, or Mumui, as he is also called, is a good sample of the Tonguese. I saw him at Mr. Tucker's, where he was introduced to me ; and I must confess myself not a little surprised to hear him address me in tolerably good English, asking me the news, and what occur- rences had taken place in Europe. It appeared ridiculous to be questioned by a half-naked savage upon such subjects ; but I must do him the justice to say, he seemed quite familiar with some of the events that have taken place during the last fifteen or twenty years. He is one of the Missionaries' most zealous converts ; he has, I understood, sole charge of their large school of three hundred scholars ; and it, in order and regularity, equals, if it does not exceed, any one in our own country."* * " Narrative of the United States' Exploring Expedition, during the years 1838 — 1842." In Five Volvimes. New York. Vol. III., pages 13—18. PEACE AND PROGRESS. ' 331 Mrs. Tucker has kindly furnished me with some recollections of her missionary life in the Friendly Islands. She tells me how she used to instruct her scholars. They were all seated on the ground in the schoolroom ; and when she wished to teach writing, each was furnished with a slate and pencil. They wrote from copy-slips, which she prepared for them. After practising writing for some time, those who were most advanced were formed into a class. A sentence was read to them, and they were required to write it on their slate. This was generally well done, as the Tonguese have little difficulty in spelling their own language correctly. In hope of benefiting the local preachers, she made it one of their school exercises to write sketches of sermons ; and after they had gained some notion of the necessary arrangements, they succeeded in this also very nicely. Geography was a favourite study. They had been accustomed to consider Tonga-tabu as the most important of all lands, and to speak of it as " the world;" and it was with great wonder and interest, that they learned how many other countries there are, larger and more thickly peopled than Tonga. It was a pretty sight one afternoon every week, when the school, divided into classes, sat on the ground with Mrs. Tucker's maps spread out before them. The teacher asked questions from a small manual of geography ; the scholars recited the answers, and found the places on their maps. In this way they acquired a general knowledge of the geography of the 332 PEACE AKD PEOGEESS. world. They took great pleasure in tracing the journey ings of the Israelites in the wilderness, and the travels of the Apostle Paul, and found that they could thus understand their Bibles better. A few lessons on astronomy were sometimes given to the natives. Mrs. Tucker mentions that on one occasion, in a voyage from Haabai to Tonga, she and Mr. Tucker were detained several days at the island of Nomuka. There were no houses on that part of the island; so the crew drove stakes into the sand of the sea-shore, fastened them together at the top, and covered the whole with plaited cocoa-nut leaves. They were thus screened from the heat by day, and from the cold and dew by night. The evenings were spent in conveying to the natives, by familiar illustra- tion, some idea of the first principles of astronomy. The lamp was made to represent the sun ; a cocoa- nut the earth ; some other object the moon ; and as the cocoa-nut, suspended by a twisted thread, revolved round the lamp, they were taught the motions of the earth, with the cause of the change in its seasons. Lessons were also given on eclipses, gravi- tation, &c. Thus the views of the natives became corrected and enlarged ; and they were led reve- rently to adore Him " who hangeth the earth upon nothing." In January, 1841, the Eev. John Waterhouse visited the Eriendly Isles. Perhaps we shall gain a good idea of the state of the mission at this time, if we go over the ground with him, catching a glimpse PEACE AND PKOQRESS. 333 of what he saw, and stopping now and then to make brief extracts from his copious notes. Mr. Waterhouse landed first at Eua ; and his first interview with a company of Tongans took place in a canoe house on that island. A few local preachers and about twenty other Christians had come over to visit the Church there, hoping to strengthen a cause yet in its infancy. They welcomed Mr. "Waterhouse most heartily, weeping while they thanked God for bringing him among them in safety. The canoe-house became a temple for worship. A Tonguese hymn was sung, Mr. Waterhouse engaged in prayer, and was followed in the same exercise by a native preacher from Hihifo, whose powerful pleading with God touched the hearts of all present. Two of the local preachers left their canoe in charge of the other natives that they might accom- pany Mr. "Waterhouse to the Triton ; point out the reefs ; and help to steer the vessel in safety to Tonga. On reaching that island he soon found a comfortable home with Mr. and Mrs. Tucker : but his joy in meeting them was checked by finding them both sufiiering from ill-health. Mr. Tucker's abundant labours, and great mental anxiety during the war, had brought him very low ; and Mrs. Tucker's strength was so far prostrated that a return to her native country seemed to be neces- sary for her recovery. This being so, it was arranged that they should leave with the Triton. Their loss was greatly felt by their brethren, and by the Christian natives, for whose welfare they had toiled ceaselessly. 334 PEACE AND PROGRESS. The day after Mr, Waterhouse reached Tonga, he was introduced to King George. He thus records his visit : — " Mr. Tucker took me to see King George and his Queen. He was sitting with the skeleton of a sermon in his hand, preparing for Lis Sabbath duties. I was greatly delighted at seeing this Christian King. He is a tall, fine-looking, well- made man ; with a remarkably penetrating eye, and of dignified carriage. Christian benignity beamed from his countenance. His words were few, but well chosen. He does not think aloud ; but deliberates and then speaks." Mr. Waterhouse preached in the afternoon of the same day to a thousand people. On the King's return home, he took a local preacher with him to assist in writing down the sermon that they bad heard. On the following Sunday, Mr. Waterhouse heard King George preach to a large, and deeply- interested congregation. He says : — " The Iving looked remarkably well in his snow-white cravat and black coat. There are several English ministers whose skin is much darker then his. He has not much action ; but is deliberate and impressive ; com- bining in his appearance the dignity of a King, the simplicity of a Christian, and the benignity of one called to preach the Gospel of the blessed God. At my request, Mr. Tucker took down in pencil the sermon as he delivered it, and translated it into English, which gave me a fine opportunity of judging PEACE AND PROGRESS. 335 for myself of a discourse witli the delivery of which I had been so much pleased ; nor was the pleasure in the least diminished by reading it." On the 26 th of January, JVIr. Waterhouse visited Hihifo, the old King accompanying him. They went twelve miles by sea, and then had a walk of three miles. The path, admitting about three persons to walk abreast, wound along under the grateful shade of overhanging trees. They entered the Christian fort- ress of Hihifo, and found the watch on guard as though fearing besiegers. Within the fortress was a spacious square, enclosing a few fine, lofty trees, of the kind called by the natives Toa, and by the English Iron ivood tree. On the boughs of these trees, bats were hanging in immense numbers, Mr. Waterhouse shall describe them :— " The head is shaped like that of a fox ; the nose is sharp and black ; the ears are naked and pointed ; the hair is short and smooth, of a mouse-colour, inclining to red ; the wings are similar in colour to those of the common bat, and on the joint of each wing is a sharp, crooked claw. The noise and squeal- ing of thousands of these creatures were intolerable. At sunset they take their flight in swarms, and remind one of English rooks on their return to roost. At daybreak they come back to their former retreat, hanging in clusters. The smell proceeding from them is exceedingly disagreeable. Two or three were shot 336 PEACE AND PE0GEES8. for me, the skins of wliich I preserved. In the heathen state of the Tonguese these creatures were held sacred and regarded by many as gods ; so that to have shot one at that time would have been an unpardonable offence." The wooden drum was soon beaten to caU the natives from their work to worship. In a few minutes a thousand were gathered together to hear their new visitor preach. Service over, Mr. Waterhouse was taken to the house of the chief. A circle of chiefs was formed and their favourite kava was handed round. Mr. "Waterhouse tasted it ; and turned not unwillingly to a repast of fowl and yam. The fowl was not cut up with knives, but torn up by the fingers. Thus divided, the pieces were placed on banana-leaves instead of plates, and handed round. "Warm cocoa-nut milk, in cups made of the banana-leaf, was next offered to the chiefs' guests. Thankful for this simple meal, they said farewell and set off again, staff in hand. " On reaching the sea," says Mr. Waterhouse, "we found the tide out, so that we could not get to regularly deep water, without winding our way through reefs. How to accomplish this with anything like speed was ray difficulty; until I saw five natives throw them- selves into the sea, each having hold of a rope which was fastened to the head of the canoe. Sometimes they were diving and sometimes svdmming, untU they found a little coral, on which they stood, puUing us onward. By means of this, and of large poles, used PEACE AND PROGRESS. 337 on board to push our vessel forward, we got into deep water, and hoisted our large sail, when a stiff breeze sprang up, and we went at about twelve knots an hour. Having to tack several times, I was not a little amused to see one man, each time the sail was moved, jump into the water with a rope fastened to a given point of the sail, by which means he kept it from endangering our vessel. I found that this was their general plan, when changing the position of the sail, in order to make a tack under a strong breeze." Mr. "Waterhouse soon saw that the best thing that could be done to aid the Tonguese Mission, would be to secure a more solid foundation for future peace. During the armed truce gained by Mr. Thomas's timely efforts, there remained much cause of anxiety. The Christians dared not quit their fortresses, and disperse themselves over the island, for fear of any treacherous movement on the part of their late foes. Peace had not been ratified in the usual Tonga fashion, by a meeting between the rebels and their King. They had not confessed their crime, and he had not forgiven them in formal phrase. Mr. Waterhouse became very desirous of effecting this meeting. He went to the Mua, Fatu's fortress, with Mr. Tucker as his companion. Fatu treated his visitors with the utmost politeness, listened to the arguments used by Mr. Waterhouse, and expressed his readiness to act according to his wishes. Being urged to go to Josiah and seek his pardon, he put his arm round Mr. 338 PEACE AND PEOGRESS. Waterhouse, and said, " Tou are now my son. I want peace ; but I am ashamed and afraid to go to Tabou. If he will visit me with you, I will humble myself" Every one of us knows how difficult a thing to a proud heart, is the first step towards a reconciliation. If we are in the wrong, it is not easy to own it. But let the offended party come ever so little a way towards us, and the worst part of the business is done. The first step is taken ; and taken for us by another. TVe are drawn towards him by an attraction that strengthens every moment, till falling on his neck, we take and give the kiss of peace. A child may grow more and more stubborn under threats and chastise- ment ; but when his mother tells him that she is ready to forgive him now, his hard heart melts. If parents and teachers bore this in mind, their difficul- ties with trying and obstinate tempers would be lessened. They have a model for imitation in Him, against whom they themselves have sinned most deeply. " God, the offended God most high Ambassadors to rebels sends ; His messengers His place supply, And Jesus begs us to be friends." Messrs. "Waterhouse and Tucker went home and told King George what Patu had said. " It is all very good," he said, "if Fatu is sincere, and if Tubou will go ; but I am afraid that he will not." Then they went to the old King, who was reserved and PEACE AND PROGRESS. 339 silent at first ; but at length consented to send for King G-eorge aiid the principal chiefs, and consult them on the subject. They decided that the King had better go. Josiah, always a quiet, peace-loving man, was now growing old, and had a large share of the timidity that usually accompanies advancing age. He knew enough of the character of his heathen foes to make him doubt the issue of a visit to them. The old man said, " They will kill me ; but if they do not, I shall never come back again." He parted with his Queen as though it might be a final farewell ; and chose to saU in the canoe that carried Mr. Waterhouse, having refused to go in any other way. Two canoes followed, that they might take a message to King George in case the heathen gave cause for alarm. On reaching Mua, the King sat down between his two Missionary friends, awaiting the result with more of misgiving than of hope. A few minutes elapsed and then Fatu came up, took his seat near the King, and wept. Tubou turned his face towards him, and they exchanged the Tonguese kiss, by touching noses. The King was next taken to a large house within the fort ; and soon the natives were to be seen rushing in every direction to get their mats, which they always wear above their ordinary dress when they come into the presence of the chiefs. After this, a large body of the chiefs came before the King. Each, in token of humility and submission, wore a wreath of the leaves of the IJi tree ; while a heathen priest inter- ceded for them in the name of their gods. Josiah z2 340 PEACE AND PEOQKESS. saw and heard. As a pledge of forgiveness, he desired the chiefs to throw aside the mourning wreaths, and to come nearer to him. Immediately the kava-ring was formed, and a hundred or more chiefs and people joined in the ceremony. The King made a brief speech, assuring them of his forgiveness, and several among them came and kissed his feet. The company then dispersed. At eight o'clock, six women entered the house where the King was, beariag lighted torches of cocoa-nut wood. Others placed lighted torches outside. Provisions were brought ; they consisted of several pigs baked whole, two very large sharks, with smaller fish and forty baskets of baked yams. Every thing was carried to the King and counted in his presence ; and he, through his speaker, gave the order for commencing operations. The food was cut ixp with much skill and dispatch. After the heathen were gone, the Christians united together in prayer ; and then all prepared for sleeping. Messrs. "Waterhouse and Tucker lay in one corner, upon a native mat, their heads resting on a pillow of wood. The poor King had eaten little food ; and he got no sleep. The fear that, in the mind of the heathen, some evil design lurked behind their show of submission stdl haunted him. But hour after hour wore past, and the stillness of the night remained unbroken. The mosquitoes were the only intruders into the place of rest. The next morning, about two hundred chiefs and people joined in another kava- drinking ; and then Josiah Tubou and his own party PEACE AND PKOGRESS. 341 returned to Nukualofa, with good news for anxious friends at home. Mr. "Waterhouse afterwards visited the Bea, and prepared the way for a similar meeting there ; he was obliged to leave, however, before that meeting took place. His next visit was to Haabai, where he was greatly- encouraged by what he saw of the native class-leaders. "Among them," he says, "are some chaice men, well qualified to teach others in the things of God." He had great comfort in preaching to the people, Mr. Turner acting as his interpreter ; and often, in con- versing with them afterwards, he heard them speak of "getting much good" under his ministry. From Haabai, Mr. "Waterhouse proceeded to Vavau. He was greatly struck with its scenery, " beautiful beyond description," and far exceeding that of Tonga, or of Haabai.* While there a love- feast was held, and he was pleased with the distinct and scriptural account given of their conversion to God, by most of those who spoke. Many alluded to the time of Mr. Turner's stay among them. It was * Mr. Young seems to hold the same opinion. He says in his Journal : " We reached Vavau group by sunrise. I went on deck, and what a scene of beauty was presented ! I counted about thii'ty islands, of various forms and sizes, gilded by the rays of the rising sun. We soon entered the bay of Vavau, and proceeded for ten miles to the town of Neiafu, off which we anchored. The bay is capacious ; full of beautiful islets ; and woidd hardly be second to Port Jackson, did villas and gai-dens adorn its numerous slojDing banks, and ornament its many coves." 342 PEACE AND PEOGEESS. then that they were led to repentance, and that they found redemption through the blood of Christ. His love was still burning in their hearts, they said. Some who were about to proceed to Mua, Niua Foou, and Rotuma, as teachers, spoke impressively of their con- viction that it was the will of God that they should go. One said that Lis friends had begged him to remain at home till after their death ; and then he quoted our Lord's words, " Let the dead bury their dead ; but go thou and preach the kingdom of God." As soon as this young man sat down, his aged father rose and told how severe had been the struggle in his own mind about parting with his son; "but," said he, " when he told me of God's will, I dared not say a word." Mr. Waterhouse was much pleased with what he saw of the Missionaries and their work, in the three groups of the Friendly Isles ; and left them full of gratitude to God, for so large a blessing as He had graciously given to His servants. There were, how- ever, one or two defects fco which he specially directed the attention of the Missionaries on the spot, and of the committee at home. The people had not made such progress in the useful arts as might have been expected ; nor were the native teachers sufficiently instructed in general knowledge, and in sound theology. It seemed to him indispensably necessary to pay special attention to the training of native teachers. Some of the men employed in this way had a thirst for knowledge, and were likely to prize the privilege of PEACE AKD PKOGRESS. 343 being taugbt in a Ti'aining Institution. In accordance with these views, the following resolution was adopted at the annual district meeting for the islands : — " That an Institution be commenced for the purpose of com- municating to native candidates sound theological instruction, and such general knowledge as may make them useful auxiliaries to the Missionaries in their important work." The Eev. Prancis "Wilson was selected to manage this promising scheme ; and the committee at home gave their hearty sanction to it. It was stated that the expenses connected with the undertaking, would be chiefly met by local exertions. Mr. "Waterhouse paid a short visit to Niua, Niua Foou, "Wallis's Island, and Eotuma. With the second of these places he was highly delighted. As soon as the mission-party had managed to land at the difficult landing-place already described, the islanders brought native mats, fastened to long poles by strong cords ; on these mats they mounted their visitors, and then they scrambled over the rocks surely and skil- fully, bearing them on their shoulders in triumph. Numbers had been employed in breaking off large branches from the trees, and clearing a pathway through the thick brushwood ; and while the bearers ran along fleetly, crowds came trooping after, till Mr, Waterhouse and his party were set down in the midst of a courtly circle, on the lawn before the King's house. The native teachers, under whose care the infant church in Nina Poou had been placed, were very 344 PEACE AND PROGRESS. superior men ; and the effects of their teaching were visible in the habits and manners of the people. The Christians there were simple, hearty, loving, joyous. They were eager in questioning their visitors, having laid up a large stock of queries to be put on any such glad occasions, as that of a visit from English Mission- aries. Mrs. Tucker proved a ready listener and answerer ; and she went from company to company, giving the meanings of the English words that they met with in their translated Scriptures. Mr. "Waterhouse having learned that there seemed, at last, to be an opening for Christian teaching at Wallis's Island, appealed to the teachers who had laboured with so much success for three years at Niua Foou, and asked whether they were willing to go to suffer for their Master, and, should it be the will of God, even to die for His sake. One of them said, " The time is gone by for me to seek my own will ; you have only to say it is your mind, and I will go." All agreed to go, and their wives shewed the same courage and promptitude. Orders were given for them to be ready, with their children, by the next morning ; when they sailed under Mr. Waterhouse's escort for Uvea, On the 27th May, 1841, they reached Uvea, or Wallis's Island; and here they found a very different people from any thab they had yet seen ; a people resembling what the natives of the Tonga group had been twenty years before. On enquiry, it was found that the chief who lived near the place of anchorage. PEACE AND PROGRESS, 345 had welcomed the very same Koman Catholic priests whom King George had so coolly dismissed ; and that he and his people had become Papists. The King of the island remained a steadfast heathen, and was on unfriendly terms with the Eoman Catholic chief, and his priests. Mr. Waterhouse resolved that if he could with safety leave the Triton so near a warlike chief, he would visit the King, who was living at a distance of ten or twelve miles from the shore, and see if he could be persuaded to accept Protestant teachers. His way was made plainer by a visit from the chief, who came out to see Mr. Waterhouse in a double canoe, accompanied by about fifty men. He was a tall, fine, gentlemanly person, and spoke English unusually well. He told Mr. Waterhouse that he could not permit him to leave teachers for his people, as he now did nothing without consulting the priest. Had Mr. Waterhouse came to his country first, he would not have objected. He said nothing against the proposed visit to the King ; but observed, — " This is my ground. I shall not however, object, to your visiting the King, though we are not friendly, as he will not lotu to the Pope." The missionaries then proceeded to the residence of the King, where they were courteously received. They were not more successful in their main business. The King said, " I have great love to my gods, and shall not embrace Christianity at present. I also killed some of your teachers, and, after such an act, should be ashamed to embrace their reli2;ion." 346 PEACE AKD PEOGEESS. Though disappointed of his hope, yet Mr. Water- house felt that this visit was not without its use. He learned that a new attempt to establish Popery in the South Sea Islands would soon be made. He was told that the Eoman Catholic Bishop of New Zealand was expected with a fresh supply of priests, and that he meditated another rieit to the Friendly Isles. He took care to write to the Missionaries labouring there, urging them to speak on this subject to the members of the various infant churches, and to fortify their minds against the erroneous teaching of wily men. Mr. Wilson, especially, was directed to guard the young men about to be received into the Training Institution agauist this special danger, by making them familiar with the Rev. Dr. Hannah's " Lectures on Popery." On the 31st May, the Triton weighed anchor, and directed her course to Eotuma, an island three hundi'ed miles to the west. Botuma is a mountaiuous island, much larger than either of the Niuas. It is fertile, and seldom visited by hurricanes. The natives are an inferior race, the women especially, being much less in stature than those of the Priendly Islands. Many of the natives had a smattering of English, the island being often visited by vessels. Besides many English, American, and Portuguese were living there — men of the lowest class, by whom the morals of the natives had been grievously corrupted. Though accustomed to white PEACE AND PKOQEESS. 347 men, an English lady was quite a novelty, and no sooner had the mission-party entered a native dwelling, than numbers crowded in to see Mrs. Tucker. Their intense curiosity, expressed by singular looks and remarks, was amusing at first, though it soon became troublesome. The house was too hot for endurance, and the Missionaries were glad to escape from its stifling atmosphere and to take a walk in the shady woods. The natives followed ; and when their white visitors sat down to rest under the trees, they pressed around, coming as near as possible to Mrs. Tucker, touching her dress and her feet. On rising again, they walked quickly, hoping to keep ahead of their pursuers, when one young man, who could speak a little English, cried out, " Tou stop little bit ; they want to see the woman." Mrs. Tucker good humour- edly complied, and then they all raised higher notes of wonder and delight. The principal chief of Eotuma, who had formerly visited Tonga, was glad to receive Missionary teachers. He welcomed them to his land and home. " White Missionary," said he, " very good man ; Mr. Water- house, you shall now be my father ; and Mrs. Tucker, you shall be my mother. We love you both too much. Tou go ashore, and Mr. and Mrs. Tucker, to see my wife and one child." With the teachers and their wives, and other Christian members brought from Vavau, a society of twenty members was planted in Eotuma, under the sanction of two heathen chiefs. The teachers had 348 PEACE AND PEOGEESS. been plodding hard at the language during their voyage, and were making rapid progress. They set about translating the Lord's Prayer directly, that the natives might be able to join intelligently in one part of Christian worship, even from the very commence- ment. Mr. Tucker gave them pens, ink, and paper ; and other things essential for their comfort were furnished, as far as it was possible. Mr. Waterhouse says, " Our parting scene was affecting ; they wept and kissed our hands, while we commended them to Him whose loving kindness is better than life." Mr. "Waterhouse pursued his way to the Fiji group. One of the results of the reconciliation between King Josiah Tubou and the heathen chiefs of Tonga, was the re-establishment of the mission at Hihifo. The Eev. Matthew "Wilson was appointed to labour there. The mission-house, first occupied by Mr. Thomas fifteen years before, had been pulled down after Mr. Eabone quitted it. The Missionary, his wife and children were therefore forced to seek shelter in a native house. The largest in the fortress was assigned to them ; but it was low and dark, having no opening but the door for the admission of light. On a rainy, dark day, they were obliged to burn lights in the middle of the afternoon. Being inside the fortress, and without a fence, it was crowded in the day by men, women, and children ; and in the night by cats, rats, dogs, and pigs. Tou may be sure that they were glad to remove, after ten weeks spent in such PEACE AND PKOGEESS. 349 company, to a nice, new house, built outside the fortress, in a very airy spot. To the honour of the people of Hihifo, it must be stated that the mission- house was the largest and best in the Tonga district, and was raised free of expense to the mission. Messrs. Thomas* and "Wilson soon visited the heathen chiefs, and were received rather shyly at fii"st, though, after a time, friendly intercourse was resumed. Mr. Wilson says : — " I went to Houma, to the head chief, Vaea, who was lying down, some other chiefs standing by him. After a few words they told me to speak freely, which I did, preaching to them Christ, and the immortality of the soul. They told me whenever I went that way, always to call upon them, and that I was at liberty to go into any part of the fortress whenever I pleased. I felt truly thankful to God for this. Within the last three months, I have had the oppor- tunity of faithfully preaching Christ to many of the heathens. I have encouraged them to bring different articles to barter ; and my plan is always to converse closely with them when they come, and to read some part of the Word of God to them, taking care to let Christ speak for himself, and mostly selecting some of the miracles and sayings of Christ to read and explain to them. When I read, I ask, ' Have you ever heard this before ? ' The answer is ' No.' ' Is there any person among you that can do such mighty works * Mr. Thomas was now stationed at Nukualofa 350 PEACE AND PEOGEESS. as tliese ? ' ' No.' ' Cannot your Taulaeiki (the person who is possessed of what they call the spirit) open the eyes of the blind, cause the dumb to speak, heal the sick and raise the dead ? ' And still they answer, 'No.' I then tell them of Christ, the great and true Grod, who is the Saviour of all men. "When they go, I charge them to inform their friends of what they have heard. And when I hear of any of the heathens having come on a visit to their friends at Hihifo, I often send for them, or go to them if they do not come ; but they generally come from curiosity." Shortly after, the wife of Vaea embraced Chris- tianity ; and, on Mr. "Wilson's next visit to Houma, she, with several of her children, was present at Christian worship. Many from among the heathens joined the church of Christ ; and many more showed symptoms of dissatisfaction with their own religion, and led the Missionaries to hope for a speedy change in them also. The death of several powerful chiefs who, at the eleventh hour, confessed that their system could not afford them comfort or hope, had a favourable influence on the minds of survivors. On the 13th January, 1842, Fatu died. His illness was long ; and the heathens resorted to many means, while seeking his recovery. At length, they deter- mined to ofier a human sacrifice, their most costly gift, and that which they thought most likely to render an angry God propitious. A young man was marked PEACE AND PROaRESS. 351 out as tlie victim. He beard of it, and escaped to Nukualofa. They then chose a boy, eleven years of age. They anointed their victim with oil, and deco- rated him in the most splendid manner. A cord was then placed abovit his neck, and drawn tightly by two persons, one on eacli side. This wicked but religious deed was done with tlie sanction of the boy's father, and with his assistance ; for he was one of the two executioners. The dead body was carried to the spirit-bouse ; but Fatu did not recover. Mr. Thomas was sent for. Patu said that he had been wishing to see him for tbree days. He renounced bis Tonga gods, professed his belief in the true God, and died, as far as man could tell, relying upon the Lord Jesus Christ. Fatu was succeeded in bis government by his youngest son, who was favour- ably disposed to religion. He proposed that his sister and her husband, with their children and people, should reside at Mua, and build a chapel ; but objections were raised by the Heathens, so tbat the Christians were put to a further trial of faitb. Mr. Thomas, on looking round at the various stations of Tonga, says, " The cause of the devil is laid in ruins in every part of this land. A few old and infirm chiefs are doing what they can to keep the ruins together : but they drop oft', one after another, while doing it, and are not thanked for their pains. Preach- ing is established either in or near to every village, so that all who desire it can hear the Word of Grod twice every Lord's day, as well as once in the week. 352 PEACE AND PROGEESS. without travelling far from their homes. The general impression abroad among the people is that 'religion is true, and that the Tonga gods are all lies.' ' Their rock is not as our rock, even our enemies themselves being judges.' " Mr. Thomas had the charge of more than a thousand members at Nukualofa, and could not visit the heathens as they needed, and as he wished. The want of more Missionaries was sorely felt : but the claims of other places and the state of the funds prevented the committee from respond- ing to earnest calls for help. Mr. Wilson found that a better system of educa- tion was greatly needed at Hihifo. The Christians there had never had the same advantages as had the other Priendly Islanders. The mission had been frequently broken up ; and the habits of the people had not been formed to patient, steady applica- tion. The parents were indifferent to their children's training, indulging them to excess ; and for them- selves made few enquiries after books. Mr. Wilson had not been long among them, before a great change took place. He re-modeUed the schools ; formed the scholars into classes according to their attainments ; taught them to commit verses of Scripture to niemory ; began a catechetical meeting for the children, at five o'clock every Sabbath evening ; persuaded many of the parents to question their children every day ; and did for Hihifo what Mr. and Mrs. Tucker had done before for Lifuka and Nukualofa. He told the people to bring all their books to him, and finding that PEACE AND PROGEESS. 353 scarcely two had books alike, most having been cir- culated in the sheet, fresh from the press, he advised them to get the Scriptures in order, and to bring them to the chapel on all preaching-days, so that they might read the lessons after the preacher. In a short time, the people showed a wonderful thirst for read- ing ; while in the schools, Mr. and Mrs. Wilson had four hundred and ninety-six scholars, and eighty-five teachers. You "will wish to know something about the pro- jected native Training Institution ; and also whether the threat of another visit from the Eoman Catholics came to pass. On the 3rd June, 1841, the Eev. Francis Wilson met the native preachers at daylight as usual, to give them their appointments for the coming Sabbath ; to answer their questions on passages of Scripture ; and to assist them in making the outlines of their ser- mons. This was at Neiafu, Vavau. At the close of the meeting, it was found that several people had been sent by King George to set up a house for the new academy. The King had given orders that it should be built free of cost to the mission ; and his people had cut the timbers before bringing them from the bush. The house was smaller than Mr. Wilson liked ; but the timbers being all prepared, this defect covdd not be remedied. Perhaps you do not know how short a time it takes to put up a Tonga house. After sunrise, on that 3rd June, the grass was grow- 2 a 354 PEACE AND PEOGKESS. ing knee-deep on the site of the new building ; before the sun went down, the walls were raised, the roof thatched, and the house floored with native mats, ready for occupation. It had neither doors nor win- dows ; merely an opening at the side and end, which served the same purposes. Mr. Wilson determined on having desks and benches, quite a new thing in the islands. But now came a diOiculty. These must be made, and there was no timber on the station. How- ever the students went to the bush in quest of trees, and cut them up into planks. Then, with the assist- ance of Messrs. Wilson, Turner, and Kevem, who turned carpenters for the occasion, and regretted that they had not taken a few lessons whUe in England, they contrived to make some strong, massive, and durable school fittings. The desks and benches answered well, and the only expense laid upon the mission funds, was the price of a few axes. On the 13th of July, the native Institution was opened with nine students. It was difficult to meet with the class of men for whom the Institution was at first designed — young men, without family ties, who were williug to give themselves up fully to the work of the Lord. Many were anxious for instruction ; but some of these were married men ; others were chiefs engaged already in the government of their own provinces ; and others from age, or family circum- stances were ineligible as resident students, preparing for the work of assistant Missionaries. Only two were found to answer exactly to the rules of the ^ ' u L -t- PEACE AND PIIOGRESS. 355 Institution. As this was the case, it was judged well to receive a few as daily attendants, who might thus qualify themselves more fully for the office of head teachers. Mr. Wilson began by setting the whole nine to learn the English alphabet. The thought of learning English raised their spirits, and they went to work with alacrity. But it was soon found, that the married men could not attend five days in the week without neglecting their families and plantations ; and that the older men, very ignorant of their own written language, and unused to habits of mental discipline, found English too hard for them. It seemed un- likely that they would so master it, as to be able to read it with profit. The nine students were there- fore divided into two classes, of two and seven. All learned Tonguese, reading, writing, theology, and geography ; while the two designed for assistant Mis- sionaries, learned English also. One of these, a Eijian, made rapid progress ; the other, a Tongan, was not so ready ; but he applied diligently and gave promise of conquering the difficulty. Mr. Wilson says, in his first report, " We have laboured under peculiar disadvantages from the want of books in the Tonga language, and a grammar and vocabulary for those who are studying English ; and having but a very scanty knowledge of Tonguese, it has been hard work to get up a few books to go on with. We have had very little paper for the students to write on, which has been another impediment. The Bible is 2a 2 356 PEACE AND PEOGEESS. our reading book. A chapter is read at each meeting, when suitable explanations of difficult passages are given. A small geography of Canaan, and of the places mentioned in the Acts, has been introduced in manuscript ; with maps of Canaan and of the coun- tries visited by the apostles. An outline of the geography of the world has been used, along with a map of the world ; a small book, too, containing the English words found in the Tonga books, with their meaning in Tonguese. In preparing these books we were indebted to Mrs. Tucker, who had devoted a great deal of time to these things, and who left us her books. The students have written a short course of lectures on the leading doctrines of Christianity as held by our body ; following the order observed by the E/CV. Dr. Hannah." Mr. Wilson speaks well of the moral conduct and religious feeling of the students ; but owns to being often tried by their dullness and apparent stupidity. King George, when at Vavau, attended the Institution regularly, and highly prized the privilege ; though of course his Majesty was not reckoned in the number of scholars. In the following year, a number of school books with paper and other useful things, were sent out to the Institution ; and King George gave a large piece of ground for the use of the students. Fifteen students were under instruction in the year 1844 ; but difficulties arose in the way of receiving any as assist- ant Missionaries. It was not thought well to place PEACE AND PROGRESS. 357 young men so much above the old teachers, already ou the ground, and " not inferior to the new ones in natural talent, and holy zeal, but only in this, that they had gone out before any institution had been estab- lished." So when the period of their stay at Neiafu had elapsed, they were sent out in the same position as the former teachers, only better qualified for their work. Three years after the opening of the Institu- tion, four young men were stationed on the out islands ; two were appointed to Niua Tobutabu ; one to Niua Toou, and one to Uvea. Mr. Wilson laboured with the utmost diligence in this sphere of diity till the year 1845, when his health failed. He lingered for many months, using every means judged likely to promote his recovery, and wishing, if it were the will of God, that his life might be spared to carry on the work that lay near his heart. Mr. Wilson was a true Missionary. He had counted the cost before he left his native country ; and he cast no regretful looks on his forsaken English home and Christian privileges. None of his missionary com- panions ever heard him lament anything in connexion with his life of arduous toil, but his small apparent usefulness. He loved to preach the Gospel ; and though, during the spring of 1S46, he grew weaker and weaker every day, yet while it was possible, he continued to declare "the unsearchable riches of Christ." On the Good Friday of that year, he went to a small island, Talevai, to preach and give tickets ; but 358 PEACE AND PROGRESS. he was unable to proceed, and was brought home quite exhausted. He was of a quiet and equable spirit ; and no hurry or confusion of mind was observed during his long and trying affliction. The desire for life that has been named was not unhallowed or impatient ; it was kept in sweet submission to the will of God. " He liv<^d in the spirit of prayer ; and when his great debility and want of voice would not allow him to speak much, he was engaged in holy mental converse with his Saviour, and would say, in a whisper, ' Jesus is precious ! God is good ! my soul is happy ; but I sometimes fear the work of holiness does not go on as it should in my heart.' His Bible and Hymn book were always near his couch ; and he read every day a chapter in ' Benson's Com- mentary on the Holy Scriptures,' and a chapter in ' Bloomfield's Greek Testament.' " His watching friends sometimes man'elled that his sufferings never produced anxious longing to depart, and they greatly admired his persevering use of all the means that might possibly re-establish his health. The truth was that selfish thoughts were lost in yearning pity for the souls around him. The society had been in a low, decaying state for some tune ; and the Missionaries felt the need of such an outpouring of the Spirit as had been granted in the years 1833—1834. Shortly before Mr. Wilson's death, they had proof that their prayer was heard. God graciously revived his work ; and again hundreds of the people were engaged in confessing sin and PEACE AND PROGKESS. 359 seeking pardon. Mr. Wilson's heart rejoiced ; he begged that his couch might be carried to the chapel, that he might hear for himself the sobs and groans of the penitents, mingling with the thanksgivings of those who had just found peace ; and when he had drunk in the glad sound, his latest wish was fulfilled, and with Simeon he exclaimed, " Lord, now lettest Thou Thy servant depart in peace, according to Thy word ; for mine eyes have seen Thy salvation." On the morning of the 3rd March, he was carried out as usual, to breathe the fresh air. On his return he showed signs of increasing feebleness ; and from that time till the following morning, his life ebbed out slowly. His heart was engaged with God, and expressed itself in short and whispered petitions. Just before his death, he asked his friends to pray ; and then, while they thought he was dropping into a quiet doze, his spirit was gently dismissed. Mr. Wilson's death was deeply mourned by the Missionaries. He had been a diligent student of God's word, and had given much time to the study of Greek, to qualify himself for carrying on the transla- tion of the Scriptures — still an incomplete work. His brethren were beginning to look to him as one on whose judgment and learning they might rely in case of any difficulty arising in translation. The native Christians felt his loss keenly. He was a general favourite, and used to be called " the kind and generous man." Nearly all the people of the island were present at his funeral ; and as Mr. Turner and 360 PEACE AND PEOGEESS. several of the chiefs spoke of his excellences by his open grave, they " Twenty times made pause, to sob and weep. That all tlie standers-by had wet their cheeks. Like trees bedash' d with rain." Several of the teachers cried out that now they knew the value of him whose body they were hiding in the tomb. One said, " He it was who taught my hand to write." Another said, " He taught me the meaning of God's word." A third exclaimed, " Alas ! I do remember to-day my inattention to him at times, when I missed the school without much cause : he lived for us, and died for us." And so said they all. We have yet to enquire as to the promised visit of the Eoman Catholics. On the 17th December, 1841, a Prench ship of war, the Allier, twenty- two guns, Captain Bouzet, dropped anchor near Neiafu, Yavau. An of&cer came on shore, and waited on the principal chief. King George not being at home. He said that he had a special message from the French King to King George. He requested the chiefs to go on board the next morning, taking with them an inter- preter, who must not be a Missionary. They went, accompanied by a Portuguese. The captain received them most kindly, took them over his vessel, and made a present to the principal chief. He told them that they had done right in receiving English and American Missionaries, and added that they ought to receive PEACE AND PROGBESS. 361 French Missionaries too. He asked why they had refused the priest whom the French bishop had offered to leave among them ; and said that it was wrong, and against the usages of civilised nations. With all his politeness, he contrived to insinuate a threat. " Do you know," said he, "what the French have done at the Sandwich Islands and Tahiti ? " On the chief's departure from the vessel, a salute was fired. What should come in the wake of the man-of-war but a small schooner, bringing the Roman Catholic Bishop of New Zealand, the very man whom King George had declined to receive in 1838 ! This Bishop came on shore next day, accompanied by a Priest. Unfortunately for him, but well for our mission, he brought as interpreter a worthless man, a deserter from a French ship. Much the same conversation took place as that of the day before, on board the corvette ; but the interpreter had an evil tongue, and took the opportunity to abuse all the Missionaries, and Mr. Thomas in particular. In his anger and insolence, he used most unbecoming language to the chiefs ; so that after he left, the people said that had they been heathens and not Christians, they would have split his head with their clubs, and risked the consequences. The chiefs remained firm, though no pains were spared to entangle them. Wishful to make at least one proselyte, the captain of the man-of-war offered to send a boat ashore for the Portuguese, if he would go to worship on board, and return to his former 362 PEACE AND PEOGEESS. faith ; but the man declined the civility. He was a member of the Methodist societ3\ The Missionaries had two lengthy conversations with the Bishop and the Priest. They remonstrated against his endeavouring to introduce the Roman Catholic faith among a people who had, to a man, renounced heathenism, and been baptized into the Protestant church ; and they intimated that should the people be induced to receive Popish teachers, disputes, and possibly war, would follow. The con- versation then turned on some of the peculiarities of Romanism. The Bishop showed an excellent temper throughout the whole conversation, though closely plied with questions. He said that he had no inten- tion of leaving a Missionary at present; that the schooner had merely put in for water and provisions. The next day, the 27th, the two vessels sailed away. The captain of the man-of-war left letters for the King, and intimated that another vessel would call in a few months, to receive his answer. It was said that the vessels steered towards Wallis's Island. Two letters were addressed to King George ; one in French, and the other in English. The following is a literal copy of the EngHsh letter : — " To King George Tahofaho. " Sir, — His Majesty the King of the Prench, having been informed that his lordship, the most respectable Prench Bishop Pompalice, to whom has been entrusted the whole Christian mission to evangelise the natives PEACE AKD PROGRESS. 363 of the South Sea Islands, had not received, during his stay in this harhour, in the year 1838, the' kind reception that must expect a French subject, especially a man of his character ; that he was refused to land a man of his attendance, though he took upon himself to do not meddle with religious subjects. " His Majesty, the King of the French Government send me there to ask to your Majesty the reason of a such exclusion ; injurious to the French ; so opposite to the hospitable customs of the South Sea Islands ; and wholly incompatible with the laws and usages of civilised nations. His Majesty's government acted only by feelings of kindness to all the people of the South Sea Islands, thinks is right and due a kind reception to all French subjects, and their admission in Yavau, and all the islands of your kingdom where they may be called by trading interest, or any other lawful purpose, on the same footing as every foreigner, and to claim for them the protection tliat a regular government never refuses to the lowest men. " To deny these henceforth to them would be noticed as a bad dealing to the French Grovernment, who would do for his subjects what the importance of the case would require. *' His Majesty's government thinks, that after these representations, your Majesty, better acquainted with the principles of international law among the civilised nations, will never do anything that will interrupt the relations of peace and friendship that France likes to" maintain with him and his subjects." 364 PEACE AND PE0GEES3. The pain caused to all the lovers of Protestant missions by the unjust assumption of French dominion in Tahiti was yet fresh in the minds of the committee, when the news of this visit to Vavau reached them ; and moved by sympathy with the London Society, as well as by alarm for their own Polynesian missions, they united with the directors of that society in representing to Her Majesty's government the danger to which both missions were exposed, and earnestly asking suitable interposition. They also presented a petition ; embodying the same views, to the House of Commons. " Early in the year 1844, King Tubou dictated a letter to the Queen of England, implormg her protec- tion against the French, whose proceedings at Tahiti and elsewhere, had filled him and his people with alarm. In the course of the following year, the Missionaries were greatly cheered by an official letter received from her Britannic Majesty's Consul- General in the neighbouring group, assuring them ' that Great Britain will protect her subjects in the Friendly and Fiji Islands.' "* The Missionaries congratulated themselves on the steadfastness of the Christian chiefs in their King's absence. It was not long, however, before the priests made another attempt to get a footing in the Friendly Islands ; and, this time, they chose a more promising field of operation. During Mr. Thomas's absence * Eeport of the Wesleyan Missionary Society, 1846, page 44. PEACE AND PUOGRESS. 365 from Tonga — an absence of a few weeks only — they found their way to that island, and brought another distracting element to that often-agitated country. Moeaki, chief of the Bea, a man who professed Christianity, but who was not baptized nor a member of the church, opened his door and his heart to a priest, whom the diligent bishop offered to leave with him. A number of Tonga men, converted to Eoman- ism in Wallis's Island, took up their abode at the Bea. Mr. Thomas immediately foresaw many of the sad consequences which have since resulted from this un- toward event. It was felt that had Tubou possessed King George's courage and firmness, the evil might have been averted. The Popish party soon began to talk much of their own excellences, and of the defects and faults of the old Missionaries. Mr. Thomas met this new trial in the spirit of a Christian. He says, " Our only hope is in God, who has done us good and not evil, all our days. No doubt He saw that we needed to be tried. Our people have not glorified Him as they ought ; the Lord has a controversy w^ith us. The good Lord remember mercy, and deliver us from the hands of designing men ! " The one priest was joined, after a time, by others ; and the following year, 1843, they began to try to spread their doctrines in the Christian villages. The following conversation took place at Hihifo : — Priests. — It is our duty to go and preach the gospel to every creature. 366 PEACE AND PEOGEESS. Chiefs. — We have the Gospel preached to us, and the Word of Grod to read. JPriests. — No, you have not. These men who preach to you are leading you astray ; they are of Mr. Wesley's religion, which took its rise only about one hundred years ago ; and Mr. Wesley was no better than Jovili (an impostor, who was in the Navigator's Islands a few years since, and who de- ceived many). Chiefs. — Our religion is the religion of the Bible, and took its rise with the Bible. Priests. — Tour Bible is full of errors. Chiefs. — We believe our Bible to be the Word of Grod and of truth, and we are determined to abide by it. Priests.— y^eW, but we love your souls, and we must come to teach you; and, if you are not willing, you may persecute us, and even kill us, if you please. Chiefs.— It is not our intention to give you so much as a wrong word; but, if you are determined to come against our minds, we can please ourselves whether or no we feed you and give you a place to sleep in. Priests. — Very well ; then let us sleep in the road, or bush. Chiefs. — We will give 'you a place to sleep in to- night ; but, if you come again, you must not expect so much. Priests, — When we came the first time, we thought PEACE AND PROGRESS. 367 you the kindest of people. How is it that you are so altered ? Chiefs. — When you first came, we treated you as strangers ; but, at the same time, knowing that your intention was to come and be our teachers, we told you then that we bad a teacher, and that there was no need for you to come. We wished you not to repeat your visits ; but you seem determined to force your- selves upon us ; and are we obliged to receive you, and give you our food, against our minds ? Thus repulsed, the priests wandered up one part of the fortress and down another, till nine in the evening, when, as none oifered them a sleeping-place, they went into the bush, and lay down in an old house there. A Tongan man, who was their companion from the Bea, lost his patience, asked if this was the way of their religion, to go wandering about, and said that the Lord had " given them up to a foolish mind." The chiefs of the Bea and Mua embraced Popery, and so, after a few years, did the Tui-tonga. They made an agreement, however, with their teachers, that they should not be required to put away their wives, nor to give up their dances and other heathen customs. The Christian natives said that they could see very little difference between Popery and heathenism. Those chiefs who were persuaded to accept the priests' teachings were such as had long been dis- 368 PEACE AND PEOGEESS. satisfied witli the existing government, and were ready for open acts of rebellion as soon as an opportunity should occur. The number of Eoman Catholic con- verts in Tonga has never been great. Perhaps not more than three hundred have belonged to that church at any one time ; and of late these have dwindled into a small sect of little weight. In the days when they were strongest they were the stirrers up of much ill, as we shall see by and by. Shortly after the introduction of Popery into the islands, a very interesting Missionary meeting was held at Lifuka. King George took the chair, much to his people's delight; for a severe attack of illness had kept him at home for many months. His speech, as usual, did him credit ; and it was affecting to hear him confess the unworthiness of himself and his people. He called the attention of the assembly to the millions of our race yet in darkness and ignorance, observing, that while large nations and kingdoms were still heathens, God had " in His mercy visited these insignificant sand-banks." He then expressed his gratitude to God and to His church, and called on all present to join heart and hand in the good mission cause ; adding that his whole soul loved the work, and that had he the means, he would send the light of the Gospel to thousands who are now sitting in darkness. One Missionary and fourteen native teachers followed. The last of these was Aisea Vovoli, whom Mr. B-abone elsewhere speaks of as "a Lazarus indeed, full of sores, and very poorj but a choice spirit, PEACE AND PROGRESS. 369 always warm at heart, with a mind that oft carried him beyond his bodily strength ; a man mighty in prayer." On being called on to speak at the Missionary meeting, he rose, and playfully remarked, that " as the last speaker he must be allowed the privilege always granted to the last canoe of a fleet, and must get into anchorage how and where he could." He spoke upon the subject of Popery, which had not been touched by any preceding speaker ; and gave loud, ardent, and oft-repeated thanks to Grod that truth had got the start of error in these islands. Again and again, he called upon the King and all present, as they loved light in preference to darkness, and truth to error, to join him in praising God and in thanking the fathers in England, who had sent them the Gospel, the true light. He spent his strength, and then said, " Friends, my body is weak ; I am dying fast ; but heaven is mine. King George, I shall die soon ; but heaven is my home through Jesus Christ." "While all were melted into tears, he led off with a native hymn which goes to the well-known tune of, " The voice of Free Grace." All sprang upon their feet in an instant. They sang and wept, and sang and wept again. Several afterwards engaged in prayer, and the meeting was concluded. Mr. Eabone says, that there was so much gracious feeling, that had nothing else been the result, all might well have rejoiced in attending that meeting ; but added to the spiritual refreshing, there was a manifestation of abounding liberality. About 2 B 370 PEACE AND PROGRESS. five tons of yams, eight pigs, some forty or fifty-five fowls, native cloth, and baskets, were the presents of a willing people to the mission. TONGUESE lady's TOILET BASKET, COMB AND BEUSH. 1 (|ha|)tiir XV, KING GEORGE'S REIGN. INGr Josiah Tubou died on the 18th Novem- ber, 1845. At the invitation of his grand- son, the chief of Eua, he had visited that JJ^j^ island, in the month of August, to be present X at the opening of a new chapel. On his return he was taken poorly ; and after some weeks of uncertainty, his illness assumed a serious aspect. Mr. Thomas missed him from his wonted place at chapel on the 16th, and calling upon him in the evening, found him suffering severe pain. His mind was in a quiet, composed state. For two days be bore intense suffering with Christian patience. On being told to look to the Lord Jesus, he said, " I am doing so." He prayed much, and often called on Mr. Thomas to pray with him. He continued speak- ing up to the last moment of his life, and passed away while breathing the name of Jesus. His Christian friends cherished the hope that he left earth to be for " ever witli the Lord." Many of the natives attended 2b 2 372 KING geoege's EEIGH". bis remains to the grave, on the 20th, burying him in the spot which he had chosen for himself. They showed him all due honour, and most felt that they had lost a friend. But his character had not been such as to excite intense feeling ; nor was his loss regarded as a great national calamity. King Josiah's mental gifts were by no means of the highest class, nor had he had the advantage of early training. His childhood and youth had gone by before he embraced Christianity. Then he was of a peaceable, easy disposition, that did not like trouble, and would let things take their own course, in hope that they might perhaps come right at last. He could not bear to see his children chastised for their faults ; he permitted disorderly persons to go on in their own way, even in the village where he lived — suffering personal inconvenience rather than give pain or cause offence ; and he scarcely ever interfered with the chiefs of Tonga, but left them to govern their respective districts according to their own notions. "We have seen how the chiefs, unchecked by wise and firm restraint, forgot their duty to their King, and rose in open rebellion ; so that poor Josiah, in spite of himself, was forced to go to war. "We have seen too, how the bishop and his priests, baffled at the other islands, gained a footing in Tonga. Josiah Tubou's kind-heartedness laid him open to the fair speeches and flattering professions of cunning men ; and he was thus often induced to do what he was afterwards very sorry for. He was neither fitted KING geoege's reign. 373 for detecting insincerity in those who sought their own ends under a mask of kindness to him, nor for managing the affairs of a state and controlling a number of turbulent chieftains. He was happiest spending hours in his own home, plaiting sinnet, making himself the playfellow of his children, or watching and soothing them in sickness with womanly tenderness. Such a character as King Josiah's was not likely to win special love. It has been well said, " Strength of mind is an attaching as well as a ruling power ; all human creatures become attached to those who have power over their minds." Spoiled children are not the most loving children. They detect the weakness that will not allow a parent to deny himself the pleasure of a momentary caress, nor to inflict upon himself the sharp pain of giving pain to the naughty child whom he loves, even though he knows that correc- tion would work out the child's real good. Those who in manhood love their parents most, are those who in childhood feared the rod in a gentle hand, and who in youth stood in awe of timely and kind reproof. So it is with us and our heavenly Father. " Whom the Lord loveth he chasteneth, and scourgeth every son whom he receiveth." And they who have most sorely felt the smart of His stripes, have been drawn closest to Him in adoring and grateful love. Having found some fault with King Josiah, it is only fair to say that he was not without many good qualities. His person was tall and well-made ; his 374 KING George's eeton. face, good-looking; and his conversation, very agreeable. From the time that he became a decided Christian, little fault could be found with his private walk. He was the firm and constant friend of Christianity and its teachers ; and ^in spite of much persecution, he held on his way. At one time his enemies so far prevailed that he thovght he must either yield or fly. His course was instantly chosen. He ordered a large canoe to be launched, so that he and the beloved Missionaries might seek safety on some other island. His attendance on the means of grace was most regular. On Sundays and week days, at sermons or prayer-meetings, whenever the house of Grod was opened for worship, the King was there ; and there in good time. Mr. Thomas says, that " scores of times, when there have not been five persons present at the beginning of early morning service, one of the few was sure to be the King." His temper, not easily rufiled, was sometimes roused when he saw any of his people careless in their deportment during the service of God, behaving amiss, or going away before the whole was concluded. On the whole. King Josiah's character and influence were favovirable to the spread of religion; and the Missionaries had cause to glorify God in him. By the death of King Josiah, the office of Tui- kanokubolu became vacant. There are usually several members of the royal family who are eligible on such an occasion ; on his death-bed Josiah had named KING geoege's eeign. 375 two ; and it was to one of tbe two persons named by him that all eyes instantly turned. George, Iving of Haabai and Vavau, was chosen as Josiah's succcessor. The chiefs whose province it is to appoint to the office were all Christians ; and the few heathen chiefs of Tonga appeared to approve heartily of the measure, and attended the ceremony, behaving with the greatest propriety. Those who speak of King George as an usurper, sitting on a throne won for himself by force of arms, do not understand Tongan customs. By birth, and by election, he is fairly entitled to his present position ; and he lives ui the high regard and enthusiastic love of his admiring people. The ceremony of appointing him, or calling him for the first time by his new name of office, was per- formed, according to the usual custom, at the village Bangi, in Hihifo ; a village of great note in the by- gone days of heathenism. ^11 the chiefs of Tonga were assembled there on the 4th of December, with several from Haabai and Vavau. The King took his seat under a cocoa-nut tree, with an official person on either hand. These are called Motuas, or fathers. The chiefs sat in a large circle on each side, and the bulk of the people in front. Mr. Thomas, an invited guest, took his place behind the King. The company was, as usual, select. None was allowed to go near the inner circle to gratify his curiosity by staring at the great men ; nor was any one permitted to walk about. As soon as the kava was prepared, and before it was served out, several chiefs addressed the assem- 376 KING geoege's eeign. bly. Then one of the Pathers, Motua-buaka, stated the object of their meeting ; and the King addressed them. The kava being poured into a dish, Motua- buaka called the King's name Tubou-Tui-kanokubolu, and handed the first cup to him. The circle seated on the grass, and screened from the heat of a bright sun, by the branches of large trees that had stood for ages on the spot, and witnessed many an ofilcial gathering, formed a beautiful picture ; and to Mr. Thomas it was specially fair, because he remembered the last meeting of the kind, just eighteen years before, and could rejoice in the contrast between the two. Then, the chiefs assembled were, with one or two exceptions, all heathens ; they were set against the truth, and were raising Josiah to dignity for the very purpose of checking the progress of the Gospel ; now, Christian chiefs were inaugurating a Christian King, and rejoicing that his many excellent qualifications had the crowning beauty of humble piety. When the kava had been handed round, and refreshments taken, the party moved on to the large new chapel at Hihifo. Suitable Scriptures were read, and Mr. Thomas preached from the words ; — " He that ruleth over men must be just, ruling in the fear of God. And he shall be as the light of the morning, when the sun riseth, even a morning without clouds ; as the tender grass springing out of the earth by clear shining after rain." — 2 Samuel xxiii. 3, 4. King George's accession to power was a promise KING oeoege's eeign. 377 » of future good to Tonga. He took up his dwelling at Nukualofa, and all brought him the accustomed pre- sent, except one or two heathen forts. Peace and harmony prevailed. The Queen returned to Vavau with her friends, in order to make arrangements for removing to Tonga, and bringing with her her only son, a young Prince George, just a year old. The events of the last years of Tongan story are so well-known, and the present state of the people has been so fully detailed by the Rev. Walter Lawry in his journals, and by the Rev. Eobert Young in his lately-published book, " The Southern "World," that it will not be needful for me to enter into a long narra- tion of recent occurrences. I must just tell you a little ; and if you wish to see more, you will find a great deal that is highly interesting in the works that I have named. The revival of religion that so much cheered Mr. F. Wilson's dying hours spread widely among the three groups of islands. It was greatly needed. Twelve years had passed since the work of God, spoken of in the twelfth chapter ; many who once ran well, had been hindered and turned out of the right way ; many were now lukewarm professors of religion, having lost their first love ; while numbers who were children then, had grown ixp into men and women without having given their hearts to God. Many of the local preachers, leaders and members, mourned the dying zeal of the church, and, as before, united in 378 Kiis'G George's reign. earnest prayer for the divine blessing. And when the answer came, it surpassed the highest hopes of those w'ho had been earnest in" pleading for it. A goodly number of the young men and women of the congre- gations were added to the church ; languishing souls were quickened into new vigour; and the work of grace became deeper in the hearts of believers. These last could scarcely explain the change in themselves ; but their ministers rejoiced to find them walking more closely with Grod, and reflecting more brightly the image of His holiness. In one day, thirty leaders were appointed to watch over the souls of those who were newly " born from above," and seven hundred copies of the rules of the Methodist Society were furnished for the use of the new members. It must not be thought that this revival was the fruit of excitement, or that its resiilts were not abiding. A great moral change passed upon the people. They came under the power of the law, as well as of the Gospel ; and they were as much con- cerned about holy practice as about joyous feeling. Some of the worst characters in the place were brought to Grod, who remain stedfast to this day, and are devoted and useful Christians. Several of these are local preachers, and others are school teachers. All classes were improyed ; chiefs and people, preachers, leaders, and members ; husbands, wives, and children. About thirty men, now labouring as teachers in Fiji, were brought to God during this revival, or that of 1834. An interesting incident bearing upon this KING George's eeign. 379 subject is thus related by the Eev. Peter Turner, who was labouring at Vavau at the time of the great work of 1846. " Fehruary Srd. — This is the day for the monthly sessions of this group ; and what a sight have I witnessed ! Old and young have come to make con- fession to the judges of some misdemeanours of which they have been guilty for years back. As the greater part of those who came to confess have obtained mercy at the hands of God, the judges have given a general pardon. When their gracious design was made known, the efiect was almost overwhelming. The people gave shouts of applause, and made the house ring with their thanksgivings, both to them and to the Almighty. At my request, they rose to sing a song of praise to Almighty God for the grace mani- fested to them from Himself; and for His having graciously inclined their governors to imitate Him in His readiness to forgive all who humbly confess and fully forsake all their sins. After singing, the assembly was broken up by some of the chiefs offering up prayers to God on behalf of the people. The scene was impressive, and will not soon be forgotten by the people or the chiefs." Mr. Turner says again : — " Marcli ^rd. — The people are all engaged in prayer. God has poured upon them the Spirit of prayer. One of the judges said, ' These are fine times, for their are no offenders to be judged.' There has not been one for nearly 380 KING geoege's reign. two months. Does not this prove the work to be of God." A year or two before King George's accession to the sovereignty, the Missionaries had made a new effort for the good of heathen Tonga, by appointing the Hev. George Miller to take the charge of a small society of forty-two members at Makanga, about three miles and a-half from the large and populous heathen fortress, Mua. In the course of a year, twenty-six of the heathen joined the church, and there was a promise of still further enlargement. Mr. Miller had frequent interviews with the Tui- tonga, and also with Tungi, the son of the late Fatu. They treated Mr. Miller with affability, listening to his reasonings, and even extending their protection to him at Makanga ; but they refused to admit him into their own fortress. In reply to his earnest appeals as to the necessity of seeking salvation, they generally said, " I am waiting for such a one." If Mr. Miller went to the person named, he was ready with an answer, "I am waiting for Tungi." Thus linked to one another, and thus unwilling to take the first step, there seemed to be little human hope of any change ; and the examples of Ata and !Fatu, who remained resolute heathens to the last, would occur sometimes to the Missionary's mind and check his hopes. Mean- time there were signs of good. Popery made little \fay; even the heathens judged that it was "the old thing in a new garb," and did not think it KING George's eeign. 381 worth while to change their own customs for those of foreigners. In the year 1850, the persevering efforts of the Missionaries were crowned with success. Tungi yielded to the oft-repeated strivings of the Holy Spirit, and determined to cast away his sins and his idols together. His conversion produced a wonderful effect. About one hundred and sixty of his people lotued with him. When the day arrived on which he was expected first to bow his knee in the Lord's house, there was a large assembly of Missionaries and people from all parts of Tonga. The hour for public worship arrived, and the place was crowded from end to end. When Tungi entered the chapel and fell on his knees, with his followers, the sobs and cries of the congregation could not be restrained. Some were asked to pray ; but it was long before they could command their feelings. Then they lifted grateful hearts to God, and praised him with joyful lips. Many Papists and heathens were there ; but they seemed to be overawed by what they saw, and to acknowledge " Surely. God is in this place, and I knew it not." On the day that Tungi lotued, all the gods that could be secured were gathered together and placed in a Tongan basket. They were handed to the Eev. Walter Lawry, shortly afterwards, when he paid his second visit to the Priendly Islands. By the change in Tungi' s views, " a great and effectual door of usefulness was opened into the very heart of heathenism;" and the Missionaries 382 KING George's eeign. were cheered by the hope that idolatry might very soon be banished from Tonga. The 12th June, 1848, was an important day in Tongan history. Mr. Lawry landed on that day, from the John Wesley, a beautiful, fast sailing little vessel, of two hundred and fifty tons, intended for the service of the "Wesleyan Missionary Society in the South Seas. He did not come alone. New Mis- sionaries had been sent out to the Friendly Islands. Mr. and Mrs. Adams, Mr. and Mrs. Daniel, Mr. and Mrs. Davis, and Mr. and Mrs. Amos. Messrs. Daniel and Davis were to take the management of the press, the operations of which had been suspended, for some time, in consequence of the failure of Mr. Kevern's health, and his removal from the islands ; and to Mr. Amos and his wife were entrusted the educational department of the work. Mr. Amos had been trained for a teacher at the Normal Institution, Grlasgow ; and it was the Glasgow training system that was now to be tried among the Polynesians. It was decided that the site of the new premises should be at Nukuafola, that being the residence of the King, and the centre of a dense and partly heathen population. The Glasgow system was thought likely to meet the taste of a " romantic and showy people, fond of evolutions and processions, displays and changes." There was some difficulty in persuading the natives to put up suitable erections and fences ; they wished to see what Mr. Amos was going to do. KING George's reign, 383 before expending time and labour on large and expensive buildings ; and they were quite puzzled wben told that he must have a suitable buildins: before he could show his system of teaching. This difficulty was at length overcome, and such a place provided as enabled him to make a beginning. The school was no sooner fairly started, than it was found to meet the wants of the people. There had been difficulty sometimes in getting the children to school ; " Now," says Mr. Amos, " so attractive is the new system, there are numbers cleaned and lingering about our gate long before the hour, and asking whether it is not time to begin." The training school at Nukualofa, is composed of three divisions ; children, catechists and young men qualifying themselves for the work of teachers, and assistant Missionaries. Thus the native Institution, which declined after the death of Mr. Wilson, has revived. By the month of October, 1849, Mr. Amos was occupying large and suitable premises. A house, containing a hall, or lecture-room, and sleeping apart- ments, stands facing the sea, at the head of a tract of land granted by the chiefs for the children's play- ground, and for the teachers' gardens and farms. From the back entrance of the house, a broad pathway leads to the yam-grounds ; this path is bordered by rows of pine apples, and shaded by luxuriant banana trees ; while on each side lie the vegetable gardens of the teachers. Narrow paths, opening on either hand 384 KING geokge's eeign, from the cenh'al avenue, lead through these gardens to the small cottages of the married students. To the left stands the children's school-house, and near it is the play-ground, overgrown with a wiry kind of grass, introduced into Tonga by Mr. Lawry. The students' houses stand in regular rows, looking clean and neat, while their gardens are planted with yams, bananas, maize, sweet potatoes, sugar-cane, &c. About twenty acres of ground are allotted to the Institution, and the whole is sxirrounded by a fence. In 1849, twenty- four local preachers were in training as regular scholars. Twelve women, eight of them beiiig the wives of [students, were also learning the system. Shadrach Mumui, Chief Justice of Tonga, attended the seminary, though his office prevented him from residing there. Mr. Amos thus gives his plan of working : — " At break of day the teachers all go to their gar- dens, and work until ten a.m. ; each one stays at home in his turn to cook. At eight a.m., I conduct the children's school, with the assistance of two of t)ie students, who all attend in turn. At the close of the children's school, the teachers assemble for instruc- tion until two o'clock. The afternoon they occupy in preparing the lessons for the morrow, bathing, bring- ing home food, attending to the means of grace, &c. " The weekly routine of instruction embraces read- ing and analysis, writing and arithmetic, Bible training- lessons, sacred and general geography, natural history KING geokge's eeign. 385 and philosophy, the English language, and traditions of Tonga. The latter branch is conducted in the form of conversations, which I write down in order to collect matter for a short history of the Friendly Islands, to be printed in Tonguese. Grammar and geometry I am preparing ; but find it exceedingly difficult to obtain suitable terms in Tonguese for definitions." Mr. Amos speaks well of the class of persons sent to him by the Missionaries, and of their facUity in acquiring knowledge, and their anxiety to improve. Some of them, he says, are " collecting a large stock of English words, and can read pretty well in M'Cullochs's third reading book." On Tuesday afternoons, there was a singing class which, as in England, was more than commonly popular. " During Mr. Lawry's visit in 1850, he attended a school examination at Nukualofa. It was a gala-day, and the bulk of the Tonguese population thronged to one spot, either as actors or spectators. Mr. Lawry sitood on the top of the little mount of Nukualofa, and so commanded a view of the various pathways leading thitherward. Each school, ten in all, came on apart. The scholars were in full dress, ornamented with vine-leaves and sweet-scented flowers, while the precious cocoa-nut oil " stood clear as dew-drops on. their ringlets." "The processions moved along the grassy lawn, and emerged from the luxuriant groves of evergreens and shade, ascending the chapel hill, 2c 386 KING George's eeigk, with measured step and slow pace, singing Iheir song of degrees, the females taking their part, and the men theirs ; and all joining in the full chorus." following them came abundant witnesses and partakers of the day's joy, while the blue ocean beyond was specked with canoes bearing the dwellers at a distance. The examination lasted from day-dawn tiU dark, and all did weU. IMr. Lawry especially commends a little girl, Juliana Tabuola, whose home was at Tofoa, three miles from Nukualofa. This little girl had attended Mr. Amos' s school for two years, coming and going daily, with her younger sister by her side. She was " willing to communicate," and from her lips the old and young at Tofoa were taught her master's lessons. On the day of examination, Juliana's school proved to be, in every department of knowledge, next to those conducted in person by Mr. Amos. It is pleasant to have the testimony of men whose feelings are not likely to be so strongly and so favourably interested in our schools as those of our Missionaries. In 1849, Captain Maxwell, H.M.S. Dido, accompanied by the Bishop of New Zealand, visited Tonga. They watched the children in marching order in the play-ground, and were greatly delighted with the sight. A pleasing testimony to the efficiency of the Normal School was borne at a meeting of the Eoyal Geographical Society of London, in 1850, where it was stated that the Honourable Captaia Keppel, H.M.S. Meander, had examined the pupils in geo- graphy, and was satisfied with their progress. One of KING geoege's eeign. 387 tlie pupils had accurately traced on the map the course which the ship must take on her return voyage to England. The most recent and the fullest account of a Tongan school examination is given by Mr. Toung. " October 21th, 1853.— The schools of Nukualofa were examined, and a scene of interest presented itself which cannot be adequately described. At eight o'clock the examination commenced, and continued, without intermission, for nearly eight hours. The students of the Normal Training Institution were first brought forward, fourteen in number, three of whom were females — comprising the Queen, the wife of the Chief Justice, and a hairdresser, the poetess of Tonga. The Queen submits to the rules of the Institution, and toils as a student, that she may keep pace with others, as she says it would never do for any native of the country to know more than the Queen. "They were examined in reading, spelling, and arithmetic, as far as Eeduction ; acquitting themselves well, and, indeed, making but one mistake. Their answers to questions on Scripture history were prompt and correct. Their attempt to read English was encouraging; but in translating English into Ton- guese they were not so successful. They aU appeared in the European costume, and looked remarkably well. Three of the students, men of considerable promise, were being trained with a view of their entering the 2c 2 388 KING George's reign. ministry, and the other male students to prepare them for taking charge of village schools. " No sooner did the examination of the students terminate, than an adult school marched up to the chapel, singing an appropriate chant. One party sang, ' We thank Thee, Jesus, Thou art come ! ' another party responded in melodious strains, and with fervent hearts, * We will believe on Thee.' " This was the King's school, being under his special patronage, and consisting of ninety-six fine, athletic fellows, aU dressed according to Tonguese custom. The pupils read a chapter, and repeated another with great ease and correctness. In the ' Conference Catechism,' they evinced considerable proficiency. They combined spelling with geography — spelling the names of the various islands of the Pacific, and describing their inhabitants, produce, &c. In Scripture history, and arithmetic, they had, con- sidering their circumstances, acquired a very res- pectable knowledge. Their writing, in many cases, was good, and, in some, even elegant. On the dismissal of this school, the sweet voices of the children connected with the Normal Institution were heard in the distance ; and, after approaching the chapel and going through the various evolutions connected with the Grlasgow training system, with much spirit and manifest pleasure, they presented KiKG geoege's eeign. 389 themselves for examination in the usual squatting posture. They were dripping with oil ; and the young prince, in a beautiful native dress, sat at their head. They read the Scriptures, some of them with much fluency. Their writing on slates was creditable ; but the slates being greasy from the oil dropping from their hair, in some cases the writing was so faint that one of them complained it was ' dead.^ Only a few could do anything in arithmetic. In spelling, they gave the correct orthography of the different countries in America, thus embracing both spelling and geo- graphy. They stated the distances of the principal English towns from London with tolerable correctness ; repeated the tenth chapter of John, and answered questions in the ' Second Conference Catechism ' very satisfactorily. " These little people, upwards of eighty, having passed through their examination, gave place to the school under the patronage of the Queen. It con- sisted of a hundred adults, principally married women ; and Charlotte, having changed her attire, now ap- peared in her native costume, at the head of her school. As they came in procession to the chapel, they sang the following native chant : — LITEEAL TEANSLATION. 1. A guilty world stood exposed to wratli, But Jesus beheld it in love. (Chorus of response.) And we weep whilst we sing His dying love. 390 KING GEOEGE's REIGN". 2. In Gi-ethsemane's garden He sweat drops of blood, That for us He might slay tlie last foe. And we weep whilst we sing His dying love. 3. Thou saidst to Thy few disciples there, That sorrow oppressed Thy soul. And we weep whilst we sing Thy dying lore. 4. He was judged to cruel death, Yet He opened not His mouth. And we weep whUst we sing His dying love. 5. We look to Thy wounded side, once pierced By the Roman soldier's spear. And we weep whilst we sing Thy dying love. 6. We pray and not faint in Jesu's name. And worship for evermore. And we weep whilst we sing His dying love. " Both words and tune were prepared by Jochebed Fehia, the poetic hairdresser, and produced a powerful effect. The school read and repeated chapters of the * New Testament, answered several questions in the catechism, and speUed different words found in Wesley's hymns, all with correctness. In geography considerable proficiency had been made ; the writing was very creditable ; and the Queen, who mainly conducted the examination, retired with her pupils, evidently much gratified with their proficiency. " The next school presented was under the patron- age of the wife of the Chief Justice, — a most excellent and intelligent woman. Indeed, she is so fond of learning, that I found she was not merely the patroness, but the teacher of this school. If contained upwards of seventy young women, the flower of the KING George's eeign. 391 population, and, as I was told, the beauty of the place. Certainly they were handsome young women, and they seemed to have vied with each other, who should appear most attractive. Ingenuity had been at work to give variety and beauty to the native costume. They were all profusely oiled, and on the foreheads of some was vermillion, and on the heads of others grated sandal-wood, furnishing in their opinion, both beauty and sweet odour. They repeated the Lord's prayer in English with credit ; read and recited chapters of the New Testament correctly ; wrote on slates beautifully ; and showed a good knowledge of the catechism. They also read a little English, and translated several English phrases into Tonguese with much ease. In arithmetic they did well ; and several questions as to the distances, revolutions, magnitudes, &c., of the heavenly bodies, they answered correctly. Their remarks on natural history were good. " The patroness of this school used the whistle with telling effect, and at the close of the examination presented it to me. " Now followed a school of sixty men, under the patronage of an aged chief. One half of them had formerly been boys in the Training Institution. In reading, and in Scriptural knowledge, they appeared to much advantage. In geography they were respect- able, and in spelling the different fountains and streams of Eiji, they seemed to excel. In arithmetic they were less perfect. " The concluding school of a hundred and fifty 392 KING geoege's eeign. men, under the patronage of a great chief, the sou of the late King Josiah, was full of vigour. They read, speUed, went through part of the second catechism, answered questions in Scripture geography, and worked sums in arithmetic, with as much energy as if the war-whoop had been sounded, and they were preparing for battle ; and when they chanted the multiplication table to one of their wild native airs, the effect was startling, and produced a powerful influence upon the assembly. " At the conclusion I delivered a short address ; and thus ended the most interesting examination it has ever been my privilege to witness. Nor were these all the schools of Tongatabu, but simply those of the town of Nukualofa. In the island there are sixty village-schools, taught by twelve persons trained in the Institution, and a number of local preachers, both parties giving their services gratis. " In the examination, which was not got up, the pupils chanted almost every thing; this mode of receiving instruction being very attractive to these merry islanders, and making a deeper impression on the mind than the same truth would do associated with tune."* King George's only son was early placed under Mr. Amos's care. Many of the Tahitian chiefs have been persuaded to send their children to France for education, under the promise that they shall be * " The Southern World."— page 226. KING George's reign. 393 brought up as Protestants ; but George is determined that his son shall have a thorough Christian and Methodist training, and that he shall go no further than the Nukualofa school, unless he shovdd send him to the school at Auckland for preachers' children, and the children of Methodist friends. The following is a true translation of a letter written by King George to the young Prince, who was left at school, when the King determined on quitting Tonga for Haabai, in 1850. " Lifuka, September 2?ird, 1850. — George Vuna, my son ! — ■! write to you to make known my love to your face. I cease not to plead for you before the Lord, that He would make you wise in those things for which you were left behind. I urge you, my son, to attend greatly to the work for which you are there. " The business which devolves upon you there is great, weighty and difficult. But it is a work which in excellence surpasses all the occupations on earth besides. It is a work which belongs to man, and that leads his mind to the Lord, and has to do with his immortal soul. It is a work that is profitable during a man's life in this world both to the Lord and to our fellow-creatures. " If you remember me and your mother, attend to what I am now writing. Every thing that Mr. Amos teUs you to do, attend to ; mind that you be not disobedient in any thing that Mr. Amos speaks about. Take heed that you do not destroy or injure 394 KING George's eetgit. anything in tis house. Beware lest you be rude to his son ; and if in any way you be disobedient, it is right and proper for Mr. Amos to correct you. See that you keep in remembrance this part of my instructions, and attend to them. "Your things which I send in this canoe are as follow : — Your bedstead, mosquito curtains, three hats, soap to wash, your clothes, hair brushes and turtle shell comb, some pieces of print to make your dresses, with the cotton belonging, as well as needles. E-equest Mr. Amos to write me your mind as to whether you are advancing toward wisdom, or how you are getting on. " This is the end of this my writing. I am, " Geoege TuBOir." Many very useful men have been trained in the Nukualofa Institution, and are now employed in the work of Education on difierent parts of the Islands ; but there is one defect in the present system that needs attention. The schoolmasters receive no salary ; but are dependent on their own exertions, and on the precarious aid rendered by their pupils. Some of them have three schools under their charge ; and they complain that they cannot give proper attention to their duty as teachers and yet provide for themselves and their families. One of them, a short time since, sent the following note to Mr. Amos : — " Lifuka, November, 1853. — Mr. Amos, — I heard KING geokge's eeign. 395 you were ill. I very, very deeply sympathise with you in your affliction. I write in love to Mrs. Amos and your children. The schools here are getting on well, but especially the children's, who are getting wise. The instruction is good for this land, and the people's children are now wise through education, and the island is as a Christian land should be. But do the foolish inhabitants of this country ever give a thought about the poverty of the man who teaches them ? I am, " Eliezee Selu." In the early days of the Tonga mission, the press was kept in full work by Mr. Woon ; but many interruptions have occurred since the time of his removal. Several Missionaries after having become well acquainted with the language, have been obliged to leave on account of ill health. These frequent changes have been unfavourable to the steady growth of Tonguese literature. And another great hinder- ance has been the insufficient supply of paper. Again and again, the press has been stopped for want of materials to keep it going. In the year 1847, it was resolved to revise the New Testament Scriptures, with those books of the Old Testament that had been translated already ; and to translate the remaining books as soon as possible. And now that so large a work was in con- templation, it was thought desirable to apply to the British and Foreign Bible Society, the faithful ally of all Protestant missionary societies. In the year 1833, 396 KING qeoege's eeign. when Genesis and some parts of the Gospels had been prepared for publication, the Bible Society had kindly granted one hundred reams of paper for the use of the Missionaries ; and on a second application, made by the Eev. Elijah Hoole, in 1842, a second grant of fifty reams was made. Once again, in time of need, the same prompt kindness was shown on a yet more liberal scale. And last year, ten thousand copies of the Tongan New Testament were conveyed to the Friendly Isles, by the Eev. Eobert Young. The Eev. George Keyern, now labouring in this country, kindly took the charge of revising this edition, and seeing it through the press. The Tongans now possess the whole of the New Testament Scriptures ; Genesis, Exodus, the books of Samuel, Psalms, Isaiah, and other books of Old Tes- tament Scripture ; catechisms, hymn-books, and various school books. They dearly love God's own book. As soon as they knew what a precious gift Mr. Young had brought with him, they shewed the greatest delight. In family-worship, in their prayer-meetings, and in the sanctuary, this topic of thankfulness was ever on their lips. The Queen engaging in prayer at a social meeting, praised God for the arrival of the Scriptures, and said the book was valuable, not because of its paper and ink, but because it brought good tidings to sinners, and from Genesis to Eevelation was full of the Saviour. Mr. Young heard King George preach a sermon, while in Eiji, from the words, " My people KING George's reign. 397 are destroyed for lack of knowledge." In his exposi- tion, he stated that the " knowledge referred to was not only essential to salvation, but was at the founda- tion of all true greatness." He then enquired what caused the difference between Englishmen and Poly- nesians? Was it anything they possessed in their physical formation, or mental constitution, which was not to be found in Polynesians ? He thought not. Then, taking a Bible and holding it up, his coun- tenance radiant, and his eyes sparkling with joy, he said with peculiar energy, " It is this that makes the difference between Englishmen and us. They have the Book ! They have the Book ! " The purchase of" the Book" has long been an object of strong desire with the people. During Mr. Lawry's visit he often met men coming towards the house of the Missionaries, with yams, oil, cocoa-nuts, some^ times with a pig, under their arm. And on asking where they were going, the answer would be, " To buy the Book." Nothing seemed to be in so much request as the New Testament. They would pass by calico and axes, if they could only gain the word of life. "Wise and happy choice ! During the two years preceding the arrival of the last noble Bible Society gift, the scarcity of the Book was sorely felt, and a sovereign would not have purchased a copy. Some time ago, the house of Jone Soaki was burned down, while he was attending divine service on a Sunday morning. "When he found out his loss, he came running to the Missionary, and liolding up 398 KING geoege's eeign. his New Testament, lie exclaimed, " How glad I am tliat the fire happened when the Book was out of the house. I can replace the house, but not the Book." Mr. Young, tells an interesting story of a poor man, a cripple, who after his conversion read the word of God most diligently. " In a fortnight he committed to memory the whole of Galatians. In three weeks, he learned Ephesians ; and in three weeks more, finished Philippians. Besides this, he got by heart the first of Thessalonians ; and he used to repeat what he had so learned, a book at a time. Mrs. Wilson sometimes sent him his dinner ; and on one occasion, when the girl took it to him, she said, ' Have you had anything to eat to-day ?' He replied in the affirmative. * What have you had ?' inquired the girl. * Had ?' said he, ' I have eaten the whole of the Corinthians.' " King George's reign has not been one of unche- quered prosperity ; and the heathen and Popish part of Tonga is the quarter from which the clouds have arisen. In 1847, he decided on leaving Tonga for a season, and taking up his residence at Haabai. He had not been treated with as much respect as he had been accustomed to receive ; and he thought that by withdrawing from among his less docile subjects, he should give a reproof that might be so felt, as to lead them to confess error and to sue for his return. On leaving Tonga, he gave the land and people in charge to two heathen chiefs, Lavaka and Maafu, with orders strictly to preserve the peace. After the death of KING GEOEGE's EEIGIs". 399 Josiah, two years previously, King George prohibited war tlirougtout his dominions. And all the chiefs pledged themselves, by solemn covenant, to meet and punish the first who should dare to disturb the peace of Tonga, either by fortifying his town, or by any other act of hostility. Lavaka and Maafu had taken this pledge ; but they were secretly opposed to King George, and ready to break faith, whenever they should have an opportunity of carrying out their own private views. They soon took advantage of the King's absence, and began to repair the fortifications of their towns, thus breaking their solemn covenant. They also committed depredations on the property of their neighbours, the Kijig's loyal subjects. From less they went to more, unheeding the remonstrances of the chiefs of Nukualofa, tiU at last a report reached the Eling that they designed to set up a new king of their own. His Majesty, on hearing this, came back to Tonga, with a fleet of double canoes. The accused chiefs denied having any such iutention, and the afiair was passed over. As soon as the King had gone back to Haabai, the rebellious chiefs returned to their former practices, insulting and opposing the true men, and threatening more serious evils. This induced the loyal chiefs to petition the King to remove his court from Haabai to Nukualofa. Accordingly in July, 1851, he came back to Tonga. The course of opposi- tion on the part of the rebels immediately became more decided. They refused to visit the King, and treated his messengers with contempt. They sheltered 400 KING George's eeign. culprits who fled to them to elude the pursuit of the King's officers ; and at last they told the King plainly that their " minds were fixed for war. It was clear that their design was to overthrow the government. The Missionaries did all in their power to prevent a collision. They visited the rebel chiefs, and expostu- lated with them. The King too exercised Christian forbearance, delayed to smite, and sent messenger after messenger, — thus giving them ample time to re-consider their position. About noon, on the 28th February, 1852, Nukualofa was thrown into alarm by a report that the warriors of Bea had killed two Christian women : it proved to be a mistake ; the women had been cursed bitterly and insulted, but friends had come up in time to save them from threatened death. The women of the Bea were armed for war as well as the men ; and one had rushed from the fort, axe in hand, saying, " "Where, where, are these lotu people ? I want to cut off" one of their heads to make me a football." Before King George made up his mind to declare war, the people of the Bea had broken faith, raised a stockade, fortified their town, and defied their King : and made it unsafe for any loyal subject of King George to go inland. Even then he waited patiently till his enemies had made every preparation, and had repaired to their two forts, Bea and Houma. He then sent ambassadors to propose reconciliation. The con- ditions were : " Level your fortifications with the ground. Come out from the forts, and live in towns KING geoege's reign. 401 and villages, as we do, in the open country ; and there shall be no war, but we will be friends." Eeligion was not the ground of dispute. Obedience to the civil government was all that was required. The war was one of rebellion. Heathens of loyal villages, and Papists, too, were in the ranks of the King's army. But it is to be noted that the priests were in the fort of the Bea, that they introduced supplies of muskets, powder, and shot, and did what they could to encourage the rebels. The King wrote to the priests, expressing a wish that they would leave Bea, and promising them safety, either at Nukualofa, or at Mua with Tungi. Illness was made a plea for their remaining at Bea. The King waited a week, and then WTote a second letter, saying that he wished to live at peace with the French, and Avith all the Eui'opean states ; but that if, after this second invita- tion, the priests chose to remain within the rebels' fort- ress, they must take the consequences, as he would no longer be trifled with by any party whatever. The priests returned answer, " We cannot remove ; our chiefs prevent us." All these pacific measures were taken before a single warrior was marched against Houma, or Bea. By the 1st March, it became evident that war was at hand. The chiefs refused eveiy offer of reconcilia- tion; and news was brought to Nukualofa that the people of Bea were ready to attack the first party that they might meet with. So the war-drum was beat, and the King distributed fire-arms to his chiefs. He 2d 402 KING geoege's eeign. commanded all his people to repair to the three forts of Nukualofa, Hihifo, and Mua. Through the night, the beating of the war-drum, the murmuring sound of women and children in conversation, the tramping of warriors' feet, made the Missionaries sensible of the alarming aspect of affairs, and of the need of special protection from the God of Providence, and " the only Giver of all victory.' ' A council of war was held at daylight the next morning, and the King ordered a temporary fortification to be thrown around Nukualofa. In his address to the chiefs and people, he urged them to long suffering ; and, at the close of an eloquent harangue, he exclaimed, " Save the women ! Save the children ! Give quarter to any one who cries for it ! And, if you love your King, don't go to war till he commands you." A circumstance that occurred in the afternoon of the same day, March 2nd, proved the sincerity of the King's intentions. Messengers came from Mua, to say that Maafu was still at Vaiui, and that it was Tungi's mind to go and cut off him and his people. This Tungi was, you will remember, a recent convert to Chris- tianity. The King's reply reminded Tungi that he and George were both Christians, and that it did not become them to begin an attack upon their enemies. A French whaler left the harbour the same day, after supplying the rebels with ammunition. The pilot, on returning, brought a letter of remonstrance to George from the Captain. In the evening a captive was l>KOught to the King, KING qeoege's BEIGN. 403 by a 'party of warriors who had passed near Bea during the day. They saw a man climbing a cocoa- nut tree, and one of them levelled his musket at him, saying in a low voice, " Come." He laughed wildly, and said, " If I come, shall I live ? " " Yes," was the reply. He came down, and they carried him bound to the King, who sent him to his own country, Vavau, which he had quitted some years before, for the sake of joining the heathen. Tliis clemency towards one wholly in the power of the King, was a new and wonderful thing. Had one of Greorge's party been in the power of a Bea man, he would have shot him dead on the spot. While in a state of suspense, waiting the crisis which could not be far oif, the Missionaries were called to part with one of their own number, the respected and beloved superintendent of the Tonga circuit. A sharp attack of illness, heightened by mental agitation on account of the wai', carried Mr. Webb off in a few days. He spent nearly the whole of the last day of his life in speaking and praying, mostly in Tonguese. The enemy of God's people was permitted to harass him with grievous temptations, but he resisted him, being " steadfast in the faith." He clung to the doctrine of atonement, and felt, he said, " safe on the Eock." Many times he repeated, " In my liand no price I bring, Simply to Thy cross I cling." Mr. Webb was followed to the gi-ave by the King, 2d 2 404 iciKG George's eeign. the Queen, Prince George — several chiefs bearing the the coffin — and a large concourse of natives. His remains were buried in a grave dug between those in which lie Mr. Thomas's only son, and Mr. Daniel's infant daughter. " The mode of warfare in Tonga is best described," says Mr. Amos, " by the term kidnapping. A com- pany of armed men go out into the bush, and hide themselves beside the roads and foot-paths, tiU some solitary individual, or some defenceless female, is unfortunate enough to come that way, and thus fall a victim to the liers-in-wait for blood, who retiorn in triumph to their fort, to report their heroic deed." The King forbade his warriors to proceed in this cowardly manner. The rebel party, however, fought in the old way. The Queen's father-in-law was brought into Nukualofa, shot in the head by the men of Bea. Mr. West, going towards Hihifo, accom- panied by Caroline, a faithful class-leader, passed a spot where some men of Houma were lying in ambush. He escaped, but the poor woman, who was about a hundred yards behind, was cut down with an axe, and literally hewn to pieces. They took two pieces of print and an account-book out of her hands, and rushed back with the spoil. A few days after this outrage, a battle took place between the King's troops, and the Bea men. The rebels were in ambush at a distance from their fort ; and when a smaU party of the loyalists approached, the concealed warriors sprang out. The conflict KING George's eeign. 405 severe, but victory remained with the King's men. They lost ten by death, and thirteen were seriously wounded. The loss of the enemy was much larger. About the 14th our old acquaintance, the Eomish Bishop, appeared upon the scene. The commandant of the vessel that brought him, had an interview with the King, and after a lengthened conversation, expressed his satisfaction with the King's state- ment as to the cause of the war, and as to his treatment of the Prench priests. Not so the Bishop. He addressed a sharp note to the King, telling him that he had heard at Samoa, that the war in Tonga was got up for the purpose of destroying the remainder of the heathen and the adherents of Popery out of the land ; and asking him whether it was so. A frown passed over the King's countenance as he read this note, to which he replied as follows : — " I am not pleased that you should interfere with the affairs of my government. The report you heard at the Navi- gators' Islands was a l}ing report. This is not a religious war, but a civil war. This you might have known from the first, that the Roman Catholics of Mua as well as the heathens are fighting against Bea. This is the case at Mafanga also, where Papists, Heathens, and Protestants are all marshalled under one chief, — the chief of the place. Tlie object of the present war is to subject the rebels to the government of their country. There is one thing however, I must make known to you. It appears evil in my eyes that your converts in general have joined the heathens in 406 KING geoege's eetgn. opposing my rule. I will not conceal my mind. If the Gospel have free course in consequence of this war, I shall not thereby be put to shame, but shall therein rejoice." On the 12th April, the King began to put up four forts around Bea, having resolved not to storm the fortress, but to reduce it to submission by a continued siege. The Nukualofa people were expected to build one fort, Haabai one, Vavau one, and Mua one. Houma was left entirely to Ata and the men of Hihifo. All the people from Nukualofa removed to these forts before Bea, excepting only a few women, children, and afflicted persons. On the first Sunday after the erection of these forts, Mr. Amos visited the King in camp. He found him reading the book of Job in his native tongue ; and the King and the Missionary entered into quiet discourse regarding the wonders of God's word. Mr. Amos conducted service within musket-shot of the fortress, protected by embankments of earth and a defence of cocoa-nut trees. The enemy, who seem to have a predilection for Sunday business, kept firing on the Christians during the whole of the service ; but though during worship the bullets M'ere heard rattling against the trees all around, none entered the fort. The King paid much attention, and was perfectly calm — calmer than the preacher, who^e nerves could scarcely bear the report of muskets and the rattling of balls. The Queen prepared a little refreshment KING geoege's BEIGN. 407 after the sermon ; and then Mr. Amos walked to the Vavau fort, for a second service ; accompanied, to his surprise, by a large number of his own school children, who were quite ready to brave danger. The night before, a party of Beans had come close up to the gates of the Vavau fort, and finding the watchman sleeping at his post, they had cut oif his arm. The next time that IVIr. Amos preached in the camp, the King sent a party to escort him, for fear of liers-in wait. Just as the service was about to commence, the people of Bea fired. The natives instantly fell on their faces ; the Missionary, a man of peace, unused to musketry, stood still. Happily, the nearest bullet whizzed over his head. Several deserters, who came over to the King brought word that the Bea people were willing to surrender to their rightful sovereign ; but that they were kept back by the priests, who exhorted them to hold out till the close of April, when the Roman Catholic Bishop would be sure to return, with a man- of-war. Week after week did King George wait in patience for the expected submission of his enemies. His army was ten thousand strong, and fully equal to storming the rebels' forts, and taking signal vengeance on their occupants. His wisdom and moderation at last prevailed. Early in July, a message was sent to the King, that the chiefs of Houma would come the next day, and submit themselves to his mercy. And so they did, with Ifi leaves, and pensive looks, and flowing tears. They sat in silence for some time, and 408 KING George's eeign. theu the King's lierald proclaimed a free pardon, " for the sake of the lotu." They remained in the King's fort during the night ; and when at family-prayer the Christian warriors bent the knee, the heathens, whose hearts had been softened by a practical proof that Christianity is a religion of love and who felt that they owed their lives to George's piety, knelt too, and prayed to the Lord Jesus. Vaea returned home, happy in the King's pardon, and determined to be a Christian, and to persuade his people to become Christians also. Before the week closed, they asked for a ]\iissionary. Messrs. Adams, West, and Amos went to hold a religious service among them, and ere another week had passed, a hundred of the heathens of Houina had embraced Christianity. But Bea still refused to yield. For five weeks after Houma had been forgiven, the siege of that strong fortress was carried on. Five times the King offered terms of peace, and five times those terms were rejected. The chiefs seemed determined rather to die of starvation and disease than to surrender. On the 8th of August, a large vessel was seen ofi" the west end of the island. Was this the French man-of-war, for whose coming the rebels had been persuaded to wait ? The Christians thought so, and began to prepare for a dreadful struggle. But on the 9th, the vessel that had inspired so many fears came to anchor, and proved to be a friend. It was the Calliope; and the Commander, Sir Everard Home, KING geoeoe's EETGN. 409 who bad visited the islands some nine years before, was hailed as a most welcome ally. The King hastened to Nukualofa, and had an interview with Sir Everard. The result was that the King sent a sixth and final oflFer of peace to Bea : Sir Everard promising to aid him by his influence, though he could only interfere in a friendly manner. Eour great chiefs were entrusted with the King's message. The terms proposed were, "that the rebels should leave their fortress ; that King George should destroy the fortifi- cations of Bea ; that the lives of the rebels should be spared; and that, as the people now in Bea were persons from every part of Tonga, they should be conducted back to their own places, and not allowed to combine against their King and the laws of the land." The Beans seemed afraid to trust themselves out of their fortress, lest they should be entrapped, as was the former custom of the country. No previous war, not even the last, had closed without scenes of bloodshed. They therefore requested that Prince George and one of the Missionaries should be sent into the fortress as hostages for their safety, and they promised to lotu before leaving the place. But King George's anxiety for peace did not warp his steady judgment. He replied that he should neither send his son, nor a Missionary to make them Christians ; that his object was not to force them to accept his own religious views, but to make them loyal subjects ; that if they wished to lotu, he should rejoice in that happy change ; but that their present duty was to 410 KiKG George's eeign. trust to his word, and submit to his pleasure. After a little delay, three of the principal chiefs came out, and submitted themselves to the King. Kava and food were prepared : and they were detained tiU the next morning, that the King might have leisure to converse with them. On the following day, the Vavauans entered the fort, beating the drum, and firing their muskets into the air. The King followed, commanding that none should be killed, and that the Eomish Priests and their goods were to be respected. The Priests had persisted in remaining to the last, spite of the remon- strances of the King and Sir Everard Home. Yet, when they were in danger, — for the popular feeling turned against them, many crying out, " These are the men that have caused the war, by promising help from France," — both the K^ng and the Baronet saved their property by their own exertions, going through the midst of burning houses and falling trees to help them to secure their goods. The fort was sacked and bvu-ned : but not a single life was lost either here or at Houma. King GTeorge's wise and merciful conduct during the whole war was such as to win tlie hearts of his rebellious subjects, not only to himself but to his Master. Lavaka, Maafu, Tubouleva, and their people renounced Heathenism and Popery, and embraced the Gospel, soon after they received the King's pardon ; and now, the stronghold of heathenism being destroyed, and its most powerful upholders having forsaken it. KING GEOEGE's KEIGK. 411 Tonga may be called Christian, as well as Haabai and Vavau. There is but one chief of any note who adheres to the ancient faith, and among the common people, the number of heathens is gradually dwindling away. When Sir Everard Home left Tonga, he addressed the following letter to King George : — " Her Britannic Majesty's Ship, Calliope, August 18th, 1852. " Sir, — It gave me sincere pleasure yesterday, to see you in full and peaceable possession of your fort of Bea. I congratulate you upon this evenb, more particularly as that place was in the hands of the rebels when I visited Tongatabu, eight years ago, and has remained so ever since. " Glory as a Christian Prince attends your clemency to those who have fallen into your power. Grateful should they be to God that they are subjects of so just and so merciful a King. " It gave me real pleasure to see the great and judicious exertions which you made for the welfare of your subjects, of aU ages, when I was at Vavau, in 1844. These things I shall represent to the Govern- ment of the Queen of England, as weU as the warm interest that was taken, under your immediate direc- tion, and my own observation, for the safety of the Eev. M. Pieplu and the Rev. M. Nivelleau, priests of the Roman Catholic religion, residing in the fort of Bea ; for the security of the chapel and the ornaments 412 KiKG George's eeigk. it contained ; as well as of the private property of those gentlemen, the total destruction of which by fire seemed to be inevitable, and must have followed without your exertions to prevent it, before they could have been removed. "I must now leave Tongatabu, and I wish you ' good bye.' I sincerely hope, if circumstances enable me to visit Tonga in another year, that I may find you in health, and in the full exercise of undisputed government. I am. Sir, your faithful friend, " J. EvEEAED Home, Captain of H.M.S. Calliope. " To George Tubou, King of Tongatabu." In the month of November, 1852, a French ship of war, La Moselle, Captain Belland, visited Tonga, to enquire into certain complaints lodged against the King, by the captain of a French whaler, and by the Eomish priests. The King went on board, taking his state-paper box with him ; and after a conference of five hours, the French captain was perfectly satisfied. He sent this message to the King afterwards. " Tell the King I have seen and conversed with many chiefs of the South Sea Islands ; but I never knew one so wise as he. The French have acknowledged his authority, by directing me to him as supreme chief of J'onga, and he must employ his authority in protecting all foreigners from insult, and must allow his subjects to choose what religion they please ; but all must sub- mit to the law of the land." This is in accordance with George's own line of policy. KINa GEOEaE'S EEIGN. 413 While speaking of the golden opinions that King George has won, I must add that of Captain Erskine, who visited Tonga in August, 1849. He says : — " The King came on board in one of our boats^ attended by several chiefs, and bringing his son. He apologised for the Queen's absence on the plea of indisposition ; but I was told he had some doubts as to the propriety of bringing her on board. He was received with a guard of honour ; and on his leaving the ship, a salute of thirteen guns was fired, an attention which has been shown to him by several British ships of war, and which he is said to prize, as an acknowledgment of his sovereign authority. No stipulation had been made with me, however, ou the subject of honours to be paid to him ; nor could the simple dignity of his manner have been excelled by the most powerful monarch, accustomed daily to such marks of respect. George sat on a chair during dinner, and followed all our English customs ; but he asked if his little boy might have a mat at his feet, and he instructed him to use his knife and fork, which the boy did with great cleverness. . . . He inspected every part of the ship, the largest he had ever seen, or as his attendants said, ' the only ship that had ever been in Tonga,' with great interest ; and was much pleased when Mr. Miller, the gunner, exhibited the use of a diving-dress and helmet, remaining under water for what must have appeared, even to those who are expert divers, an extraordinary time. He was easily made to under- stand the principle of the apparatus, and remarked, 414 KING geoege's eeign. turning to his courtiers, ' How useless is strength unaccompanied by wisdom ! ' "* The following year, the King, with the Mission- aries, dined on board the Meander, by invitation of the Honourable Captain Keppel. Before leaving, the King spoke as follows : — " I return you my thanks for your kind visit. It is only thanks which your visit demands. The honour you have put upon me to-day is great. I thank you for these favours. But what is most a matter of thanksgiving is, that Britannia sent us the Grospel, and the Missionaries, and the Sacred Books, that we might live thereby. These we value more than men-of-war, or the visits of Queen Victoria's ships. But we value these visits also. " It is great love shown to a weak and friendless people, that a wise and powerful nation, such as Britannia, should cast its shadow over us. Under this shade we live. " We know of the confusion produced in the world by the French and others. "We wish not their visit nor friendship. Theirs is a deadly shade. " Tour visits have always been friendly visits. Has it not been so from the beginning? I flatter you not. I do not speak thus because I am on board this great ship, or because one of the Queen of England's nobles is sitting besides me. I speak in truth. If my departed ancestors could speak here to-day, would * Journal of a cruise among tlie Islands of the Western Pacific. By John Elphinstone Erskine. Page 124, KING GEOEGE's EEIG5T. 415 they not bear me witness ? Ever since of old has not your course of conduct been uniformly gracious ? "We know it has ; and if every member of my body had a voice, the only word which it would speak would be, thanksgiving ! This is the end of my speech to the chief of this ship." What would King George have been, if Chris- tianity had not been taken to Tonga ? He would have been, most likely, a great warrior, surpassing those around him in deeds of valour. He might have been distinguished by wisdom to plan, and daring to execute projects of ambition and bloody conquest ; but two elements of tru.e greatness must have been wanting, — moderation and charity. These are virtues not taught by Paganism. Christianity, by example as well as precept, teaches men to forgive their enemies. " all the soiols that were, were forfeit once ; And He that might the vantage best have took Found out the remedy." The lips of the Holiest and the most Merciful have taught us to pray, " Poi-give us our trespasses as we forgive them that trespass against us." We see in the character and conduct of the King of Tonga a beautiful example of Christian excellence ; and for the sake of the happiness and prosperity of the people, over whom he now reigns without dispute, as well as for his own sake, shall we not join in praying, God save King G eorge ! ^Im^iix im. CONCLUSION. E have seen what a thorough change has taken place in Tonga within the last thirty 'J^ years ; a change so great, that could one of Md those who visited the islands before the intro- jy duction of Christianity go there again, without g hearing anything of the events of intervening years, he would be tempted to doubt the evidence of his own eyes and ears. The idols have been utterly abolished ; the Sabbath is kept with a more strict observance than in our own land ; polygamy is entirely given up ; all parents are required to send their children to school ; the people have a written language and books ; eight thousand can read the Scriptures with more or less ability, and five thousand can write ; Christian laws are enforced ; and the land is divided among the people. In the old days, a kind of feudal system prevailed. The lower orders could not call anything they had their own. The great chiefs could seize on whatever CONCLUSIOK^. 417 took their fancy belonging to their people. If one of them saw and coveted a bunch of bananas, he might take it ; and he might even interfere with a man's more cherished things. His children were sometimes claimed, and instances have occurred in which he has been obliged to give up his wife to please his chief. All this is changed. Each man has his own plot of ground, over which he is sole master. If a chief fancies a bunch of bananas and expresses his wish for it, the poor man may have the pleasure of conferring a favour ; but shoidd he refuse, the chief dares not touch it. " He may cut his own bananas if he pleases, but not another man's." And so with more valuable possessions. The consequence is that eight or ten times as much land is now cultivated as in the heathen state of Tonga. People value and take pains with their own. Though King George is an absolute monarch, appointing such governors as he pleases, yet the people are not wholly without a voice in this matter. If a governor is found guilty of immorality, they will not submit to his rule. They represent their case to the King, who searches into the truth of the charge, and if proved to be correct, he deposes the governor. The offender loses office ; but retains his rank and family estate. Much is admitted to be yet imperfect in this Christian State ; but what has been done already fills our minds with wonder and adoring thankfulness. 2e 418 CONCLUSION. " Not by miglit, nor by power ; but by My Spirit, saith the Lord." This story would be incomplete, were I not to say a few words regarding the advantages that our own countrymen have received during their residence at Tonga, since the time that Missionary labour com- menced there. The Missionaries have been in the habit of holding one service on the Sabbath in English, for the benefit of their own families, any English residents, and such sailors as may happen to be on shore while their vessels are in the adjacent harboui'S. Many English sailors have been reformed, married native wives, obtained grants of land, and settled in the islands. Some most interest- ing stories might be told of the change wrought upon those whose conversion seemed to be most unlikely. Gr. P., a man-of-war's man, had served in fifty vessels. He was drunken, disorderly, reprobate, and had been so often punished, that his back bore lasting marks of sufiering caused by sin. He had been many times ship- wrecked and often singularly preserved. It was from shipwreck that he escaped to the Eriendly Isles. There he lived like a heathen, first at Haabai, and then at Tonga. No words could properly paint this man's character and mode of life. At last, he heard Grod's word preached by the Missionaries, and became a subject of divine grace. He has now lived many years, rejoicing in God's favour ; afflicted but pious ; witnessing to the truth of his conversion by a holy life and gracious conversation. "When Mr. Thomas CONCLUSION. 419 came over to England, four years ago, he sent a message to his friends in this country, who rejoice over his altered character. An American was convinced of sin under Mr. Thomas's first English service at Vavau, in 1835 ; he went back to his own country, and there became a preacher of the gospel. There is a little romance about another story related to me by Mr. Thomas. A ship's surgeon, unconverted and ungodly, stayed for a while at Tonga. There he fell in love with one of the island beauties, and made proposals of marriage to her. He was bound in honour to accompany his ship ; but he promised if she would only wait for him, that he would return in three years' time, bringing a stock of medicines, and would then marry her, and settle in the country. All this came to pass. The Tongan lady waited, and more wonderful to relate the English gentleman remembered her and his promise, and returned. Some time after his marriage he became an assistant Missionary. His health has since failed. Another surgeon was compelled, through sick- ness, to remain on the island. He was visited by the Missionaries ; through these visits and the reading of Wesley's sermons, divine light broke in upon his mind, he sought and found peace with God, and died in the faith of Christ. These are but a few instances out of many that are known to our Missionaries, In how many more may the bread cast upon the waters be found after many days ! 2 E 2 420 CONCLUSIOJS". What is left for us to desire in reference to Tonga ? Chiefly, I think, openings for commerce, and an enlarged literature. Some persons have called the Tonguese idle. But this is scarcely just. Their climate and their food are alike hinderances to severe and long-continued exer- tions ; and then there has been no market for native produce, except that aff"orded by the residence of a very few Europeans, and the occasional call of ships. The few wants of the islanders themselves are readily met ; but the sound of the maUet from Monday morn- ing to Saturday night, as the tapa-beaters (women) prepare the native cloth, — a cloth so frail in its texture, that a chief's garment requires renewal every week, — speaks them an industrious people. Were there a larger demand for the products of their labour, there would be a larger supply. King George has lately paid a visit to Sydney ; and it is hoped that this may lead to the establishment of relations of commerce between that flourishing colony and the islands. Mr. Thomas, too, returns to Tonga, strongly impressed witb the possibility of inducing the people to cultivate cotton with advantage. He has shown a specimen of native cotton to the President of the Chamber of Commerce, at Manchester, and has been told that it is superior to American, and equal to Egyptian cotton, and that were it brought over to this country, the demand for it would be almost unUmited. Now there are several uninhabited islands in these groups, that might be converted into cot- CONCLUSIOIf. 421 ton plantations. It is easily planted. Deep holes must be made for yams ; but to turn up the earth with a spade suffices for cotton planting, and children may be employed to gather it. And Mr. Thomas has reason to believe that arrangements may be made at Sydney, for its purchase and transport to this country. Such a scheme, should it succeed, would tend to promote the industry and prosperity of the Tonguese. Then, as to books. It is obvious that if the Friendly Islanders are to attain a higher civilisation, a larger supply of these is needful. They are a people living apart from the world. Their little island homes are divided by the broad sea-waves from all the old, highly-trained continental nations. The treasures of art and science are beyond their reach, except as they may be brought to their shores through the wonderful and mighty press. They are a reading people. The Missionaries have the key of knowledge ; they can open and shut at pleasure, admitting only such books as are likely to subserve the best interests of their charge. Cannot something be done in the way of translating into Tonguese a few of our own standard works ? Is there no lady, now living on the islands — none who has left but still loves the people, who will do for Tonga what Sarah Boardman, the second Mrs. Judson, did for Burmah ? She was not a literary lady, according to the meaning that some attach to the words. She was a true woman — gentle, loving, active ; a good housekeeper ; the cheerful companion 422 CONCLUSION. of her husband; her children's teacher and friend. Yet her heart so yearned over the heathens around her that, not contented with helping them simply by helping Dr. Judson, she felt that she must have her own hand in the work ; and so, in the intervals of time that a busy, domestic life allowed her, she sat down, and, page by page, translated the whole of JohnBunyan's immortal dream. Her justly-admiring husband says : — " Her translation of the ' Pilgrim's Progress ' into Burmese, is one of the best pieces of composition which we have yet published. Her translation of Mr. Boardman's ' Dying leather's Advice,' has become one of our standard tracts ; and her hymns in Burmese, about twenty in number, are probably the best in our chapel hymn-book — a work which she was appointed by the mission to edit. Besides these works, she published four volumes of ' Scripture Questions,' which are in constant use in our Sabbath schools. It has been remarked that the translation of the ' Pilgrim's Progress ' into an Eastern tongue, is a work worth living for, if it were one's only performance." Who will copy her example, and do a like diligent and pious work ? One object of Mr. Young's recent visit was to make an arrangement by which the Friendly Island Mission shall be henceforth placed under the care of the Australian Conference. This arrangement does not sever our South Sea Missions from English Methodism; but it lessens their dependance, and CONCLUSION. 428 leaves us free to devote more attention to the claims of the other parts of the world. Though our own immediate work in Tonga is at an end, we know that the change that has passed upon her sons during the last thirty years, is a type of the change that the large islands and vast continents of our globe are yet waiting for. What have we done for New Guinea and the Spice Islands ? What for Japan, Thibet, Tatary, Persia ? How inadequate is oiir supply of Missionaries in India and China ! We have fringed Africa with a narrow and broken border of light ; but what have we done for its dark and thickly peopled interior? And how few have turned their thoughts, and prayers, and speeches towards South America ! Have you ever seen Mr. Curnock's* large map of the world, coloured so as to show, at a glance, the com- parative spread of true and false religions ? The Pagan countries are as black as ink ; those where Popery prevails, red ; and so forth. Wherever a purer faith prevails, the spot is distinguished by bright gold colour. Mr. Curnock, some little time since, took his map to a certain shop, to be freshly done up. Calling a few days after to see how it was faring, the journeyman employed on it said, "It would look much better. Sir, if I might put a little more gilding on." " No, no, it will do as it is," said Mr. Curnock. The man pressed his point. He was sure that more * The Eev. Nehemiah Curnock, now stationed at Leeds, whom Methodists may call their Childi-en's Preacher. 424 CONCLUSIOK. gilding would improve the map. Mr. Curnock ex- plained the meaning of the various colours. The man started back, fixed his eyes on Mr. Curnock, and exclaimed, " And do you, Sir, expect to live to see all the world gilded ? " My dear young friend, cannot you and I " put a little more gilding on .? " It is not a thing too great for us to aim at : it is not a thing too great for us to do. "We may lead some soul to Christ, who shall one day be His messenger to the ends of the earth ; we may speak a word to a stranger that shall never be for- gotten ; we may become subscribers to the Missionary Society ; or, better still, collectors for it ; we may take a Daily Oifering Box, or a Christmas paper ; we may listen at a Missionary meeting, or read the story of success abroad, not only that our own zeal may be kept burning, but also to obtain the latest news for a contributor whose interest is waning, and who does "not know what is done with the money;" we may ofier prayers in our closets at home that shall bring down "showers of blessing" on foreign fields, and cheer the drooping spirits of faithful ministers. It is impossible to say in how many ways we may aid the cause of Christ, if we only give ourselves freely and fully to Grod and wait to know what He would have us to do. This is an object worthy of being set before young people at their first entrance on life. If you elect and cleave to it, you will never know what " weariness of life " means. The " winter's night and summer's CONCLUSION. 425 day " will be all too short ; for you have a great work to do, and a little time to do it in. " 'Tis worth living for tliis, to administer bliss, And salvation in Jesus's name." One word, before we part, as to giving. I am some- times afraid lest the views of the world on this subject should get in advance of the church's practice. Hear what one of the poets of the present day, a poet of this world, says on this subject : — " The secret that doth make a flower a flower, So frames it that to bloom is to be sweet, And to receive to give. The flower can die. But cannot change its natm-e ; though the earth Starve it, and the reluctant air defraud, — No soil so sterile and no hving lot So poor but it hath somewhat stUl to spare In bounteous odours. Charitable they Who, be their having more or less, so have That less is more than need, and more is less Than the great heart's good wdl." Let US act up to this mark. If our good-wiU goes on first, our giving will not lag very far behind. The hand obeys the heart. We are always receiving. Some new mercy is every day calling on us for new gratitude. iS'ay, more. Before our collector has put our last guinea into her bag, before the last penny has chinked in our Missionary box, another call has been made on our thankfulness. The breath we draw is not a right — it is a gift ; and a gift all the more precious, because it would never have been ours had 426 CONCLUSIOK. not " the Eather sent the Son to be the Saviour of the world." Do we want a stronger motive than gratitude ? Will the prospect of gain move us ? Then let us think how ample is the reward promised to those who help forward Christ's disciples and Christ's cause in the world. Let us not listen to those who say this is a poor, low, selfish motive for doing good. The reward is of grace, not according to desert. "We receive an infinite recompense for little services. As we take the gift from the hand of our bleeding Substitute, we are filled with lowliest humility, and the most grateful, adoring love. Humility and gratitude are at the furthest possible remove from a mean and absorbing self-love. And while we take our own reward, we see unnum- bered millions of Christ's faithful ones crowned with the same blessing as ourselves. It is a common reward from a common Saviour. Besides, He who knows man's frame, and who is the source of all the streams of human charity, appeals to this motive, — the hope of future reward. Are we wiser or nobler than He ? " Whosoever shall give to drink unto one of these little ones a cup of cold water only in the name of a disciple, verily I say unto you, he shall in no wise lose his reward." — Matthew x. 42. — "Sell whatsoever thou hast and give to the poor, and thou shalt have treasure in heaven." — Mark x. 21. " And every man shall receive his own reward, according to his own labour." — 1 Cor. iii. 8. Our reward is in safer hands than our own. Were CONCLUSION". 127 it given to us now, perchance we might part with it. Men have bartered away health, and wealth, and tame, and more precious love ; and those who were once rich in gold, and good words, and dear friends, have become bankrupt of all ; but our reward is with our Saviour, eternally safe and siu-e. " Verily, I say unto you, he shaU in no ivise lose his reward." -^-^^(o)'^^-^^ LONDON: HAXMAN EEOTHEES, PRINTEES, 5, WHIIF.FIilAES STEEET, FLEET STREET. ^^!^- f. ivaan-# "^^Anvaan-^ '^j:?]3dnvsov'<^ '%'5a3AiNn-3\\v^ UNIVER%. ^lOSANCElfJV. -^,nMIIBRARY(9/^ <>MLIBRARyQ/> J? UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY nuy Los Angeles This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. ■d- ^^' SEP 11^935 BR/s , J] NOV 51987 5 QIC 6 a ^'^^"^ RtCO LO UW 1^ MAR 14 19818 NIV /^^]^ 9 B90 Vs ^ :3>^§ i *'in p § '^in s UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY v^^ '^/sa3AiNn3WV^ "^(^Aavaan-^ Mi IFn'l I! mM ^ME•UNIVER5•/A =o ^ A;^lOSANCElfx> 3jo^ '^.j/OJnvDjo'^